Todo Sobre WORK Order Ellipse

Work Orders - 3620Ellipse Version 6.3.3 Document ID: 228604 Copyright 2009 by Mincom®. All rights reserved. This document is copyright and may contain proprietary information. Except as expressly permitted under relevant copyright law, neither this document, nor any portion of it may be reproduced in any manner (digital or otherwise), used as a basis to create derivative works, or translated into another language without Mincom’s express written consent. Other named products may be registered trademarks of their respective owners. The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. Published in Australia - 20/11/2009, 13:12. Contents i Contents Work Orders 5  Further Information - Module Overview..........................................................................................8  Work Orders - Diagram ................................................................................................................11  Configuring Work Orders .............................................................................................................11  Configuring Work Orders - Diagram ..................................................................................13  Configure System Control File ...........................................................................................13  Configure District Control File ............................................................................................14  Work Order Prefixes ..........................................................................................................14  Create Work Order Prefixes...............................................................................................15  Maintain Table Files ...........................................................................................................16  Maintaining Work Orders .............................................................................................................17  Maintaining Work Orders - Diagram ..................................................................................19  Work Orders - MSO Programs...........................................................................................20  Create a Work Order ..........................................................................................................20  Record Materials Requirements for a Work Order ............................................................22  Record Equipment Requirements for a Work Order ..........................................................24  Record Resource Requirements for a Work Order............................................................25  Assign a Work Order ..........................................................................................................27  View My Work Orders ........................................................................................................27  View Work Orders for Work Group ....................................................................................28  View Work Notices .............................................................................................................28  Schedule Work Order ........................................................................................................29  Reschedule Single or Multiple Work Orders ......................................................................30  Create Requisition Header.................................................................................................32  Create a Requisition for Header Requirements .................................................................33  Record User Status ............................................................................................................34  Record Work in Progress for a Work Order .......................................................................35  Update Work Order Durations ...........................................................................................35  Update Work Order Cost Estimates...................................................................................36  Create a Work Order from a Standard Job ........................................................................38  Copy a Work Order from an Existing Work Order .............................................................40  Work Orders - Defer a Work Order ....................................................................................41  Complete a Work Order .....................................................................................................42  Cancel a Work Order .........................................................................................................42  Reopen a Work Order ........................................................................................................43  Finalise a Work Order ........................................................................................................44  Delete a Work Order ..........................................................................................................45  Review Work Order Details................................................................................................45  Review Work Order Requirements ....................................................................................47  Bulk Closure of Work Orders .............................................................................................48  Work Order Bulk Update ....................................................................................................49  Work Order Bulk Labour Costing .......................................................................................49  Maintaining Tolerances ................................................................................................................50  Apply Tolerance Values .....................................................................................................51  Maintaining Work Order Tasks.....................................................................................................53  Maintaining Work Order Tasks - Diagram .........................................................................55  Create a Work Order Task .................................................................................................55  Record Job Instructions on a Task ....................................................................................56  Record Material Requirements for a Task .........................................................................56  Record Equipment Requirements for a Task.....................................................................58  Record Resource Requirements for a Task ......................................................................60  Record APLs and Clear Task APL Type ...........................................................................62  Assign a Work Order Task .................................................................................................63  Schedule a Work Order Task.............................................................................................63  Reschedule a Work Order Task.........................................................................................64  © 2009 Mincom ii Contents Create a Requisition ..........................................................................................................65  Create a Requisition for Task Requirements .....................................................................66  Modify Work Order Task and Cancel Task Update ...........................................................67  Record Work in Progress for a Task ..................................................................................68  Complete a Work Order Task ............................................................................................68  Cancel a Work Order Task ................................................................................................70  Reopen a Work Order Task ...............................................................................................71  Delete a Work Order Task .................................................................................................71  Review Work Order Task Details .......................................................................................72  Review Work Order Task Requirements and APLs...........................................................72  Maintaining Task Assignments ....................................................................................................73  Create New Task Assignment ...........................................................................................73  Review, Maintain and Delete Task Assignments...............................................................74  Printing Job Cards ........................................................................................................................76  Print Job Card for Work Order Headers ............................................................................77  Print Job Card for Work Order Task ..................................................................................78  Maintaining Parent Work Orders ..................................................................................................78  Maintaining Parent Work Orders - Diagram.......................................................................80  Create Parent Work Order .................................................................................................80  Create a Parent Work Order from a Parent Standard Job ................................................81  Create a Parent Work Order and Subordinate Work Orders from a Standard Job Plan or Parent Standard Job ..........................................................................................................82  Create a Parent Work Order from an Existing Parent Work Order....................................83  Modify Parent Work Order .................................................................................................83  Delete Parent Work Order .................................................................................................84  Review all Details of a Parent Work Order ........................................................................84  Maintaining Incident Logsheets....................................................................................................85  Maintaining Incident Logsheets - Diagram ........................................................................86  Create Incident Logsheet Entries.......................................................................................87  Modify Incident Logsheet Entries .......................................................................................87  Review Incident Logsheet Entries .....................................................................................88  Delete Incident Logsheet Entries .......................................................................................88  Auto Create Incident Work Order.......................................................................................89  Viewing Links to Work Orders ......................................................................................................90  Viewing Links to Work Orders - Diagram ...........................................................................91  Review Accounting Entries Linked to a Work Order ..........................................................91  Review Requisitions Linked to a Work Order ....................................................................92  Review Equipment Tracing Actions Linked to a Work Order .............................................92  Review Condition Monitoring Linked to a Work Order .......................................................93  Review Job Estimates Linked to a Work Order .................................................................93  Review Job Packages Linked to a Work Order .................................................................94  Review Documents Linked to a Work Order......................................................................94  Work Orders - Reports .................................................................................................................96  MSA620 - Work Order Analysis Report .............................................................................97  MSA621 - Work Order Job Card ......................................................................................103  MSA622 - Work Order Requirements Report ..................................................................105  MSA710 - Missed Schedule Maintenance Report ...........................................................107  MSAEFF - Maintenance Effectiveness and Efficiency Report.........................................110  MSAMTF - Mean Time Between Failure .........................................................................118  MSAMTR - Mean Time to Repair.....................................................................................123  MSAXWO - Work Order Analysis Summary ....................................................................128  MSB622 - Work Order Cost Reallocation ........................................................................130  MSB623 - Work Order Automatic Finalisation .................................................................131  MSB624 - Update W/O Status for Available Material ......................................................133  MSB627 - Work Order Generation for Type Defects .......................................................134  MSB628 - Reset Tasks Plan Start Dates .........................................................................136  MSR620 - Work Order Analysis Report ...........................................................................137  MSR621 - Work Order Task - Job Card ..........................................................................139  MSR623 - Archive Work Selection...................................................................................140  MSR626 - Work Order Backlog Report ...........................................................................141  MSRXWJ - XML Work Order Job Card Report................................................................142  © 2009 Mincom Contents Work Orders - Screens iii 143  Dialog Box - Bulk Closure Work Orders .....................................................................................145  Dialog Box - Bulk Reschedule Work Orders ..............................................................................146  Dialog Box - Cancel Work Order ................................................................................................147  Dialog Box - Cancel WO Task ...................................................................................................148  Dialog Box - Change Status .......................................................................................................149  Dialog Box - Complete Work Order............................................................................................150  Dialog Box - Complete WO Task ...............................................................................................152  Dialog Box - Copy from Existing Work Order .............................................................................153  Dialog Box - Copy from Parent Standard Job ............................................................................154  Dialog Box - Copy from Parent Work Order ...............................................................................155  Dialog Box - Copy from Standard Job........................................................................................156  Dialog Box - Copy Text to Work Order.......................................................................................157  Dialog Box - Defer Work Order ..................................................................................................158  Dialog Box - Finalise Work Order or Subsystem .......................................................................159  Dialog Box - Finish Assignment .................................................................................................160  Dialog Box - Job Instructions .....................................................................................................161  Dialog Box - Modify User Status ................................................................................................162  Dialog Box - New Requisition.....................................................................................................163  Dialog Box - Options (MSQ620).................................................................................................164  Dialog Box - Print GIS Map ........................................................................................................168  Dialog Box - Print Work Order Job Cards ..................................................................................170  Dialog Box - Record Work in Progress ......................................................................................171  Dialog Box - Requirements (Work Orders) ................................................................................172  Dialog Box - Reschedule ............................................................................................................181  Dialog Box - Reschedule Tasks .................................................................................................182  Dialog Box - Reschedule Work Orders ......................................................................................183  Dialog Box - Select Material Requirements ...............................................................................184  Dialog Box - Select Material Requirements for a Task ..............................................................185  Dialog Box - Schedule Work ......................................................................................................186  Dialog Box - Schedule WO Task................................................................................................189  Dialog Box - Start Assignment ...................................................................................................191  Dialog Box - Options (Tools » Options)......................................................................................192  Dialog Box - Update Estimates ..................................................................................................198  Dialog Box - WO Task Assign To...............................................................................................200  Dialog Box - Work Order Assign To ...........................................................................................201  Dialog Box - Work Order Durations............................................................................................202  Dialog Box - Work Order Task ...................................................................................................204  MSE620 - My Work Orders ........................................................................................................211  MSE620 - Work Orders Search .................................................................................................212  MSM001A - Maintain System Control File .................................................................................218  MSM001C - Maintain Systems Control File (Cont.) ...................................................................221  MSM00AA - Modify Modules Installed .......................................................................................229  MSM00BA - District Control Information ....................................................................................230  MSM00EA - District Control Information - Maintain Work Order Prefix Information ..................238  MSM097A - Review Standard Text ............................................................................................240  MSM620A - Maintain Complete Work Order Information ..........................................................241  MSM621A - Review Work Order Information .............................................................................243  MSM621B - Additional Work Order Selection Parameters ........................................................247  MSM621D - Review Work Order - Summary .............................................................................249  MSM622A - Review Work Order - General Information.............................................................253  MSM622B - Review Work Order - Planning Information ...........................................................257  MSM622C - Review Work Order Code/Completion Information ...............................................262  MSM622D - Review Duration Information .................................................................................265  MSM624A - Review Work Order - Summary of Tasks ..............................................................266  MSM624B - Review Work Order Task Information ....................................................................267  MSM625A - Maintain Parent Work Order Information ...............................................................270  MSM625B - Parent Work Order .................................................................................................271  MSM626A - Review of Parent Work Orders ..............................................................................273  MSM626B - Review Parent Work Order Detail ..........................................................................274  MSM626C - Summary of Parent Work Orders ..........................................................................276  © 2009 Mincom iv Contents MSM627A - Maintain Incident Logsheets ..................................................................................277  MSM627B - Create/Modify/Delete Incident Logsheet Entries ...................................................279  MSM628A - Review Work Order Materials Status .....................................................................282  MSM62AA - Modify Work Order - General Information .............................................................284  MSM62CB - Work Order Subsystem Finalization ......................................................................288  MSM62DA - Maintain Equipment Tracing for Work Order .........................................................290  MSM62EA - Modify Job Duration Information ............................................................................295  MSM62FA - Maintain Work Order Task Completion Information ..............................................297  MSM62FB - Complete Work Order Tasks .................................................................................298  MSM62GA - Print Selected Work Orders and/or Tasks.............................................................299  MSM62HA - Create Work Order from Standard Job .................................................................300  MSM62IA - Create Short-form Orders For Equipment...............................................................303  MSM62JA - Create Short-form Work Orders for Plant...............................................................305  MSM62KA - Delete Work Orders ...............................................................................................307  MSM62LA - Review Job Duration Information ...........................................................................309  MSM62MA - Review Work Order Tasks - for Work Group ........................................................311  MSM62NA - Bulk Work Order Update Selection .......................................................................313  MSM62NB - Additional Bulk Work Order Update Selection ......................................................316  MSM62NC - Maintain Bulk Work Order Code and Duration ......................................................318  MSM62PA - Create/Maintain Short-form Work Order................................................................321  MSM62QA - Create/maintain Shortform Work Order ................................................................325  MSM62RA - Maintain Work Order Billing Information................................................................331  MSM62SA - Review Work Order Billing Information..................................................................336  MSM62TA - Create/Maintain Incident Work Order ....................................................................339  MSM62VA - Review Incident Logsheets ....................................................................................343  MSM62VB - Review Incident Logsheet Entries .........................................................................345  MSM62WA - Create/Maintain Shortform Work Order ................................................................347  MSM62XA - Create Work Orders from a Std Job Plan Parent Std Job .....................................354  MSM62YA - Create/Maintain Work Order For Equipment .........................................................358  MSM633A - Review Complete Maintenance History .................................................................363  MSM854A - Labour Costing Transaction Entry .........................................................................364  MSQ140 - Requisition ................................................................................................................368  MSQ345 - Condition Monitoring Set Measurements .................................................................384  MSQ580 - Document .................................................................................................................387  MSQ620 - Work Orders .............................................................................................................392  MSQ620 - Work Order Task ......................................................................................................411  MSQ625 - Parent Work Order....................................................................................................419  MSQ629 - Notice ........................................................................................................................424  MSQ62C - Search for Task Assignments ..................................................................................431  MSQ62C - Create Task Assignments ........................................................................................433  MSQ650 - Equipment Tracing....................................................................................................434  MSQ655 - Job Estimating ..........................................................................................................436  MSQ695 - Job Package .............................................................................................................453  MSQ901 - Accounting Entry .......................................................................................................460  © 2009 Mincom Work Orders - 3620 5 Work Orders The cost of building and maintaining assets is one of the biggest expenses for a business. It is nearly impossible for companies to monitor or control costs if they do not have an accurate way to record and track the work that is needed to keep assets in optimal working condition. Often the work required to build new assets or lengthen the life of existing assets requires complex jobs that rely on human and equipment resources as well as consumable materials all of which need planning and cost controls. The Ellipse Work Order module is one of several modules that are integrated to provide for recording, tracking, and analysing work that is performed. While the Project Control module provides a tool for the management of large, complex capital projects from a primarily financial perspective, the Work Order module provides the means for defining individual jobs or small groups of jobs from a operational and maintenance perspective. Work orders can cover any activity that may occur within an organisation. The work order provides a means of notifying a person, work group or crew about an activity. You can specify the: • Requirements of the activity • Schedule for the activity • Progress of the activity • Estimated and actual costs of the activity Work areas that are most efficiently captured by the Work Order tool include: • Preventative Maintenance - The ideal situation for maintenance organisations is to be able to maintain equipment on a regular, efficient cycle so as to minimise breakdowns, extend the life of assets, and ultimately increase productivity and/or revenue while effectively controlling costs. Scheduled Work Orders are used as the vehicle to alert maintenance personnel of the need for this preventative maintenance. Using Standard Job templates and Maintenance Scheduled Tasks to produce regularly scheduled Work Orders gives maintenance managers the ability to control the timing of maintenance and the resources used to perform the work. • Breakdown Maintenance - Although Preventative Maintenance is a goal of many asset intensive organisations, this maintenance methodology is not always 100% effective nor is it always applied to equipment that is not considered critical. In these cases, Work Orders can also provide the means of recording the need for maintenance due to the imminent or actual breakdown of equipment. While some cases may allow for Work Order creation before the work is undertaken, often breakdown work may occur before a current Work Order can be created. This type of job including the work performed, part causing equipment failure, and costs associated with the repair can be recorded on a Work Order retrospectively so as to maintain a complete history of the equipment. • Standing Work Orders - Frequent yet small jobs may be created as standalone Work Orders. These Work Orders can then be used to capture costs each time the job occurs. A cumulative cost of the job is then recorded against a single Work Order over a period of time. Training Work Orders are a common example of a standing Work Order. Each time an employee attends training, the hours attended can be recorded on the standing work order thereby summing the total training time invested over a period of time. • Project Work Orders - When Work Orders are needed to manage work that belongs to a larger project, the Project identification code can be assigned to the Work Order for financial inclusion in © 2009 Mincom 6 Work Orders - 3620 the full Project accounting structure. Credit and debit transactions will automatically be booked to the linked Project when any costing entries are recorded on the Work Order. • Warranty Work Orders - The Work Order module offers the ability to produce a warning if a Work Order is created for work on a piece of equipment that is currently under warranty. The Work Order application will check the Equipment Register to determine if the date of the Work Order is before the expiry date of the equipment's warranty. Providing this warranty warning helps to eliminate in-house work that can potentially void a manufacturers warranty. Within a work order, an activity can be recorded as one or more tasks. The costing of Work Order activities can be recorded at the header level of the overall work order or against these individual work order tasks. Work orders and parent work orders can be created by referencing existing documents such as work orders, parent orders, parent standard jobs, and standard job plans. Glossary These terms are in common use throughout this module: • APL • Equipment • Job Estimate • Job Package • Parent Standard Job • Parent Work Order • Requirements • Standard Job • Standard Job Plan • Task Diagram The Work Orders module diagram represents the processes associated with the Work Orders module and its integration with other modules. Reports Comprehensive reports and batch processes are available within Ellipse, which allow users to access additional information and perform batch update activities. To see a description of these reports, refer to Work Order Reports. Note: For information on how to generate a batch job or report, refer to Reporting. See Also: • Job Estimates • Job Packaging © 2009 Mincom Work Orders - 3620 • Project Control • Work Requests 7 © 2009 Mincom to permanently record facts about the job.Module Overview Ellipse provide three modules to identify and control jobs. defining recurring tasks which can: • be performed in its own right without a work order • be performed in its own right. Ellipse provides powerful recording.3620 Further Information . The following information pertaining to work orders is available: • Planning information. This is performed by either comparing the current operating date to the warranty expiry date (held on the Equipment Register) or comparing the latest operating statistic value to the warranty expiry statistic value. These are: • Project Control module. labour hours and durations incurred in doing the job. and utilising critical path analysis and other monitoring techniques to assist in the control of the job during its life. • initialise a unique work order on each occurrence of the task. with costs being collected in standing work orders. Ellipse detects whether or not the equipment or any equipment fitted to the equipment (the subject of the work order) is still under warranty. using the standard job mechanisms of Ellipse. describing when and who should do the job and the estimated resources and costs required. • Work Order module. Extensive text can be entered by the person completing the work order. Ellipse assumes that operational or maintenance personnel will control the execution of the job with little monitoring by Ellipse. • Maintenance Scheduling task. If the equipment or any equipment fitted to the equipment is subject to warranty.8 Work Orders . Costs can be collected for a work order and its parent work order. Costs can be collected at each level of the hierarchy. • A series of codes are available to comprehensively categorise a job. Part defect code and Quantity/Disposition code • History file code • Part number causing failure • Equipment serial number taken off • Equipment serial number installed on • Actual costs. System failure code. for example. which can be related directly (not hierarchically) to other work orders or to projects. using both coded and textual information. defining an individual job. defining a large hierarchically arranged series of jobs and tasks. They include: • Job description code • Maintenance type • User-defined job classifications (10). These codes can be set up to meet individual company requirements. the work order type is overview (after confirmation) with the default warranty work order type from the system control © 2009 Mincom . During work order creation. reporting and analysis mechanisms. but only one is entered. The screen for these short-form work order programs is blank the first time it is displayed. This will not be apparent during this transaction. simply blank out the default warranty work order type in the system control file. • If no prefix is entered the program tries to use a default standard job M62*WM (the asterisk is the letter associated with the relevant short-form Work Order program). Upon return from the review standard jobs summary program © 2009 Mincom . If both an equipment reference and project reference can be entered. but not both. the work order will reveal that this action has occurred. to display the default standard job and its details.) • If either an equipment reference or a project reference can be entered. Press the transmit key after any field is completed. • Default according to the Costing Option set. the code is defaulted where it has not been entered. from either the equipment reference or the project reference entered. If overwriting of the work order type is not required. you can enter an equipment reference and press the appropriate function key to transfer to the review standard jobs summary program (MSO692) and display standard Jobs for selection. and it has an Account Code recorded against it). Defaulting of standard jobs is as follows: • If a prefix is entered the program looks for a default Standard Job in the format M62*<PREFIX> (the asterisk is the letter associated with the relevant short-form work Order program. but subsequent modification to. a standard job can be entered from which to create the work order. If an account code can be entered against a work order. it is also defaulted. or enquiry against. An account code must be recorded against a work order when it is created.3620 9 file. MSO62P). the default is from what is entered.Work Orders . and both have been entered. M62 PREFIX would be used with the create/maintain short-form work order program. (This only applies where an equipment reference or project reference can be entered when creating work orders. For example. The following short-form work order programs allow entry of a standard job: • MSO62P • MSO62Q • MSO62W • MSO62H • MSO62Y • MSO62T. The same processing applies as where the prefix is entered. (if a Standard Job has been entered or defaulted. the Account Code is defaulted from the entered reference. If an account code cannot be entered against a work order (For example. using some shortform work order screens). At any point during work order creation. Where the account code is defaulted from is determined from the following hierarchy: • Default from a Standard Job from which the work order is to be created. Work order creation can then proceed by editing and completing the screen fields. When creating a work order via a short-form work order program. integrated with. All work orders meeting the parameters are printed in subsequent batch reports. users can request batch reports online. costs can be broken down by cost category. debit and/or credit transactions are created for the project with zero dollar value for auditing purposes. the standard job details do not overwrite the previously entered details. purchase requisitions. Forms can be provided in formats specific to each work area's requirement. A number of screens are available to provide comprehensive online review of work order information. Work orders can be opened at any time prior to. Processing Description Work order information can be entered into Ellipse from a work order form. financial accounting requirements. Any transactions actioned before a work order is opened are automatically collected when the work order is created. This facility provides a very comprehensive history analysis capability.3620 (MSO692) where a standard job has been selected. including labour resources required and an application parts listing designating the material required. stores issues. Cost categories are defined by their use. Alternatively. The quoting of work order numbers on time sheets and material requisitions and other documents automatically attributes costs to the work order. This action automatically adds the work order into the resources planning mechanisms of Ellipse for both labour and material. labour charges) prepared by the related Information management system can record work order numbers. If the Cost categorisation module is used. © 2009 Mincom .10 Work Orders . inspection sheets. In addition. or after the actual occurrence of a job. during. Work orders opened in advance can optionally quote planning information. If screen details have been entered prior to the selection of a standard job. removed from or changed in a work order. but independent of. The total amount transferred and the work order number is included in the transaction description. operator logs or any source notifying the requirement for the job. All financial transactions ( For example. and can serve a number of roles. the standard job details merge with the entered details. including both future and completed work. When a project number is added to. The costing mechanism for work orders can be devoted entirely to supporting the needs of operations and maintenance personnel. These include: • Operators log sheets • Inspectors reports • Inter-work group requests to perform work • Paperwork to get the job done • Inter-shift log sheet • Computer input documents. That is. you can continue creating a work order by editing and completing screen fields. work orders can be created in Ellipse using pre-determined standard job information. and can be as simple or as complex as required. Configuring Work Orders Within Ellipse there are three areas in which configuration activities must be performed before the Work Orders module can be used. With rare exceptions. configuration for the system control and district control is established.3620 11 Work Orders . Mincom-defined table files may be modified throughout the life of the system. These areas are: • System controls • District controls • Table files During implementation. © 2009 Mincom .Diagram The diagram below represents the processes associated with the Work Orders module and its integration with other modules.Work Orders . Table files may be added to throughout the life of the system. these settings should not be changed. it is imperative changes are not made after initial configuration. To avoid data corruption. except for the settings expressly stated in this document that may be modified without affecting the integrity of the system. © 2009 Mincom .3620 Diagram The Work Orders Configuration process diagram represents the Work Order configuration process. Business Rules The following business rule governs this process: • The setting of the System and District control files should go through a business requirement study before final agreement and before the data fields/table files are set.12 Work Orders . 3620 13 Configuring Work Orders .Diagram The diagram below represents the system activities associated with the Configuring Work Orders process. Access MSO001 . Security access to change System Control settings is normally limited to the System Administrator. and any changes are recorded along with supporting comments for the reason for the change. Activity Steps 1. Enter option Maintain Systems Control Information. © 2009 Mincom . Settings are recorded in a Configuration Workbook. 2. Configure System Control File Use this activity to select the appropriate configuration settings for Work Orders.Maintain Systems Control Information. System Control settings are usually determined during an Ellipse implementation or upgrade project.Work Orders . The MSM001A .Maintain Systems Control File screen displays. 2.Maintain Systems Control File screen displays.Modify District Control Information screen displays. Settings are recorded in a Configuration Workbook and any changes are recorded along with supporting comments for the reason for the change. Click Save. Click Save.Maintain System Control File (Cont. Enter data in the following field: District 4. Security access to change District Control settings is normally limited to the System Administrator. Press ENTER until you reach MSM001C. Configure District Control File Use this activity to select the appropriate configuration settings for Work Orders. Click Save.3620 3. 3. Enter data in the following field on the Scheduling/WO's tab: Default Warranty WO Type 8.) screen displays. Click OK. 7. 6. Activity Steps 1. Select the Work Orders tab. 5.14 Work Orders . 6. Click OK. District Control settings are usually determined during an Ellipse implementation or upgrade project.Maintain Systems Control Information. Work Order Prefixes The Work Order system provides two major entities: © 2009 Mincom . The MSM00BA . Enter data in the following fields: Auto Authorisation Reallocation Debit Expense Element Reallocation Credit Expense Element 7.Maintain Modules Installed screen displays. 4. Enter through until you locate the 3620 Work Orders module: Installed (enter Y) 5. The MSM00AA . Access MSO001 . The MSM001A . The MSM001C . Enter option Modify District Control Information. This transaction allows establishment of valid prefixes for work order use. Each work order prefix can be defined as having leading zeroes as part of the system-generated number. and the current number for prefix 'PR' is 123. In each case. The number (or portion thereof) assigned by Ellipse is always numeric. This prefix is the first two characters of the 8-character work order number. either enter the entire number or allow Ellipse to assign one. If you do not enter a prefix. Ellipse assigns the whole work order number. In each case.Work Orders . Any prefix you enter can be alphabetic or numeric. When you allow Ellipse to assign the number. Create Work Order Prefixes Use this activity to enter Work Order prefix information to control automatic assignment to Work Orders. This transaction allows maintenance of the information used by Ellipse to assign the ID numbers. This prefix is the first two characters of the 8-character Work Order number.3620 • Parent Work Order • Work Order (subordinate) 15 The ID for each entity can be assigned by Ellipse. you can designate a 2-character prefix. © 2009 Mincom . It optionally enables users to enter (or modify) the first sequential number Ellipse will assign to work orders. when you create a new work order. If the flag is set to 'N' (leading zeroes required). you can designate a 2-character prefix. the next number is PR000124. For example. A separate series of numbers is maintained for each prefix and for those assigned with no prefix. if the appropriate flag is set to 'Y' (suppress zeroes). either enter the entire number or allow Ellipse to assign one. When you allow Ellipse to assign the number. the next system-generated number is PR124. Overview diagram Maintain Work Order Prefixes Windows MSM00EA Maintain Work Order Prefix Program MSO00E System Control File MSF000 Additional information The IDs for parent work orders and work orders are a maximum of eight characters each. The IDs for Parent Work Orders and Work Orders are a maximum of eight characters each. when you create a new Work Order. 16 Work Orders . 2. Click on an item below to see the table file description and its associated values (if applicable): • CC .Job Description © 2009 Mincom . 3. For information on how to maintain a table file.3620 If you do not enter a prefix. Press ENTER until you reach MSM00EA. Click Save The MSM00EA . Enter data in the following field: District 4. For example. A separate series of numbers is maintained for each prefix and for those assigned with no prefix. 6. Any prefix you enter can be alphabetic or numeric. The MSM00BA . the next number is PR000124. Each Work Order prefix can be defined as having leading zeroes as part of the system-generated number. If the flag is set to N . The MSM001A .Maintain Systems Control Information. and the current number for prefix 'PR' is 123.Maintain Systems Control File screen displays.leading zeroes required. Click OK. Enter option Modify District Control Information. not Mincom-defined table files. Ellipse assigns the whole Work Order number. Activity Steps 1. refer to Maintaining Table Files. Enter data in the following fields: Prefix Description Zero Suppress Parent Sequence Number Workorder Sequence Number 7. Click Save. The number assigned by Ellipse is always numeric. the next system-generated number is PR124. Maintain Table Files There are table files that need to be maintained as a part of the configuration of this module. Ellipse security determines whether you are able to maintain table files. 8.suppress zeroes. 5. Users normally only need to maintain client-defined table files. Access MSO001 . if the appropriate flag is set to Y .Completion Text Code • CI .Maintain Work Order Prefix Information screen redisplays.Modify District Control Information screen displays.Completion Instructions • JD . Maintenance Type • MWDO . work group or crew about the details of an activity and when the activity needs to take place. Large activities can be specified as a number of small activities or Tasks.Plant Shutdown Type • SI .User Defined WO Task Status • UW . It provides a means of notifying a person.State Table Maintaining Work Orders A Work Order can cover any activity that may occur within an organisation. For example.Street Type • SY .Location Special Needs • SLOC .Plan Start Date Warning Messages • PY . As action on the Work Order progresses.Work Order Job Codes • WO .Work Order Job Card • WS . Requirements and schedules can be recorded against individual Tasks and totalled for the Work Order.Safety Instructions • US .User Work Order Status The Locations application requires the following Table Files to be configured: • LC0-LC9 . the Work Order application can be used to action the Task of fitting a new head light on a vehicle and it can also be used to action the construction of a new warehouse.Work Order Types • WOJC .Work Orders .Unit of Works • W0 .3620 17 • MJC . A Work Order can be used for actioning and tracking small or large activities. one or more people can add details.Mandatory Job Codes • MT .Location Code Type • LNSN .Street Location • STTY .Document Classification • LCTY .Manage Work District Options • PSDW . Business Rules The following business rule governs this process: © 2009 Mincom .Work Order Priority Code • SD .W9 . Work Order authorisation depends only on the existence of an Authorised By responsibility code in the following cases: • The Position Management module is not installed • The Position Management module is not installed and the Automatic Authorisation flag is not set For further information on the Automatic Authorisation process please refer to the Ellipse Information Package CD.3620 The Work Order authorisation process is only available in conjunction with the Position Management module or when the Automatic Authorisation flag is set. © 2009 Mincom .18 Work Orders . If the Position Management module is not installed. Program MSO62D Maintain Work Order Planning Infor.Diagram Maintain Complete Work Order Infor.Work Orders . B MSM62EA MSM623A MSM62FB MSM62GA Work Order File MSF620 Standard Job Task File MSF693 Other Validation Files Maintain Complete Work Order Information MSO620 Work Order Task File MSF623 Work Order Duration File MSF622 Create / Modify Work Order General Infor. Program MSO62A Enter Equipment Fitment Infor. MSM620A Standard Job File MSF690 MSM62AA MSM62BA MSM62CA. Program MSO62C Update Work Order Task Infor. Progr. Program MSO623 Equipment Tracing File MSF650 Complete Work Order Task MSO62F Work Order Update Subroutine MSS620 © 2009 Mincom .3620 19 Maintaining Work Orders . Program MSO62B Maintain Duration Infor. Program MSO62E Update Work Order Code/ Completion / Subsys Finalize Infor. The Work/Daily Whereabouts Notices is created using a Work Order.MSO Programs The MSQ620 . see Work Orders . A Work Notice is a notice containing information about the work required for communication to an authority. The Notifications menu option and icon is activated for users to review the associated notice. Work Orders cover any activity that occurs within an organisation.Create Work Order From Standard Job • MSO62Q .Create/Maintain Short Form Work Order • MSO62H .Create Work Order for Minor Plant Create a Work Order Use this activity to create a stand-alone Work Order or a Work Notice. It is required when work that is to be performed at a location. especially for emergency work.Short Form Work Order which provides the ability to create and complete Work Order on one screen • MSO62Y . However. requires an authority to be notified. they should be created and closed after the fact to record the problem description. You can specify the: • Requirements of the activity • Schedule for the activity • Estimated and actual costs of the activity • Duration. work group or crew about an activity.Short Form Work Order and Task • MSO62W .Further Information. short form work orders can still be used for specialised situations.3620 Work Orders . a Work/Daily Whereabouts Notice is created. A stand-alone Work Order is one that is created by directly accessing the Work Order application and creating a Work Order from scratch without the use of an MST or other Mincom Ellipse trigger. To initiate this process.20 Work Orders . Activity Steps © 2009 Mincom .Short Form Work Order which provides a list of current Work Orders for Equipment entered There are also programs that allow the quick creation of multiple Work Orders on one screen. solution and cost of the work. For information on other Work Order creation options such as short-form Work Orders. a notice location is entered on the Address tab and an appropriate Maintenance Type entered with the relevant associated values. Work Orders do not need to be created prior to an activity. When the Work Order is saved. However. The Work Order provides a means of notifying a person. A Work Order is used to record work already done.Work Order program replaces the overall functionality of both the long form and short form work order programs. These include: • MSO62I . The short form work order programs available in Ellipse include the following: • MSO62P .Create Work Orders for Equipment • MSO62J . The MSQ620 . or you can enter the number manually. Enter data in the following fields: Work Order No Work Order Desc Enter a Work Order Prefix if applicable. Click Save. Enter data in the following fields on the Definition tab: Work Group 5. Click EGI Profile Search to search for component and modifier codes. The Work Order number can be automatically generated by the system if the field is left blank. 4. the prefix is the first two characters of the Work Order number. 6. The MSQ620 . complete the remaining details of the Work Order on the following available tabs: Planning Tasks Cost Allocation Address Completion Job Codes Reference Codes 9. Note: If the maintenance type with the relevant associated value is entered on the Planning tab and a notice location is entered on the Address tab.Search for Work Order. Enter data in the following field of the Cost Allocation tab: Cost Centre/Account 8.3620 21 1. A Work Order number is generated. 3. a work notice is generated when the work © 2009 Mincom . 7. Access MSQ620 .Search for Work Order screen displays. Select Work Order»New.Work Order screen displays. 2.Work Orders . If a prefix is used. Enter data in the following fields of the Planning tab: Work Order Type Maintenance Type An associate value can be entered against a Maintenance Type code to create a link to the Notifications module (3629). If required. the Details and Costs tabs.Work Order Requirements displays. Activity Steps 1. Select Requirements » Show. Select a Material Type option. 2. 4. You can also select Work Order » Notifications to review or modify the work notice details. 10.Search for Work Order screen displays. The MSQ620 . Access MSQ620 . Enter data in the following fields: Part Number Mnemonic 2. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. Material requirements will be used to requisition catalogued and non-catalogued parts from a Work Order for use during a job. Go to Step 9. You can view or modify the work notice details by clicking . © 2009 Mincom . The Dialog Box . 5. If you selected the Non-Catalogued option: 1.Work Order screen displays. This activity will set material requirements on the Work Order header. b.3620 order is created. Select Work Order»Close. Enter data in the following field: Stock Code 2. Select the Details tab. If you selected the Catalogued option: 1. Perform one of the following steps: a. The Part Number. Click .Search for Work Order. Select the Materials tab then click . 7. Only catalogued items from the login district are added as material requirements. 3. Go to Step 9. Two extra tabs display. 6. The MSQ620 . Record Materials Requirements for a Work Order Use this activity to record the details and costs of Material requirements for a Work Order. Mnemonic and Description displays.22 Work Orders . 3. Select the Costs tab. If you selected the Manual Rate option: 1.Work Order screen displays. b. Details recorded on the Details and Costs tabs display in the Materials tab summary grid.3620 23 If the Non-Catalogued option is selected and a Part Number/Mnemonic combination entered exists on the supply catalogue. Select Requirements » Close. The System Rate option is only available for items that have a Material Type of Catalogued. 10. Enter data in the following fields in the Qty field group: Qty Reqd (Quantity Required) UOM (Unit of Measure) 3. Select a Costing Method option. If you selected the Fixed Amount option: 1. 11. Enter data in the following fields in the Price field group: Item Price 2. 9. Click Save. the system returns a warning message indicating that the item is a catalogued item and the stock code defaults. 14. Repeat Steps 5 – 12 until all material requirements are recorded. Enter data in the following fields in the Qty field group: Qty Reqd (Quantity Required) UOM (Unit of Measure) 2. Enter data in the following fields in the Qty field group: Qty Reqd (Quantity Required) UOM (Unit of Measure) 3. 13. If you selected the System Rate option: 1. c. Perform one of the following steps: a. Click . Go to Step 12. 12. Enter data in the following fields in the Price field group: Fixed Amount 2. Go to Step 12. 8. The MSQ620 .Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom . Go to Step 12. Enter data in the following fields in the Qty field group: Qty Reqd (Quantity Required) Fleet Size UOM (Unit of Measure) 2. The MSQ620 . Two extra tabs display. 7. Perform one of the following steps: a. If you selected the System Rate option: 1. b. 5. Enter data in the following field on the Details tab: Equipment Type 6. then click . The MSQ620 . Select a Costing Method option. 2. Activity Steps 1. Enter data in the following fields in the Price Costing Method field group: Rate Amount 2. If you selected the Manual Rate option: 1.3620 The Material Requirements are saved.Search for Work Order.24 Work Orders . the Details and Costs tabs.Work Order Requirements displays. Select the Equipment tab. 3. Enter data in the following fields in the Qty field group: Qty Reqd (Quantity Required) © 2009 Mincom . Access MSQ620 . The Dialog Box . Select the Costs tab. 4. Assigning Equipment requirements ensures that the correct equipment needed to perform the job is made available during the Work Order scheduling process. Record Equipment Requirements for a Work Order Use this activity to record the details and costs of Equipment requirements for a Work Order. Go to Step 10.Search for Work Order screen displays. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. enter an equipment type designated as the equipment requirement rather than an individual item of equipment. This activity sets equipment requirements on the Work Order header.Work Order screen displays. Click . To give the planner more flexibility in finding equipment that is available for a job. 8. Access MSQ620 . Enter data in the following fields in the Qty field group: Qty Reqd (Quantity Required) Fleet Size UOM (Unit of Measure) 2.Work Order screen displays. Assigning resource requirements ensures that personnel with the required skills and certifications are scheduled to perform the work.Search for Work Order screen displays. © 2009 Mincom . If you selected the Fixed Amount option: 1. If you selected the Fixed Amount option: 1. Go to Step 10. 10. The MSQ620 . 2. Repeat Steps 5 – 10 until all equipment requirements are recorded. 3. d. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. Details recorded on the Details and Costs tabs display in the Equipment tab summary grid. 12. This activity sets resource requirements on the Work Order header. The Equipment Requirements are saved. The MSQ620 . Activity Steps 1.Search for Work Order. c. Go to Step 10. Go to Step 10. Click Save. Click . The MSQ620 . Enter data in the following fields in the Price Costing Method field group: Fixed Amount 2. 9. Record Resource Requirements for a Work Order Use this activity to record the details and costs of Resource requirements for a Work Order.Work Orders . Select Requirements » Close.3620 25 Fleet Size UOM (Unit of Measure) 3.Work Order screen displays. Click . 11. The System Rate is taken from the Equipment Rate File. Go to Step 10. Two extra tabs display. Go to Step 10. Click . Enter data in the following fields in the Price field group: Fixed Amount 2. the Details and Costs tabs. 5. If you selected the Fixed Amount option: 1. Select the Resources tab then click . Go to Step 10. If you selected the Manual Rate option: 1. Go to Step 10. Enter data in the following fields in the Qty field group: Gross Hrs Reqd (Gross Hours Required) Crew Size 3. c. b. Select the Costs tab. Details recorded on the Details and Costs tabs appear in the Resources tab summary grid. Enter data in the following fields in the Qty field group: Gross Hrs Reqd (Gross Hours Required) Crew Size 2. d. Enter data in the following fields in the Qty field group: Gross Hrs Reqd (Gross Hours Required) Crew Size 2.Work Order Requirements displays.26 Work Orders . Select a Costing Method option. 4. Perform one of the following steps: a. If you selected the Fixed Amount option: 1.3620 The Dialog Box . 9. © 2009 Mincom . Enter data in the following fields on the Details tab: Resource Class Resource Code 6. 7. 8. Enter data in the following fields in the Price field group: Rate Amount 2. If you selected the System Rate option: 1. Assign a Work Order Use this activity to assign a Work Order to an individual or a crew. 3. The assignment of a Work Order can be done in the Job Dispatch module by finding the best match based on the Work Order requirements.Work Order screen displays. Perform one of the following steps: a. Click Save. Click OK. The MSQ620 .Work Order screen displays. The MSQ620 . Activity Steps 1. Click on the 'My Work Orders' link on the Home Page.My Work Orders.Work Order Assign To displays.Work Order screen displays. Assignment details are saved. The MSQ620 . Access MSE620 . The Resource Requirements are saved. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. © 2009 Mincom . Enter data in one of the following key fields: Assign to Individual Crew 5. The MSQ620 . 11. 2. Activity Steps 1. 4. View My Work Orders Use this activity to review all work orders assigned to the current logged-on user. Details of the assignment display in the appropriate fields on the Planning tab. Repeat Steps 5 – 10 until all resource requirements are recorded.Work Orders . The Dialog Box . Click . 6. 2. The MSE620 . Select Requirements » Close.Search for Work Order screen displays.3620 27 10. b.Search for Work Order. Click Save. 12.My Work Orders screen displays a list of all work orders assigned to the current logged-on user. Access MSQ620 . Enter data in the following field: Work Group A Status may also be specified to narrow the search results. View Work Notices Use this activity to review Notifications created due to specific Work Order conditions.3620 View Work Orders for Work Group Use this activity to review all work orders assigned to a work group. A notice is created in the Work Order application when a Work Order is saved if: • A notice location containing a street or section sensitivity is assigned. These can be filtered by status if required. The MSE620 . 2. Activity Steps 1.My Work Orders screen displays the current district and some additional input fields. • The maintenance type for the work order is linked to a category of work code with details related to the sensitivity of the notice location. The MSE620 . b. When a work notice or daily whereabouts notice is required. Select Options » Retrieve for Work Group. the following notice details are generated from the information on the Work Order: • Category of work • Notice period • Work planned start date (from Work Order planned start date) • Due date (if Work Order planned start date exists) • Location • Location description • Notice for Work Order number and description © 2009 Mincom .My Work Orders screen displays a list of work orders matching the search criteria. Click on the 'My Work Orders' link on the Home Page. Perform one of the following steps: a. The MSE620 . 4. Access MSE620 .My Work Orders.28 Work Orders . 3.My Work Orders screen displays a list of all work orders assigned to the current logged-on user. Click Submit. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. or select Work Order » Notifications. Enter data in the following fields Number Type © 2009 Mincom . Review the Work Notice details on the following tabs: Notice Reinstatement Protected Period History 5. Select Notice » Close. 5. The MSQ620 .Search for Work Order. Plan Dates and Statistics. The MSQ620 . The MSQ620 . 2.Search for Work Order. Click . 3. 3. Click The MSQ629 . Schedule Work Order Use this activity to identify criteria used for scheduling the work. 4.Search for Work Order screen displays. The Dialog Box . Perform one of the following steps: a. 4. Scheduling is triggered by a date. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. If you selected the Shutdown Details option as the Schedule Type: 1. or by linking the Work Order to a scheduled shutdown. an operational statistic. The options available are Shutdown Details.Work Order screen displays.Search for Work Order screen displays. Activity Steps 1.Work/ Daily Whereabouts Notice screen displays.Work Order screen displays. 2. The MSQ620 . Access MSQ620 .3620 29 Activity Steps 1.Work Order screen displays.Schedule Work displays.Work Orders . Access MSQ620 . The MSQ620 . Select a Schedule Type option. 7. the notice due date would then be 2 weeks prior to the Work Planned Start Date. Go to step 6. Reschedule Single or Multiple Work Orders Use this activity to reschedule single or multiple work orders. you can select several work orders at once and schedule them with the same planned start date. Click OK. 2. Go to step 6. c.30 Work Orders . crew or work group.Work Order screen displays.Work Notice application: Work Planned Start Work Planned Start Time Work Planned Finish Work Planned Finish Time These planned dates will also affect the notice due date. Multiple work orders are rescheduled in bulk. Enter data in the following fields: Plan Start Date Plan Start Time Plan Finish Date Plan Finish Time If the Notifications (3629) module is activated. If you selected the Plan Dates option as the Schedule Type: 1. You can assign rescheduling to an individual. The MSQ620 . Click Save. Enter data in the following fields: Type Value 2. entry in the fields of the Plan Dates group will populate the fields in the following groups on the Protected Period tab of the MSQ629 . If you selected the Statistics option as the Schedule Type: 1. b. © 2009 Mincom . Scheduling details are saved. If required. Go to step 6.3620 Equipment Reference 2. If the notice period indicates 2 weeks. 6. The Dialog Box . Enter data in the following fields: Start Date © 2009 Mincom . Activity Steps 1. go to Step 5.Search for Work Order. Select the work orders to reschedule in bulk: 1. Perform one of the following steps: a. 6. 2.Work Orders . 2. b. Select WorkOrder » Work Order Reschedule The Dialog Box . hold down the CTRL key while selecting the required work orders.Work Order screen displays. Enter data in the following fields: Start Date Start Time Finish Date Finish Time 4. Go to Step 7. The MSQ620 . The MSQ620 . Select WorkOrder » Reschedule.3620 31 Note: To select non-consecutive work orders. To select a single work order to reschedule. select first the work order in the range. 3. then hold down the SHIFT key and select the last work order in the range. Enter data in one of the following key fields: Individual Crew Work Group 7.Reschedule Work Orders displays. 5. To select a range of work orders. 4. Access MSQ620 .Search for Work Order screen displays. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order.Bulk Reschedule Work Orders displays. Double-click the required Work Order. Enter data in one of the following key fields: Individual Crew Work Group 3. Click Yes. Create Requisition Header Use this activity to manually create a Requisition from a Work Order.New Requisition displays. Click OK. Requisitioning directly from the Work Order gives Maintenance personnel the freedom to requisition materials immediately without needing to go through a manual stores requisitioning process.Search for Work Order.Work Order screen displays.Search for Work Order screen displays. 9. 3. Activity Steps 1. The MSQ140 . The Confirm . would you like to refresh search from? message displays. Click . 5.3620 Start Time Finish Date Finish Time 8. Enter data in key fields on the following tabs: General Delivery/Priority Questions Purchase Details Other Items © 2009 Mincom . The MSQ620 . Select a Requisition Type. It is not necessary to enter a Requisition Number as Ellipse automatically generates one. Access MSQ620 . Click OK.Requisition screen displays. 2. 6. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. Rescheduling details are saved.32 Work Orders . Requisitioning of materials can be done manually from the Work Order header or set up to occur automatically depending on the Work Group and Work Order settings. 4. The MSQ620 . The Dialog Box .Bulk operation completed successfully. Data from the Work Order will default into the Requisition. Work Order screen displays. The Dialog Box . 5. If a requisition is created before the material requirements are saved.3620 33 The key costing details are transferred to the Requisition. The Requisition is saved. Click OK. Access MSQ620 . 8. For more detailed information on requisitioning refer to the Purchasing module.Select Material Requirements both display.Search for Work Order. Click . You can then select the existing requirements you want to requisition. The MSQ620 .Work Order screen displays. Note: The material requirements must be already saved on the Work Order before this activity is performed. 2. The individual items or APL required is entered on the Items tab before the requisition is completed. Instead. Enter data in the following fields on the MSQ140 screen: Date Required By © 2009 Mincom .New Requisition displays. a 'Choose Material Requirements' screen displays on top of the MSQ140. When a requisition is created from material requirements. The MSQ140 screen and Dialog Box . The Dialog Box . 3. It is not necessary to enter a Requisition Number as Ellipse automatically generates one.Work Orders . Click Save. 7. Activity Steps 1. Select the Materials tab. 6. you can create a Requisition from the requirements on the Work Order header or task. the manual creation of a Requisition as explained in the Create Requisition Header activity is redundant. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. MSQ140 continues on as expected with these requirements listed as requisition items. The MSQ620 . 7. Select a Requisition Type in the Requisition Type field group. 4. If you have already created materials requirements on either the Work Order header or task. The MSQ620 . Create a Requisition for Header Requirements Use this activity to create a Requisition for Work Order Header Requirements.Work Order Requirements displays. Once you have selected the requirements. no stock item details default on the requisition and all items are entered manually as in the previous activity. Click .Search for Work Order screen displays. Search for Work Order. Click Select. The MSQ620 . Enter data in the following field: © 2009 Mincom .Work Order screen displays. The Dialog Box . Activity Steps 1.Work Order screen displays. Highlight the material requirement to be requisitioned on the Dialog Box . 4.Work Order Requirements displays. 10. authorising or closing a Work order.Search for Work Order screen displays. Repeat steps 10 . Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. Data from the Work Order defaults into the Requisition. Click OK.34 Work Orders .Requisition screen displays. The Dialog Box . Click Save. Access MSQ620 . 2. 11. The MSQ620 . The Work Order status is Mincom defined and changes as a result of opening.Select Material Requirements. 3.11 until all material requirements to be included on the requisition have a YES in the Selected field. Select Requirements » Close. The Requisition is saved. The User Status is client defined and is used to further explain what stage a work order is at.3620 Authorised By 9. 12. Record User Status Use this activity to record the user status of a Work Order. 15. The MSQ140 . Enter data in fields on the following tabs on the MSQ140 screen as required: General Delivery/Priority Questions Purchase Details Other Items 14. The MSQ620 . 13.Modify User Status displays. Click . of Units Reqd fields must be populated before this activity is performed.3620 35 User Status 5. Record Work in Progress for a Work Order Use this activity to record work in progress for a Work Order.Work Order displays. and enter data in the following field: Units Complete b. 10 displays in the Units Complete field. if 12 units are required and you enter 6 units in the Units Complete field. For example.Work Order screen displays.Search for Work Order screen displays. The user status is saved. and enter data in the following field: Percent Complete 5. Click OK.Work Orders . Access MSQ620 . 6. 2. a Percent Complete entry of 50% displays. 6. 4. 3. Work in progress is measured as either units complete or percentage complete against the Units Required value recorded on the Planning tab. Click Save. The Dialog Box . Select the Units Complete option.Search for Work Order. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. The MSQ620 . The Work in Progress details display on the Cost Allocation tab. Click OK. Perform one of the following steps: a. Update Work Order Durations Use this activity to: • Specify the actual and estimated duration of a Work Order © 2009 Mincom . The MSQ620 . Activity Steps 1. If 50 units are required and you enter 20% in the Percent Complete field.Record Work in Progress . The work in progress details are saved. Click Save. The user status displays in the User Status field on the Planning tab. Note: The Units of Work and No. Select Work Order » Record Work in Progress. Select the Percent Complete option. Estimated costs are recorded as either calculated or estimated costs. • If the Use Calculated Costs option is de-selected for a requirement type.Work Order Durations displays.Search for Work Order screen displays. Select the Calculate Duration Hours option. Click OK. Update Work Order Cost Estimates Use this activity to update Work Order cost estimates. Estimated costs are calculated from requirements recorded against a Work Order or entered manually. Costs for a Work Order display on the Costs tab. Access MSQ620 .Search for Work Order screen displays. 4.36 • Work Orders . Access MSQ620 . Select Work Order » Durations.3620 Record delay reasons and durations during the course of the job Activity Steps 1. The MSQ620 . Preferences for estimated or calculated costs for each requirement type (equipment. Activity Steps 1. The following business rules govern this process: • If the Use Calculated Costs option is selected.Search for Work Order. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. costs are calculated from requirement costs recorded in the Requirements window and displayed in the appropriate field. 6. The MSQ620 . The MSQ620 . Enter data in the following fields: Actual Job Duration Estimated Job Duration Date Code Start Time Finish Time Hours 5. © 2009 Mincom . materials and resources) are specified in the Update Estimates screen. The Work Order Duration details are recorded. The Dialog Box . 3.Work Order screen displays.Search for Work Order. 2. the estimated cost is manually recorded in the appropriate field. Enter data in the following field: Estimated Cost If the Use Calculated Costs option is selected you cannot enter data in the key fields of that field group. Perform one of the following in the Other field group: a. 7. Enter data in the following field: Estimated Cost If the Use Calculated Costs option is selected you cannot enter data in the key fields of that field group. 5. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. 4.3620 37 2. Select the Use Calculated Costs option. Select the Use Calculated Costs option. Perform one of the following in the Total field group: a. © 2009 Mincom . 8. Click . Enter data in the following field: Estimated Cost If the Use Calculated Costs option is selected you cannot enter data in the key fields of that field group. Leave the Use Estimated Total Costs field blank and let Ellipse calculate the total. you cannot enter data in the key fields of that field group.Work Order screen displays. b. b. Select the Use Calculated Costs option.Update Estimates displays. Select the Use Estimated Total Costs option and enter data in the following field: Total b. The MSQ620 . Perform one of the following in the Equipment field group: a.Work Orders . The Dialog Box . b. Enter data in the following fields: Estimated Cost Estimated Hours If the Use Calculated Costs option is selected. b. Perform one of the following in the Material field group: a. Perform one of the following steps in the Resource field group: a. 6. 3. Select the Use Calculated Costs option. 10. Access MSQ620 . if MSO62J . 2.Work Order screen displays.Search for Work Order. Click OK. then the Standard Job MS62JMW is used as the Work Order template.Copy From Std Job displays.3620 If the Use Calculated Costs option is selected you cannot enter data in the key fields of that field group. Activity Steps 1. The MSQ620 . Using a Standard Job template speeds up the Work Order creation process by defaulting template values in key Work Order fields. Data will be copied into the new Work Order. Select Work Order»New. then a default Standard Job is used based on the Short-Form Work Order program used. Create a Work Order from a Standard Job Use this activity to create a Work Order from a Standard Job. Select Work Order » Copy From » Std Job. Enter data in the following fields: Copy Standard Job No Standard Job District 5. 3. 9. 6. The Work Order Cost Estimates will update.Work Order screen displays. If a Short-Form Work Order program is used to create a Work Order and no Standard Job is given at the time of creation. The MSQ620 .Work Order creation. 4. For example. Enter or modify data in fields on the following tabs as required: Definition Planning Tasks Scheduling Costs Cost Allocation Address © 2009 Mincom . The Dialog Box .Create WO for Minor Plant is used to create a Work Order. Click Save.38 Work Orders .Search for Work Order screen displays. Note: This activity is based on creating a Standard Job template during long-form MSQ620 . Click OK. The MSQ620 . Click Save. The new Work Order is saved and a Work Order number is automatically generated.3620 39 Completion Job Codes Reference Codes 7. © 2009 Mincom .Work Orders . Search for Work Order.Diagram Standard Job File MSF690 Standard Job Task File MSF693 Maint Sched Master File MSF700 Add Work Order Standard Job Window MSM62HA Standard Text File MSF096 Work Order File MSF620 Table File MSF010 Equipment Register File MSF600 Add Work Orders Standard Job Program MSO62H Work Order Task File MSF623 Standard Text File MSF096 Std Job Resources MSF735 Work Order Resources MSF735 Copy a Work Order from an Existing Work Order Use this activity to copy a Work Order from an existing Work Order.40 Work Orders . The MSQ620 . 2.Work Order screen displays. Select Work Order » Create From » Work Order.Copy From Existing Work Order displays. 3. Access MSQ620 . Note: It is important to remember to change any information that needs to be updated for the new Work Order such as the Request ID if one was carried through from a previous Work Order. Enter data in the following field: Copy Work Order © 2009 Mincom . Select Work Order » New. 1. The Dialog Box .Search for Work Order screen displays. This is done if a similar job is known to have been done in the past. the information will flow through the system as expected and is recorded on any other Mincom Ellipse entity affected. 4. Planning information still needs to be entered as normal.3620 Create a Work Order from a Standard Job . If information such as this is left on the Work Order in error. The MSQ620 . Copying an existing Work order short-cuts having to re-enter key information. Work Orders .3620 41 5.Work Order screen displays. Several deferral codes can be created on the table file SC Maintenance Completion Status for different deferral circumstances. 4.Defer a Work Order A Work Order is deferred if the work is not undertaken due to circumstances. Click Save. The MSQ620 . The Dialog Box . 3. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. Data will be copied into the new Work Order. for example.Search for Work Order. Select Work Order » Close Work Order » Defer. 6. lack of materials or inadequate resources.Defer Work Order displays. Access MSQ620 . The new Work Order is saved and a Work Order number is automatically generated. MSA710 or MSR710.Search for Work Order screen displays. Enter or modify data in fields on following tabs as required: Definition Planning Tasks Scheduling Costs Cost Allocation Address Completion Job Codes History Reference Codes 7.Work Orders . Associated Values on the table file define if a code is acceptable for deferral and the code being used triggers the Work Order to be included on the Missed Schedule Maintenance Report. Activity Steps 1. Enter data in the following fields: Date Deferred Deferred By Deferred Code © 2009 Mincom . Click OK. The MSQ620 . 2. Search for Work Order screen displays. The deferral details are saved. Complete a Work Order Use this activity to complete a Work Order. Cancel a Work Order Use this activity to cancel a Work Order.Search for Work Order. Activity Steps 1. Access MSQ620 . Click Save. Several cancellation codes can be created on the Table File SC . A cancelled Work Order has a status of Closed. Access MSQ620 . Click . Click OK. A completed Work Order has a status of Closed and can be re-opened if it meets the requirements for re-opening Work Orders. 2. The MSQ620 . 6. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. The MSQ620 . The completion details are saved.Search for Work Order screen displays. 2. 4. Click OK. MSA710 or MSR710.Work Order screen displays. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. The Dialog Box . © 2009 Mincom . For information on re-opening a completed Work Order see Reopen a Work Order. Activity Steps 1.42 Work Orders .Search for Work Order. 3. Click Save.Work Order screen displays. Associated Values on the table file define if a code is acceptable for Work Order cancellation and the code used triggers the Work Order to be included on the Missed Schedule Report. A Work Order is cancelled if the work is not undertaken.Maintenance Completion Status for different cancellation circumstances.Complete Work Order displays.3620 5. The MSQ620 . The MSQ620 . Enter data in the following fields: Date Completed Completed By Completed Code 5. The History tab is updated with the Completion information 6. The cancellation details are saved. Select WorkOrder » Reopen Work Order.Work Order screen displays. The following business rules govern this process: • All unscheduled work orders and tasks can be re-opened at any time. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. • Scheduled work orders and tasks can be re-opened if they are completed in a current committed period or a future period. The Dialog Box .Search for Work Order screen displays. Click Save. The MSQ620 . 3.Work Orders . • If there is an attempt to reopen a work order or tasks that were completed in a PRIOR committed period. Activity Steps 1. Access MSQ620 .Search for Work Order. Click Save. Enter data in the following fields: Date Cancelled Time Cancelled Cancelled By Cancelled Code 5. Click OK. The Work Order is re-opened. 6. an error is displayed.Cancel Work Order displays. Select Work Order » Close Work Order » Cancel. 4. The MSQ620 . The following fields on the Completion tab are cleared: Completion Code Completed By Completed Date Completed Time 4. Reopen a Work Order Use this activity to re-open a Work Order that is currently closed.3620 43 3. This includes Maintenance Schedule Tasks (MST) related work orders. The History tab is updated with the cancellation information. 2. © 2009 Mincom . Activity Steps 1. Select the Final Costs option. called sub-systems. © 2009 Mincom . b.3620 Finalise a Work Order Use this activity to finalise the costs on a Work Order for either all financial areas or just specific areas. Select individual finalise Subsystems options to close accounting in only certain areas. Access MSQ620 . Perform one of the following steps: a.Work Order screen displays. The sub.systems not finalised will still allow accounting entries to be created against this Work Order. The Dialog Box . The MSQ620 .Search for Work Order screen displays. Any activities attempting to create a journal entry on the MSF900 file will be disallowed and an error message displayed. 4. Select Work Order » Finalise. finalising a Work Order means that no further costs are recorded against the Work Order from within the Work Order program or from any other Ellipse application. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. The following business rules govern this process: • Only Work Orders with a status of closed are finalised. 2.44 Work Orders . Select any of the following individual finalise Subsystems options: Supply Accounts Payable Production Statistics Payroll Labour Costing Journal Holding Accounts Receivable General Ledger Select the Final Costs option to finalise all subsystems for this Work Order. • A capital Work Order is capitalised before it can be finalised. The MSQ620 .Search for Work Order. Once a Work Order is finalised it cannot be re-opened. Capitalisation involves clearing costs from the Capital Work in Progress accounts and posting the costs to the Fixed Asset Register. 3. Note: Work Orders are setup to be automatically finalised in bulk by running MSB623.Finalise Work Order or SubSystem displays. Activity Steps 1. 5. 3. 2. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. it must be closed using another method such as cancellation. 2. The Confirm Delete dialog box displays. The MSQ620 . The Work Order is deleted. The following business rule governs this process: • Work Orders committed cannot be deleted. Access MSQ620 . Review the fields on the following tabs: Definition Planning Tasks Scheduling © 2009 Mincom . Delete a Work Order Use this activity to delete a Work Order.Work Orders . 4.Work Order screen displays. The finalisation details are saved. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order.Work Order screen displays. Click Delete.3620 45 5.Search for Work Order. Access MSQ620 . Click Save. Work Orders are only deleted if they have been created in error and have had no costs associated with them.Search for Work Order screen displays. Click Save.Search for Work Order.Search for Work Order screen displays. 3. If a Work Order was created in error but has been committed. The MSQ620 . 6. The MSQ620 . The MSQ620 . Click OK. Review Work Order Details Use this activity to review Work Order Details. Activity Steps 1. Click OK. 46 Work Orders .3620 Costs Cost Allocation Address Completion Job Codes History Reference Codes 4. © 2009 Mincom . Select WorkOrder » Close. Work Orders .Diagram Review Selection Windows MSM21A-D Equipment Register MSF600 Work Order File MSF620 W/Order Reqn Costing Allocations File MSFX6J Work Order Summary Review Window MSM621C & D Work Order Summary Review Prog. Actioned by Work Order Window MSM654A Review Work Order Cost Window (Future Dev) Work Order Detail Review Program Review Comps. Activity Steps 1. 2. The MSQ620 . Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order.Search for Work Order screen displays. Actioned By Work Order MSO654 Review Work Order Costs Program * MSO622 Review Standard Text Windows MSM097B A Review Work Order Purchasing Status MSM628A Review Order Tasks Window MSM624A & B Review Work Order Tasks * MSO624 W/Order Reqn Costing Allocations File MSFX6J Purchase Order File MSF280 Purchase Order Item File MSF221 Review Standard Text Program * MSO097 * Review Work Order Materials Status MSO628 files not shown for simplicity Review Work Order Requirements Use this activity to review or modify Work Order Header Requirements.Search for Work Order. Item File MSF231 Work Order File MSF620 . © 2009 Mincom Purchase Req. Access MSQ620 .3620 47 Review Work Order Details . MSO621 A Work Order Detail Review Windows MSM622A-C Review Comps. Search for Work Order. Select Requirements » Edit to modify work order requirements. and close them in bulk. Click OK. To review work order requirements. Equipment. Modify fields on the Detail and Costs tabs for each requirement tab. The Dialog Box . Click . and Resources tabs. Select and review the Details and Costs tabs for each requirement tab. Click . 4. 7.Work Order screen displays.Work Order Requirements displays.Bulk Closure Work Orders displays. go to step 7. 6. 5. The MSQ620 . Activity Steps 1. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. 2.48 Work Orders . Select and review the data on the Materials. 8. select first the work order in the range.Search for Work Order screen displays. Access MSQ620 . 5. 4.3620 The MSQ620 .Work Order screen displays. Bulk Closure of Work Orders Use this activity to select several work orders at once. 10. 3. Enter data in the following fields: Completed Date Completed Time Completed By Completed Code 6. Select WorkOrder » Close Work Order. © 2009 Mincom . Note: To select non-consecutive work orders. To modify work order requirements. Select the work orders you want to close. To select a range of work orders. Perform one of the following steps: a. hold down the CTRL key while selecting the required work orders. Select Requirements » Close. The MSQ620 . b. The Dialog Box . then hold down the SHIFT key and select the last work order in the range. go to step 5. 9. 3. Work Orders matching the selection criteria display. Access MSO62N . Click Yes.Work Order Bulk Update. All Work Orders are saved with changes. The MSM62NC . Perform one or both of the following: a. 7. Update Work Orders details as required.3620 49 A Confirm Bulk Operation Completed Successfully. Enter data in the following Equipment Selection Criteria group fields: Equipment Search Type Equipment Search Key At least one of the search fields must be entered. Changing details on the Work Orders is the same as the maintain Work Order function. Enter data in these fields. An initial search screen allows you to select a group of Work orders to be maintained and then filtering capabilities for you to further refine selected Work Orders to be updated. Select an action code from the Action field to launch the Work Order applications for more detailed modifications on specific Work Orders.Additional Bulk Work Order Update Selection screen displays. If additional filters are selected. if required. 4. Enter Y in the Additional Filters fields to further restrict the search. The MSQ620 . Work Order Bulk Update Use this activity to maintain a group of Work Orders in bulk. © 2009 Mincom .Search for Work Order screen displays. Click OK. Work Order Bulk Labour Costing Use this activity to record labour costing details on Work Orders in bulk. the MSM62NB . 7. The key purpose of this activity is to filter Work Orders to a list that can be maintained in Bulk. The MSM62NA .Maintain Bulk Work Order Code and Duration Update screen displays. 2. 8. 3. 5. 6. b. Click Save.Work Orders . would you like to refresh search message displays. Click OK.Bulk Work Order Update Selection screen displays. Activity Steps 1. The MSM854A .50 Work Orders . Click Save. Labour Costing Transaction Entries are saved. The MSM62NC . The tolerance value recorded for MSTs is a percentage of the frequency for the task and standalone work orders are the number of days. 8.Maintain Bulk Work Order Code and Duration Update screen displays. Enter data in the following fields for each Work Order that requires Labour Costing entries: Action (enter L) 6. based on Tolerance information. 5. The associated values record if the tolerance will be a positive and/or negative calculation for MST generated Work Orders. Click OK. 2. Work Orders matching the selection criteria display.3620 Activity Steps 1. For standalone work orders the tolerances are positive only. The MSM62NB .Work Order Bulk Update. Click Save. The MSM62NA .Labour Costing Transaction Entry screen displays. Maintaining Tolerances Tolerances enable the optional automatic recording of Required Start Date and Required By Date on Work Orders. © 2009 Mincom . Associated values on the Priority table codes are required to record if tolerances will be applied to MST generated Work Orders and/or Standalone Work Orders. 4. Enter data the following key fields: Labour Class Earnings Class Hours or Value If no value is entered in the Labour Class and Earnings Class fields. Access MSO62N .Bulk Work Order Update Selection screen displays. Click Save.Additional Bulk Work Order Update Selection screen displays. Ellipse will default the employees primary skill information. 7. Enter data in the following fields: Work Group Additional Filters (enter Y to further restrict the search) 3. • For an MST with a statistic indicator.Work Orders . • When tolerances are applicable to work orders and the priority code with tolerance details are recorded on the work order. Access MSQ620 . The MSQ620 . without tolerance calculation from the Priority Code (if existing). • Tolerances are not re-calculated when the option to apply tolerance is not defined in the PY Work Order Priority Code table and when the Required Start Date and/or Required By Date is manually entered. the first associated value on the PY . (that is. the values are accepted and recorded on the work order. Note: Tolerance values can be applied when creating a work order or to an existing work order.3620 51 Business Rules The following business rules govern this process: • The first statistic frequency is used to determine tolerances for an MST with an Either/or Scheduling Indicator. The Required By Date is calculated from the work order Raised Date plus the Tolerance value plus the work order header Estimated Duration Hours.Search for Work Order. • The tolerance is applied on the work order header only. • The required Start and/or Required By Dates are entered manually. • Both positive and/or negative tolerances can be calculated for MST generated work orders.If a work order has no priority recorded or the Priority Code had no recorded tolerance. if the current daily average is zero. Ensure tolerances are set in the table file PY . • Changing the existing Plan Dates does not update the Required Start and Required By Dates. • Tolerances may need to be re-calculated when the Originator priority is originally added or the Planner priority is modified. Activity Steps 1. the Required Start Date defaults from the work order Raised Date.If a work order related to an MST has not priority recorded or the Priority Code has no recorded tolerance information. The Priority Code on the work order task is not applicable. For standalone work orders the tolerance can only be positive.Work Order Priority Code table is blank).Work Order Priority Code before using this activity. the tolerance calculation is not performed. • If a work order is being scheduled by statistics. MST Generated Work Orders . • Ad hoc Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom . no tolerance can be determined.Search for Work Order screen displays. the first associated value on the PY . (that is. the tolerance value is assumed as zero. the tolerance calculation is not performed and the Required Start and Required By Dates are not automatically updated. Apply Tolerance Values Use this activity to apply a tolerance to work order. The Required Start Date and Required By Date are updated with the work order Plan Start Date and Plan Finish by default.Work Order Priority Code table is blank). Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. the Originator Priority Code value will default into the Planners Priority field.52 Work Orders . 4. To apply tolerances enter the Originator Priority Code in the Definition tab or enter the Planners Priority in the Planning tab.3620 2.Work Order screen displays and the Definition tab defaults. Click Save. 3. © 2009 Mincom . The MSQ620 . Note: If the Planners Priority is left blank. See also Further Information on Applying Tolerances. Since the priority code has a tolerance value of +/-80% of the MSTs frequency which is 5. if a standalone work order is created using Planner Priority W1 (Work Order Priority 1). A series of tasks can be built to define the smaller jobs that need to be accomplished either in parallel or a series in order to complete a full Work Order. When both Planner Priority and Originator Priority are recorded in the work order. resource and equipment requirements for the job. Tasks can be assigned to different groups or individuals depending on the skills and time frames required by these smaller jobs. The Required By Date is the Planned Finish Date + 6 days which is equal to 20/01/05. an MST with a schedule indicator of 1 is used to create a work order. Tasks may be created by using a Standard Job template that has Standard Job Tasks defined. For example. The Estimated Duration Hours are also added to the tolerance calculation if they exist on the work order header (Raised Date + 8 Days + Duration Hours). For example.Work Orders . MST Work Order (Creation) This uses percentage of the frequency for the task. the Required Start Date and Required By Date is updated to indicate the tolerance applicable to the work order. Maintaining Work Order Tasks Work Order Tasks are the building blocks for a full job definition. The work order has a Planned Start date of 09/01/05 and the Planned Finish Date is the 14/01/05. Standalone Work Order This uses number of days. The associated values of the priority code is used to determine the Required By Date. Business Rules The following business rule governs this process: © 2009 Mincom .3620 53 Further Information on Applying Tolerances When a work order is created with a priority code or the Planner Priority is changed on a work order. The Required By Date is calculated using the work order Raised Date + 8 days. The MST work order is created using Planner Priority M1 (MST Priority 1). the Required Start Date is the Planned Start Date minus 6 days which equals to 03/01/05. which has a tolerance value of 8 days. Each Work Order Task will inherit the attributes of the Standard Job Task including the specific material. Diagram The Maintaining Work Order Tasks diagram represents the relationship between Work Orders and their associated Tasks. As with Work Orders. the Planner Priority will take preference over the Originator Priority on calculating tolerance.6 days (rounded up to be 6 days). provided the generated work order has at least one task and a Planned Start Date is entered.54 • Work Orders . completing the Work Group field causes the work order to be scheduled when a scheduling run is next processed for this work group.3620 If the Maintenance Scheduling module is installed. © 2009 Mincom . The MSQ620 . Create a Work Order Task Use this activity to record one or more tasks for a work order. Select the Task option. Select WorkOrderTask » New. The MSQ620 . Enter data in the following fields on the Job Information tab: Task Description © 2009 Mincom . Details of a task are recorded in the Work Order Task screen and a summary of its details display on the Tasks tab on the Work Order detail screen. 2. 3.Work Orders .Search for Work Order screen displays.Search for Work Order. Enter data in the following field: Task No 5. 4.Search for Tasks screen displays. The MSQ620 .3620 55 Maintaining Work Order Tasks . Activity Steps 1. Access MSQ620 .Diagram The diagram below represents the relationship between Work Orders and their associated Tasks.Work Order Task screen displays. Search for Work Order. 4. Material requirements are used to requisition catalogued and non-catalogued parts from a Work Order. 2. © 2009 Mincom . Enter data in the key fields on the following tabs: Job Information Planning Scheduling Costs Completion APL 7. Click New Job Instructions. The Dialog Box . The Job Instructions are saved on the MSF097 file under text type JI. The New Job Instructions button now displays as Edit Job Instructions. The MSQ620 . Select the Task option. Record Material Requirements for a Task Use this activity to record the details and costs of Material requirements for a Work Order Task. The MSQ620 . This activity sets material requirements on the Work Order Task and allows items to be requisitioned from the task instead of the Work Order Header.Work Order Task screen displays. Access MSQ620 . The MSQ620 .56 Work Orders .3620 Work Group 6.Work Order Task screen displays.Search for Work Order screen displays. 5. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order task.Work Order Task screen displays with the newly created task in the grid. Click OK. 3. The MSQ620 . Enter details in the following key field: Text Box 6.Search for Tasks screen displays. Activity Steps 1. Click Save. The MSQ620 . Record Job Instructions on a Task Use this activity to record Job Instructions on a Task within a Work Order.Job Instructions displays. Go to Step 9. 9. If you selected the Non-Catalogued option: 1. The MSQ620 . Only catalogued items from the login district are added as material requirements. The Details and Costs tabs now display. Perform one of the following steps: © 2009 Mincom . 3. Select the Task option.Work Order Requirements displays.Search for Work Order. Select the Materials tab then click . 5. Perform one of the following steps: a. 3. The Part Number. Select the Details tab. 7. Select a Material Type option. The MSQ620 . Go to Step 9. b. The Dialog Box .Search for Tasks screen displays. 6. Enter data in the following fields: Part Number Mnemonic 2.Work Orders . Select the Costs tab. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order task. If the Non-Catalogued option is selected and a Part Number/Mnemonic combination entered exists on the supply catalogue. the system returns a warning message indicating that the item is a catalogued item and the stock code defaults. 2. 10.3620 57 Activity Steps 1. Click . If you selected the Catalogued option: 1. Access MSQ620 . Mnemonic and Description displays. 4. Select a Costing Method option. The MSQ620 . 11. 8.Work Order Task screen displays. Select Requirements » Show.Search for Work Order screen displays. Enter data in the following field: Stock Code 2. The System Rate option is only available for items that have a Material Type of Catalogued. Go to Step 12. 13. If you selected the Fixed Amount option: 1. Enter data in the following fields in the Price field group: Item Price 2. The MSQ620 . Enter data in the following fields in the Qty field group: Qty Reqd (Quantity Required) UOM (Unit of Measure) 2. If you selected the System Rate option: 1. 12. Record Equipment Requirements for a Task Use this activity to record the details and costs of Equipment requirements for a Work Order Task. Go to Step 12. Activity Steps © 2009 Mincom . This activity sets equipment requirements on the Work Order Task. 14. The Material Requirements are saved to the Work Order Task. Enter data in the following fields in the Qty field group: Qty Reqd (Quantity Required) UOM (Unit of Measure) 3. Repeat Steps 5 – 12 until all material requirements are recorded. Click Save. Click .3620 a. Enter data in the following fields in the Qty field group: Qty Reqd (Quantity Required) UOM (Unit of Measure) 3.Work Order screen displays. Go to Step 12. c. Select Requirements » Close. Details recorded on the Details and Costs tabs display on the Materials tab summary grid. 15.58 Work Orders . If you selected the Manual Rate option: 1. b. Enter data in the following fields in the Price field group: Fixed Amount 2. 5. Go to Step 10.Search for Work Order screen displays.Work Orders . 3.Search for Work Order. Click .Work Order Task screen displays. Select the Equipment tab. Go to Step 10. 4. Perform one of the following steps: a. If you selected the System Rate option: 1. then click .Search for Tasks screen displays. Select the Task option. Select a Costing Method option. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order task. Access MSQ620 . If you selected the Fixed Amount option: © 2009 Mincom . 9. If you selected the Manual Rate option: 1. Enter data in the following fields in the Qty field group: Qty Reqd (Quantity Required) Fleet Size UOM (Unit of Measure) 2. b. Select the Costs tab. The MSQ620 . 2.Work Order Requirements displays. 6. The MSQ620 . Enter data in the following fields in the Qty field group: Qty Reqd (Quantity Required) Fleet Size UOM (Unit of Measure) 3.3620 59 1. 8. The Dialog Box . The Details and Costs tabs now display in New mode. c. Enter data in the following fields in the Price field group: Rate Amount 2. The MSQ620 . Enter data in the following fields on the Details tab: Equipment Type Condition Type 7. 13. Go to Step 10. 10. Go to Step 10.Search for Work Order screen displays. Click Save. Repeat Steps 5 – 10 until all equipment requirements are recorded. Details recorded on the Details and Costs tabs display on the Equipment tab summary grid. The System Rate is taken from the Equipment Rate File. The Dialog Box .3620 1. This activity sets resource requirements on the Work Order Task header. d. Select Requirements » Close.Search for Work Order. 11. Click . Click . Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order task.Work Order screen displays. The Equipment Requirements are saved to the Work Order Task. Select the Task option.Work Order Task screen displays. 4. The MSQ620 . The MSQ620 . The MSQ620 . 5. 3. The Details and Costs tabs now display. Enter data in the following fields in the Qty field group: Qty Reqd (Quantity Required) Fleet Size UOM (Unit of Measure) 2. Access MSQ620 . Select the Resources tab then click . 2. If you selected the Fixed Amount option: 1. Activity Steps 1. 12. © 2009 Mincom . The MSQ620 .60 Work Orders .Work Order Requirements displays. Enter data in the following fields in the Price field group: Fixed Amount 2. Record Resource Requirements for a Task Use this activity to record the details and costs of resource requirements for a Work Order Task.Search for Tasks screen displays. Work Orders - 3620 61 6. Enter data in the following fields on the Details tab: Resource Class Resource Code 7. Select the Costs tab. 8. Select a Costing Method option. 9. Perform one of the following steps: a. If you selected the System Rate option: 1. Enter data in the following fields in the Qty field group: Gross Hrs Reqd (Gross Hours Required) Crew Size 2. Go to Step 10. b. If you selected the Manual Rate option: 1. Enter data in the following fields in the Price field group: Rate Amount 2. Enter data in the following fields in the Qty field group: Gross Hrs Reqd (Gross Hours Required) Crew Size 3. Go to Step 10. c. If you selected the Fixed Amount option: 1. Enter data in the following fields in the Price field group: Fixed Amount 2. Go to Step 10. d. If you selected the Fixed Amount option: 1. Enter data in the following fields in the Qty field group: Gross Hrs Reqd (Gross Hours Required) Crew Size 2. Go to Step 10. 10. Click . Details recorded on the Details and Costs tabs display in the Resources tab summary grid. 11. Repeat Steps 5 – 10 until all resource requirements are recorded. 12. Select Requirements » Close. The MSQ620 - Work Order screen displays. © 2009 Mincom 62 Work Orders - 3620 13. Click Save. The Resource Requirements are saved to the Work Order Task. Record APLs and Clear Task APL Type Use this activity to identify APLs required for this task. APLs are listed on a Task instead of individual material requirements if a pre-defined bill of materials has already been created in Ellipse. Using the APL is quicker then listing each material requirement. This activity also defines how to Clear APL Task types. Activity Steps 1. Access MSQ620 - Search for Work Order. The MSQ620 - Search for Work Order screen displays. 2. Select the Task option. The MSQ620 - Search for Tasks screen displays. 3. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order task. The MSQ620 - Work Order Task screen displays. 4. Select the APL tab. 5. Perform one of the following steps: a. Select APL Equipment Reference option. b. Select Equipment Group ID option. If the Material Requirements box is selected this means that material requirements have already been set on this task. A task cannot have both APL requirements and material requirements. If an APL is more appropriate to record against this task, then to continue you must remove the material requirements from the Task Requirements dialog box. Once this is done, the remainder of this activity can proceed. 6. Perform one of the following steps: a. Enter data in the following field, if you selected the APL Equipment Reference option: APL Equipment Reference b. Enter data in the following field, if you selected the Equipment Group ID option: Equipment Group ID 7. Enter data in the following fields: Component Code Modifier Code Sequence Number To clear the Task APL Type selected, open the Edit menu and select Clear Task APL Type. This will delete all of the data entered on the APL tab. 8. Click Save. © 2009 Mincom Work Orders - 3620 63 The APL details are saved. The MSQ620 - Work Order screen displays. Assign a Work Order Task Use this activity to assign a Work Order Task to an individual or a crew. Details of the assignment display in the appropriate fields on the Planning tab. Activity Steps 1. Access MSQ620 - Search for Work Order. The MSQ620 - Search for Work Order screen displays. 2. Select the Task option. The MSQ620 - Search for Tasks screen displays. 3. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order task. The MSQ620 - Work Order Task screen displays. 4. Click . The Dialog Box - WO Task Assign To displays. 5. Enter data in one of the following key fields: Assign to Individual Crew 6. Click OK. The MSQ620 - Work Order Task screen displays. 7. Click Save. Assignment details are saved. The MSQ620 - Work Order screen displays. Schedule a Work Order Task Use this activity to update planned and offset dates for Work Order Tasks. Activity Steps 1. Access MSQ620 - Search for Work Order. The MSQ620 - Search for Work Order screen displays. 2. Select the Task option. The MSQ620 - Search for Tasks screen displays. 3. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order task. © 2009 Mincom 64 Work Orders - 3620 The MSQ620 - Work Order Task screen displays. 4. Click . The Dialog Box - Schedule WO Task displays. 5. Enter data in the following fields: Planned Start Date Planned Start Time Planned Finish Date Planned Finish Time Offset Days Est. Duration Hours Man Effort 6. Click OK. The MSQ620 - Work Order Task screen displays. 7. Click Save. Scheduling details are saved. Reschedule a Work Order Task Use this activity to reschedule tasks using the Dialog Box - Reschedule Tasks. Activity Steps 1. Access MSQ620 - Search for Work Order. The MSQ620 - Search for Work Order screen displays. 2. Select the Task option. The MSQ620 - Search for Tasks screen displays. 3. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order task. The MSQ620 - Work Order Task screen displays. 4. Select WorkOrderTask » Reschedule. The Dialog Box - Reschedule Tasks displays. 5. Enter data in the following field: Start Date 6. Click OK. 7. Click Save. The rescheduling details are saved. © 2009 Mincom Work Orders - 3620 65 Create a Requisition Use this activity to create a Requisition from a Work Order Task. All requisition items are entered manually. Activity Steps 1. Access MSQ620 - Search for Work Order. The MSQ620 - Search for Work Order screen displays. 2. Select the Task option. The MSQ620 - Search for Tasks screen displays. 3. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order task. The MSQ620 - Work Order Task screen displays. 4. Click . The Dialog Box - New Requisition displays. 5. Enter data in one of the following key fields: Issue Requisition Number Purchase Requisition Number 6. Select a Requisition Type in the Requisition Type field group. 7. Click OK. The MSQ140 - Requisition screen displays. Data from the Work Order will default into the Requisition. 8. Enter data in key fields on the following tabs: General Delivery/Priority Questions Purchase Details Other Items 9. Click Save. The MSQ620 - Work Order Task screen displays. The Requisition is saved. © 2009 Mincom 66 Work Orders - 3620 Create a Requisition for Task Requirements Use this activity to create a Requisition from a Work Order Task. If you have already created materials requirements on a Work Order task, you can select these items to create a requisition. The difference in these cases is that a 'Choose Material Requirements' screen displays on top of the MSQ140 allowing you to select the created requirements you want to requisition. After selecting the requirements, MSQ140 continues on as expected with these requirements listed as requisition items. Activity Steps 1. Access MSQ620 - Search for Work Order. The MSQ620 - Search for Work Order screen displays. 2. Select the Task option. The MSQ620 - Search for Tasks screen displays. 3. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order task. The MSQ620 - Work Order Task screen displays. 4. Click . The Dialog Box - Work Order Requirements displays. 5. Select the Materials tab. 6. Click . The Dialog Box - New Requisition displays. 7. Select a Requisition Type. It is not necessary to enter a Requisition Number as Ellipse automatically generate one. 8. Click OK. The MSQ140 screen and Dialog Box - Select Material Requirements display together. 9. Enter data in the following fields on the MSQ140 screen: Date Required By Authorised By 10. Select the material requirement to be requisitioned on the Dialog Box - Select Material Requirements. 11. Click Select. 12. Repeat steps 10 - 11 until all material requirements to be included on the requisition have a YES in the Selected field. 13. Click OK. The MSQ140 - Requisition screen displays. Data from the Work Order defaults into the Requisition. 14. Enter data in key fields on the following tabs on the MSQ140 screen as required: © 2009 Mincom Work Orders - 3620 67 General Delivery/Priority Questions Purchase Details Other Items 15. Click Save. The Dialog Box - Work Order Requirements displays. The Requisition is saved. 16. Select Requirements » Close. The MSQ620 - Work Order Task screen displays. 17. Click Save. The requisition is saved to the Work Order task. Modify Work Order Task and Cancel Task Update Use this activity to modify a Work Order Task and cancel a task update. Activity Steps 1. Access MSQ620 - Search for Work Order. The MSQ620 - Search for Work Order screen displays. 2. Select the Task option. The MSQ620 - Search for Tasks screen displays. 3. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order task. The MSQ620 - Work Order Task screen displays. 4. Modify fields on the following tabs as required: Job Information Planning Scheduling Costs Completion APL To cancel all changes made to a Work Order Task since the previous Save, select WorkOrderTask » Cancel Task Updates. 5. Click Save. © 2009 Mincom 68 Work Orders - 3620 Changes to Work Order Task details are saved. Record Work in Progress for a Task Use this activity to record work in progress for a Work Order Task. Work in progress is measured as either units complete or percentage complete against the Units Required value recorded on the Planning tab. For example, If 12 units are required and you enter 6 units in the Units Complete field, a Percent Complete entry of 50% displays. If 50 units are required and you enter 20% in the Percent Complete field, 10 displays in the Units Complete field. Activity Steps 1. Access MSQ620 - Search for Work Order. The MSQ620 - Search for Work Order screen displays. 2. Select the Task option. The MSQ620 - Search for Tasks screen displays. 3. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order task. The MSQ620 - Work Order Task screen displays. 4. Select WorkOrderTask » Record Work in Progress. The Dialog Box - Record Work in Progress displays. 5. Perform one of the following steps: a. Select the Units Complete option, and enter data in the following field: Units Complete b. Select the Percent Complete option, and enter data in the following field: Percent Complete 6. Click OK. The Work in Progress details display on the Completion tab on MSQ620 - Work Order Task screen. 7. Click Save. The work in progress details are saved. Complete a Work Order Task Use this activity to complete a Work Order Task. Activity Steps 1. Access MSQ620 - Search for Work Order. The MSQ620 - Search for Work Order screen displays. 2. Select the Task option. © 2009 Mincom Work Orders - 3620 69 3. The MSQ620 - Search for Tasks screen displays. 4. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order task. The MSQ620 - Work Order Task screen displays. 5. Select WorkOrderTask » Open. 6. Click . The Dialog Box - Complete WO Task displays. 7. Enter data in the following fields: Date Completed Time Completed Completed By Completed Code 8. Click OK. The MSQ620 - Work Order Task screen displays. 9. Click Save. The completion details are saved. © 2009 Mincom Cancel WO Task displays. The MSQ620 .Work Order Task screen displays. 3. 7. Select WorkOrderTask » Close Task » Cancel.Search for Work Order screen displays. The MSQ620 .70 Work Orders . Click OK. Access MSQ620 . Enter data in the following fields: Date Cancelled Time Cancelled Cancelled By Cancelled Code 6. The Dialog Box .Diagram Work Order Task Update Windows MSM62FA-B Table File MSF010 Work Order File MSF620 Work Order Task File MSF623 Update Order Task Program MSO62F Maintain Work Order / Task Routine MSS620 Work Order Task File MSF623 Work Order File MSF620 Cancel a Work Order Task Use this activity to cancel a Work Order Task. 2. The MSQ620 . Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order task. 5.3620 Complete a Work Order . 4. The MSQ620 . Click Save. Select the Task option. Activity Steps 1.Work Order Task screen displays. © 2009 Mincom .Search for Tasks screen displays.Search for Work Order. Click Save.Search for Work Order screen displays. 6. Access MSQ620 . 3.3620 71 The completion details are saved.Work Order Task screen displays.Search for Work Order. Select the Task option. Select WorkOrderTask » Delete. 2. The following fields on the Completion tab are cleared: Completed By Completed Date Completed Time Completed Code 5.Search for Work Order screen displays. The MSQ620 .Search for Work Order. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order task. Click Save. Click OK. 2. Activity Steps 1. 4.Search for Work Order screen displays. The MSQ620 . Activity Steps 1. The MSQ620 . The MSQ620 . Delete a Work Order Task Use this activity to delete a Work Order no longer required. The Task is reopened. The MSQ620 . Select the Task option. Select WorkOrderTask » Reopen Task.Search for Tasks screen displays. The Confirm Delete dialog box displays. 4. Access MSQ620 . 3. Reopen a Work Order Task Use this activity to reopen a Work Order Task that is currently closed.Work Order Task screen displays. © 2009 Mincom .Work Orders . 5. The MSQ620 . Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order task. 5. Access MSQ620 . Review the fields on the following tabs: Job Information Planning Scheduling Costs Completion APL 5. Activity Steps 1. 3. The MSQ620 .72 Work Orders . The MSQ620 . 4. Click Save.Work Order Task screen displays.Work Order Task screen displays. The MSQ620 . Activity Steps 1. 3. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order task.Search for Tasks screen displays.Search for Work Order.Search for Work Order.Search for Work Order screen displays. Select the Task option. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order task. Select and review the details on the Materials. The MSQ620 . The MSQ620 .Search for Work Order screen displays. Review Work Order Task Details Use this activity to Review Work Order Task Details.3620 The Work Order Task is deleted.Search for Tasks screen displays. Equipment and Resources tabs. Click . 4. 2. Review Work Order Task Requirements and APLs Use this activity to Review Work Order Task Requirements and APLs. Select the Task option. The MSQ620 .Work Order Requirements displays. The Dialog Box . Access MSQ620 . © 2009 Mincom . 2. Search for Work Order.Work Orders: 1.Work Order Task screens. Create New Task Assignment Use this activity to create new task assignments. Perform one of the following steps: a. modify. Select Requirements » Close. Select and review the details on the Details and Costs tabs. reschedule and delete task assignments. You can also maintain.Create Tasks Assignments screen displays with the work order number and task selected on the MSQ620 . • When a work order task is closed all open task assignments for that task are also completed. 2. Select WorkOrderTask » Create Task Assignment. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order task.3620 73 The information in the summary grid on each of these tabs defaults from the information entered on the Details and Costs tabs within these tabs.Work Orders . The Task Criteria tab displays. 8. Maintaining Task Assignments The task assignment application is used to assign work order tasks to crews or individuals (employees).Search for Work Order screen displays. To create a task assignment using MSQ620 . You can search for task assignments. The MSQ620 . Each time a work order task is assigned. Business Rules The following business rules govern this process: • When the final task assignment is completed the associated work order task is closed. The MSQ620 . Click Save. 4.Work Order and MSQ620 . This application provides a quick and easy way to create and maintain assignment details with minimum maintenance. Activity Steps 1. Access MSQ620 . a crew or individual a record is created on the task assignment file (MSF62C). and display the results in a grid format.Work Order Task screen displays. 6. 3.Search for Work order screen. The MSQ62C . © 2009 Mincom . The MSQ62C Task Assignment application can be run as a stand-alone application or from the MSQ620 . 7. Select the Task option. To create a task assignment using MSQ62C . Activity Steps 1. Select the Task option.Search for Task Assignments screen displays with the work order number and task defaulting in the relevant fields. Click Revert to exit.Search for Work Order.Create Task Assignments. © 2009 Mincom .Search for Work Order screen displays. time and assigned task status. To review uncompleted task assignments for a task: 1. b. delete job assignments for a work order task.Create Task Assignments. update. 2. The MSQ62C . Enter data in the following fields for each task assignment: Allocated Crew 3. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order task. The MSQ620 . Review details. Perform one of the following steps: a. You can also assign a current date. Select WorkOrderTask » Review Task Assignments. 2. Maintain and Delete Task Assignments Use this activity to review.Search for Tasks screen displays. 3. To add a new task assignment. 2. Access MSQ62C .74 Work Orders . These fields cannot be modified. 4. Enter data in the following fields: Work Order WO Task No 3. 2. The task assignments entered display. 3. press ENTER. Go to step 5. Go to step 2. The MSQ620 . Access MSQ620 . Click the Task Assignment tab. Click Save. Review. 1. 2. To review open task assignments for a task: 1.3620 5. reschedule and delete job assignments.Create Tasks Assignments screen displays. 4. Go to step 2. The MSQ62C . b. Click OK. if required. 2.Start Assignment displays. 6. To enter an actual finish date. To enter an actual start date. Select a task assignment in the grid. select Change Status. select Start Assignment. select Quick Start. Select the required task assignment in the grid. Enter data in the following fields: Actual Start Date Actual Start Time Assigned Task Status 4. The Dialog Box . e. 2. 2. Perform one of the following steps: a. The current date and time is automatically assigned in the Actual Start Date and Actual Start Time fields. c.Work Orders . Go to step 5. The current date and time is automatically assigned in the Actual Finish Date and Actual Finish Time fields. 2. Select a closed task assignment in the grid. Right-click. Select a task assignment in the grid. Select the Include Closed Assignments option. © 2009 Mincom . b. To assign a current start date and time to the task: 1. Right-click. The status of all selected tasks change. Right-click. select Quick Finish. Click Search. To assign a current finish date and time to the task assignment: 1. Right-click. 5. select Finish Assignment.3620 75 c. Uncompleted task assignments (records that do not have an actual finish date) display in a grid. start time and assign a task assignment status to a task assignment: 1. finish time and assign a task assignment status to a task assignment: 1. To search for closed assignments: 1. 3. To change a new task status: 1. Right-click. The task assignment is automatically deleted from the grid. d. 2. Finish Assignment displays. f. costs and locations as they are completed by front-line staff and recorded back into Ellipse. 2. Typically. g. Click OK. 3. 2. Right-click and select Reschedule. Job Cards are printed and distributed to staff so they can identify work to be done.Reschedule displays.76 Work Orders . 7. Printing Job Cards A Job Card is a printed listing of a Work Order and one or all of its tasks. Enter data in the following fields: Assigned Start Date Assigned Start Time Assigned Finish Date Assigned Finish Time Assigned Task Status 4. Individual Job Cards may also be manually printed from the Work Order application at any time. A Work Group schedule committal using MSB740 may automatically trigger the printing of Job Cards relevant to the specified period. To reschedule a task assignment: 1. Click OK.Confirm Delete displays. Job Cards are vital for capturing the history of equipment. Select Task Assignments » Close to exit. 3. Enter data in the following fields: Actual Finish Date Actual Finish Time Assigned Task Status 4. To delete all selected task assignments: 1. © 2009 Mincom . Work Order and Work Order Task Job Cards can be printed from a specified printer as required. The Dialog Box . Job Cards may be printed under several circumstances. Select a task assignment in the grid. Click OK. The Dialog Box . 3. select Delete.3620 The Dialog Box . They also contain a section where staff can record completion comments once the work is finished. The standard Mincom Job Card generated by MSA621 or MSR621 contains basic information about the work to be done that has been included during the Work Order creation process. Select all task assignments. Right-click. Click . Business Rules The following business rules govern this process: • A Job Card will be available only for work that is recorded on a Work Order.Search for Work Order. • A client-specific Job Card may be substituted for the standard Mincom-delivered Job Card generated by MSA621 or MSR621.Manage Work District Options and WOJC . The MSQ620 . work order type. 2.Work Orders .Search for Work Order screen displays. 3. The Dialog Box . Stand-alone MSTs do not generate a Work Order and so therefore will not generate a Job Card. Access MSQ620 . Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. The MSQ620 .Print Work Order Job Cards displays.Search for Work Order screen displays. 4. Enter data in the following fields: Printer Email Fax 5. The Job Card prints to the device selected. Activity Steps 1. Click OK. Table files MWDO .Work Order Job Card are used to define which work order fields are used for selection and which job card report is printed for a particular combination of the work order fields. 6. • Multiple job cards report can be requested automatically as set up in table file MWDO and WOJC.Work Order screen displays. The Work Order is closed. © 2009 Mincom . • A valid printer must be available on the PR table file to which the Job Card can be directed. The MSQ620 . maintenance type and/or work group.3620 77 Multiple job card reports can be automatically printed dependant of the district. Print Job Card for Work Order Headers Use this activity to print a Job Card for the Work Order Header including all Tasks. Select WorkOrder » Close. The MSQ620 .3620 Print Job Card for Work Order Task Use this activity to print a Job Card for an individual Work Order Task. Maintaining Parent Work Orders For control and costing purposes Work Orders can be grouped together by assigning a common parent to each Work Order.Search for Work Order.Print Work Order Job Cards displays. 5. When one or more Work Orders are assigned to a Parent Work Order. equipment involved. Access MSQ620 . Parent Work Orders can be created in Ellipse much like standalone Work Orders. Activity Steps 1. Click . The Work Order is used to specify the work required. The Parent Work Order application allows for this grouping (packaging) of Work Orders in cases where it is convenient to manage the Work Orders as a single entity without the overhead of a formal management project. requirements to be requisitioned. Click OK. As seen in the Work Order application. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order task.Search for Work Order screen displays.78 Work Orders . 7. the individual Work Order costs and resources are rolled up to the Parent Work Order level.Search for Tasks screen displays. The Work Order is closed. Parent Standard Jobs can be used as a template for a Parent Work Order and existing Parent Work Orders can be copied to © 2009 Mincom . a Work Order is created when there is a work requirement that needs to be tracked and costed. The Job Card Task prints to the device selected. 2. Select WorkOrder » Close. The MSQ620 . costs and schedule. 4. Typically Parent Work Orders can be used to manage work being carried out in one location by one work group authorised on multiple Work Orders.Work Order Task screen displays. The MSQ620 . The Dialog Box . 3.Work Order Task screen displays. Select the Task option. The MSQ620 . Complete the following key field: Printer Email Fax 6. © 2009 Mincom . a Project may be the more relevant Ellipse tool. a Standard Job Plan can also be used to create Parent Work Orders and subordinate Work Orders all in one action.3620 79 create new Parent Work Orders. If capital expenditures and commitments need to be tracked along with the operational work. Business Rules The following business rules govern this process: • A Parent Work Order must be created before it can be used as a parent on a Work Order. • The complexity of the job and the amount of financial control that is required will dictate whether a Parent Work Order or Project should be used to track the full scope of work. The Parent Work Order details are grouped under: • General – information about the Parent Work Order • Costs – roll up of underlying Work Order costs for labour. equipment and materials • Resources – labour resources required to satisfy the underlying Work Orders • Extended Description – a free form text pane for the inclusion of any textual details or instructions The application has an actuals versus estimates chart for quick monitoring of the rolled up work. For jobs such as large shutdowns or refurbishments.Work Orders . a Parent Work order can be assigned to any existing or new Work Orders in the Work Order application. C Review Parent Work Order Program MSO626 Create Parent Work Order Use this activity to create a Parent Work Order. 3. Select ParentWorkOrder » New.Diagram Create/Modify Delete Parent Work Order Windows MSM625A. 4. Once created. The MSQ625 . Access MSQ625 .3620 Maintaining Parent Work Orders . Activity Steps 1. Enter data in the following field: Parent WO Description You may also enter a Prefix if the Parent Work Order number should be prefixed. Enter data in the following field on the General tab: Originator Id © 2009 Mincom .Search for Parent Work Order screen displays.80 Work Orders . All rolled-up costs and resource hours will then be readily available for review in the Parent Work Order application. 2.Search for Parent Work Order.Parent Work Orders screen displays. B Table File MSF010 Maintain Parent Work Order Program MSO625 Parent Job Standard MSF695 Parent Work Order File MSF625 Equipment Register MSF600 Extend Description Maintenance MSO096 Work Order Maintenance Program (for subordinates) MSO620 Review Parent Work Order Windows MSM626A. B. This field is not mandatory but must be completed prior to saving the Parent Work Order if it is required. The MSQ625 . The Parent Standard Job must already be created in MSO690. Access MSQ625 . A Parent Work Order number (including the prefix if entered) is automatically generated.Search for Parent Work Order screen displays. 2. 6. The MSQ625 . Note: This activity is slightly limited in that no subordinate Work Orders will be created based on the Parent Standard Job template.Work Orders . Activity Steps 1. Data will be copied into the new Parent Work Order. Additions or modifications to the Parent Work Order can then be made. Click OK. Select ParentWorkOrder » Copy From » Parent Standard Job. Click Save. Enter data in the following field: Copy Parent Standard Job 5. The Dialog Box . Select ParentWorkOrder » New. Enter data in fields on following tabs as required: General Costs Resources Extended Description Note: The Costs and Resources tabs contain read-only fields. 3.3620 81 5.Parent Work Orders screen displays.Copy From Parent Standard Job displays. Only Parent Work Order attributes will be created. Create a Parent Work Order from a Parent Standard Job Use this activity to create a Parent Work Order from a Parent Standard Job. Work Orders will then need to be manually created and assigned to this parent in MSQ620. 6. Enter or modify data in fields on following tabs as required: General Costs Resources Extended Description © 2009 Mincom . 4. The MSQ625 . The Parent Work Order will inherit the template attributes of the Parent Standard Job.Search for Parent Work Order. The new Parent Work Order is saved. Activity Steps 1. Work Order numbers can be entered at this time or can be left blank to allow system generated numbers to be assigned. Subordinate Work Orders are automatically created based on the Standard Job templates assigned. Click Save. 7. A Parent Work Order number is automatically generated. Data will be copied into the new Parent Work Order. Enter data in the following fields: Standard Job/Parent Standard Job Indicator (Primary field) Standard Job/Parent Standard Job Indicator (Secondary field) Description Originator Work Group 3. Subordinate Standard Job information is displayed. The MSM62XA . Create a Parent Work Order and Subordinate Work Orders from a Standard Job Plan or Parent Standard Job Unlike the previous activity. The Parent Standard Job or Standard Job Plan and their subordinates must already be created in MSO690. 5. 4.82 Work Orders . Enter or modify data in fields on the MSM62XA screen as required. Click Save. The new Parent Work Order is saved and a Parent Work Order number is automatically generated.Create Work Orders from a Std Job Plan/ Parent Std Job screen displays.3620 Note: The Costs and Resources tabs contain read-only fields. © 2009 Mincom . Access MSO62X . This screen allows a Parent Work Order and Work Orders to be created as one action from either a Parent Standard Job or a Standard Job Plan. this activity will allow a Parent Work Order to be created along with subordinate Work Orders based on the template that will be copied.Create W/O from a SJ Plan. 2. Click Save. Make the required changes to fields on the following tabs: General Costs Resources © 2009 Mincom . Click Save. Modify Parent Work Order Use this activity to modify a Parent Work Order. The new Parent Work Order is saved and a Parent Work Order number is automatically generated.Search for Parent Work Order. The MSQ625 . Activity Steps 1. The MSQ625 .Search for Parent Work Order screen displays. Enter or modify data in fields on following tabs as required: General Extended Description 7. 2. 4.Search for Parent Work Order. Access MSQ625 .Search for Parent Work Order screen displays.3620 83 Create a Parent Work Order from an Existing Parent Work Order Use this activity to create a Parent Work Order from an existing Parent Work Order. The MSQ625 . The Dialog Box . Data will be copied into the new Parent Work Order.Work Orders . Activity Steps 1. 3. 6.Copy From Parent Work Order displays.Parent Work Orders screen displays. The MSQ625 . Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required Parent Work Order. 3. 2. Access MSQ625 . Select ParentWorkOrder » New. Click OK. Select ParentWorkOrder » Copy From » Parent Work Order.Parent Work Orders screen displays. Enter data in the following field: Copy Parent Work Order 5. Click Save. Access MSQ625 . If subordinates exist they must either be detached from the Parent or deleted following standard Work Order deletion rules. Click OK. Review fields on the following tabs: General Costs Resources Extended Description 4.Parent Work Orders screen displays.3620 Extended Description Note: The Costs and Resources tabs contain read-only fields.84 Work Orders .Search for Parent Work Order. 2. The MSQ625 . Select ParentWorkOrder » Close.Search for Parent Work Order screen displays. The Parent Work Order is deleted.Search for Parent Work Order screen displays. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required Parent Work Order. Access MSQ625 . Delete Parent Work Order Use this activity to delete a Parent Work Order which is no longer required. 3. The MSQ625 . The MSQ625 . 4. Changes to the Parent Work Order are saved.Parent Work Orders screen displays. 3. 4. Click Delete. Activity Steps 1. A Parent Work Order may be deleted only if it has no subordinate Work Orders. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required Parent Work Order. The MSQ625 . 2. © 2009 Mincom . Review all Details of a Parent Work Order Use this activity to review a Parent Work Order including the subordinate Work Orders assigned to this Parent and their current costing information.Search for Parent Work Order. Activity Steps 1. The Confirm Delete dialog box displays. Action Codes provide the facility to close or reopen an Incident Logsheet Entry allowing single screen entry of all relevant Incident activities.3620 85 Maintaining Incident Logsheets An incident can be defined as any group of events that may need to be recorded and tracked for auditing reasons. Existing Logsheet entries selected for maintenance are displayed in reverse chronological order to display the full Incident History. Multiple Work Orders are allowed to be created per incident but only the latest one is recorded against the incident. modified and deleted in one application. This procedure allows the user to maintain information related to an incident occurring during a particular shift of a Work Group. An Incident Logsheet Entry can be created. The incident and the activities performed during the incident time can be recorded on an Incident Log Sheet and then automatically turned in to Work Orders for tracking costs.Work Orders . The link between the Work Order and the incident is only effected when the Work Order is originated from an action code from the Logsheet Maintenance screen. resources and equipment failures. Action Codes provide the facility to automatically create Work Orders or to transfer to the short form Incident Work Order window to create/maintain Work Orders related to an incident. © 2009 Mincom . Multiple entries per day and time can be recorded against a Work Group and Shift. 86 Work Orders .Diagram Table File MSF010 Maintain Incident Logsheets Windows MSM627A-B Work Group File MSF720 Equipment Register File MSF600 Maintain Incident Logsheets Program MSO627 Incident Logsheets File MSF626 Standard Job File MSF690 Maintain Work Order Information Routine MSS620 Table File MSF010 Work Groups File MSF720 Standard Job File MSF690 Standard Job Task File MSF693 Work Order File MSF620 Work Order Task File MSF623 Reference Files MSFX6X MSF062 MSFX6G MSFX6J MSFX69 MSFX6S MSFX6O MSFX71 MSFX6N Duration File MSF622 Incident Logsheets File MSF626 Work Group File MSF720 Review Incident Logsheets Windows MSM62VA-B Table File MSF010 Equipment Register File MSF600 Standard Text File MSF096 Create / Maintain Incident Work Order Window MSM62TA Create / Maintain Incident Work Order Program MSO62T Work Order File MSF620 Equipment Register File MSF600 Incident Logsheets File MSF626 Review Incident Logsheets Program MSO62V © 2009 Mincom .3620 Maintaining Incident Logsheets . Access MSO627 . The MSM627A .3620 87 Create Incident Logsheet Entries Use this activity to create Incident Logsheet Entries. Enter option Create Logsheet Entries. © 2009 Mincom .Work Orders . Make the required changes. The MSM627B .Maintain Incident Logsheets screen displays. Click OK. Click Save.Create Incident Logsheet Entries screen displays. Enter data in the following fields: Incident Description Originator Id Equipment Number or Reference 6. Complete additional fields on the MSM627B .Maintain Incident Logsheets. The MSM627B . Modify Incident Logsheet Entries Use this activity to modify Incident Logsheet Entries. Access MSO627 .Create Incident Logsheet Entries screen as required.Maintain Incident Logsheets.Maintain Incident Logsheets screen displays.Modify Incident Logsheet Entries screen displays. Enter data in the following fields: Work Group Date 4. The MSM627A . 2. Activity Steps 1. Click Confirm. Enter option Modify Logsheet Entries. Enter data in the following field: Work Group 4. 3. 7. 5. The Incident Logsheet Entry is saved. Activity Steps 1. 5. 3. Click OK. 8. 2. Review Incident Logsheets. 3. 2. Enter option Delete Logsheet Entries. 4. Click Save. 2.Delete Incident Logsheet Entries screen displays. 5. Delete Incident Logsheet Entries Use this activity to delete Incident Logsheet Entries that are no longer required. Access MSO62V .3620 6. Click OK. Select File » Exit. © 2009 Mincom .Review Incident Logsheets screen displays. The MSM62VA . If required. 7. Review Incident Logsheet Entries Use this activity to review Incident Logsheet Entries.Review Incident Logsheet Entries screen displays. The MSM627B . Review the Incident Logsheet Entries. Enter data in the following field: Work Group 3.Maintain Incident Logsheets screen displays.88 Work Orders . Access MSO627 . Activity Steps 1. Enter data in the following field: Work Group 4. The MSM62VB . Activity Steps 1. The MSM627A . complete the following key field: Action Use this function to access the following review options from the Review Incident Logsheet Entries screen: • Review Extended Description MSM097A • Review Equipment History MSM633A • Review Work Order Details MSM621D 6. Click OK until the last Logsheet entry is displayed. Click OK. Changes to the Incident Logsheet Entry are saved.Maintain Incident Logsheets. © 2009 Mincom . The Incident Work Order is saved. If Action Code B was selected.Work Orders . If Action Code A was selected. 2. To review the Work Order.Maintain Incident Logsheets. the Work Order name will default from the Standard Job description. based on the Logsheet entry. the Work Order name will default from the Incident Description. to be used for this incident. Enter option Create Logsheet Entries. Auto Create Incident Work Order Use this activity to create a Work Order for an incident from an existing Incident Logsheet Entry.3620 89 5. 3. The new Work Order number will display protected under each incident.Review Work Order Details. Click OK. Activity Steps 1. Access MSO627 .Create Incident Logsheet Entries screen displays. The Incident Logsheet Entry is deleted. 8. Ellipse will create a Work Order. Complete the following key field against the Incident Logsheet Entry you want to delete: Action (Select D) 6. Minimal data entry is required as many key fields default from the Incident Logsheet into the Work Order. The MSM627B . Click Confirm. Click Save. Enter data in the following field: Work Group 4.Maintain Incident Logsheets screen displays. 7. Enter data in the following fields: Start Time Incident Description Originator Id Equipment Number or Reference Standard Job Action (Select an Auto WO Creation option) 6. The MSM627A . 5. select action code R . Click Save. Click Save. 90 Work Orders .3620 Viewing Links to Work Orders Work Order and Task details are accessible from the View menu and can be displayed as required. Each application's search screen can be launched directly with key Work Order information defaulting into the search criteria. © 2009 Mincom . making it easier to review Work Order information that is held outside of the Work Order application. You can also access other Ellipse applications from the Work Order Detail screen. Diagram This process is represented in the Viewing Links to Work Orders diagram. Search for Work Order screen displays. 3. The MSQ901 . see the Journal Holding/Journals module. The MSQ620 .Work Order screen displays. 2. Access MSQ620 . The Work Order number defaults as the search criteria.Work Orders . This information is used by Managers to manage costs for a job.3620 91 Viewing Links to Work Orders .Diagram The diagram below represents the system activities associated with the Viewing Links to Work Orders process.Search for Accounting Entry screen displays. Activity Steps 1. Review Accounting Entries Linked to a Work Order Use this activity to review accounting entries linked to a Work Order. review who is charging to the Work Order and what type of costs are being recorded. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. Accounting entries created quoting the Work Order number display on this screen. Select View » Accounting Entries. © 2009 Mincom . The MSQ620 . For information on how to create Accounting Entries.Search for Work Order. Activity Steps 1. The MSQ620 . © 2009 Mincom . 2. Access MSQ620 . Accounting Entries matching the search criteria display in the results grid. For more information on using the Requisitions application.Work Order Requisitions displays with all requisitions raised for this Work Order. 4.Search for Work Order. The MSQ620 . Review Requisitions Linked to a Work Order Use this activity to review Requisitions linked to a Work Order. 5. Click Search. Review Equipment Tracing Actions Linked to a Work Order Purpose Use this activity to review Equipment Tracing Actions linked to a Work Order.Search for Work Order. 3. Select Entry » Close. The MSQ620 . Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. see the Purchasing module.3620 4. see the Equipment Tracing module.92 Work Orders .Work Order screen displays.Search for Work Order screen displays.Work Order screen displays. 6.Search for Work Order screen displays. Select View » Requisitions. Double-click on a Requisition line to review Requisition details. Select Requisition » Close. The MSQ140 . Activity Steps 1. The MSQ620 . For more information on using the Equipment Tracing application. The Dialog Box . The MSQ901 . Access MSQ620 . 2.Work Order screen displays. The MSQ620 .Accounting Entry screen displays. 5. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order.Requisition screen displays. Double-click on an Accounting Entry line item to review Accounting Entry details.Work Order screen displays. The MSQ620 . Activity Steps 1.Work Order screen displays. 2. Access MSQ620 . The MSQ620 . Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order.Search for Work Order screen displays. Click Search. The MSQ345 .Search for Condition Monitoring Measurements screen displays.Search for Work Order. Standard Estimates are updated as a result of comparing actual Work Order costs to Job Estimated costs. For more information on using the Condition Monitoring application. Select View » Condition Monitoring.3620 93 3. Activity Steps 1. Expand the tracing tree and select a tracing action to display the details.Work Order screen displays.Search for Work Order. Select View » Equipment Tracing. see the Job Estimates module. Job Estimates contain quote details and costs estimated for a job prior to work commencing. The MSQ620 . 4.Work Orders . The Work Order number defaults in the search criteria. Select Equipment Tracing » Close. For more information on using the Job Estimates application. The MSQ650 . 4. see the Condition Monitoring module. Condition Monitoring Measurements matching the search criteria display in the results grid. The MSQ345 .Work Order screen displays. Double-click on a Condition Monitoring Measurements line item to review details.Condition Monitoring Measurements screen displays. Access MSQ620 . The MSQ620 . Review Job Estimates Linked to a Work Order Use this activity to review Job Estimates linked to a Work Order. 3. This menu option is used to record Condition Monitoring measurements when the measurement is taken as a result of a Work Order. Review Condition Monitoring Linked to a Work Order Use this activity to review Condition Monitoring linked to a Work Order. 5. Select Measurement » Close. The MSQ620 . 5.Equipment Tracing screen displays. 6. They can be used as a starting point for Work Orders and are available for review from within the related Work Order. © 2009 Mincom . Job Package screen displays. requirements or job codes to the Work Order. 4.Work Order screen displays.94 Work Orders .Job Estimate screen displays. The MSQ620 .Work Order screen displays. The Work Order number defaults in the search criteria. Select View » Job Packaging. The Job Package details related to the selected Work Order are displayed. Job Estimates matching the search criteria display in the results grid. After locating documents they can be printed as an accompaniment to a Job Card. Access MSQ620 . Documents linked to a Work Order are crucial for high-risk jobs or jobs requiring a considerable amount of background information. Select JobPackage » Close.Work Order screen displays. 3. Activity Steps © 2009 Mincom . Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. 2.Search for Work Order screen displays. 2. Select JobEstimating » Close. 5. 6. Activity Steps 1. Double-click on a Job Estimate line to review details.3620 The MSQ620 . Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order.Work Order screen displays. For more information on using the Document Register. For more information on using the Job Packaging application. 4.Search for Work Order. The MSQ655 . Review Documents Linked to a Work Order Use this activity to review documents linked to a Work Order. Click Search. The MSQ620 .Search for Job Estimate screen displays. see the Job Packaging module. 3. The MSQ655 . Select View » Job Estimating.Search for Work Order screen displays. The MSQ695 . The MSQ620 . The MSQ620 . refer to the Document Management module. Review Job Packages Linked to a Work Order Use this activity to review a Work Order in the Job Packaging format and to utilise the Job Packaging functionality to add tasks. The MSQ620 . Access MSQ620 . 4. The MSQ620 . The MSQ620 .Search for Document screen displays. 5. the View Documents icon displays in grey. Enter the relevant search criteria and select the required work order. Enter the relevant search criteria and click Search. The MSQ580 . If no documents have been linked. 3. The MSQ580 . © 2009 Mincom . Select Document » Close. Documents matching the search criteria display in the results grid. the icon displays in blue.Search for Work Order screen displays. Note: When documents have been linked to a work order.Work Order screen displays. Select View » Document Register or Click the icon. 6.Search for Work Order. 2.Work Orders .Work Order screen displays. The MSQ620 .Document screen displays.3620 95 1. Double-click on a document line item to review details. ............................................................................................................................................Work Order Analysis Summary...... 139 MSR623 ......... 123 MSAXWO .............. 136 MSR620 .................................. 131 MSB624 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 105 MSA710 ...... 140 MSR626 ........................ 103 MSA622 ......................................Archive Work Selection .. 134 MSB628 ........................................................... 97 MSA621 .XML Work Order Job Card Report...........................................Mean Time Between Failure ........................................................... 110 MSAMTF ......................... 128 MSB622 ............................................Work Order Analysis Report .............................Reset Tasks Plan Start Dates .........Work Order Cost Reallocation ............ 107 MSAEFF ...................................................Maintenance Effectiveness and Efficiency Report .................................................................................. 118 MSAMTR ................Work Order Analysis Report .Mean Time to Repair ...... 142 © 2009 Mincom ...................Work Order Backlog Report.............. 130 MSB623 .........................Update W/O Status for Available Material ..........Work Order Generation for Type Defects ......................................................Work Order Requirements Report............Reports Reports MSA620 ...Job Card ....................................3620 Work Orders ...........................Work Order Task ......................................... 141 MSRXWJ ................................................................... 133 MSB627 ...................................................96 Work Orders ..............................................Work Order Automatic Finalisation .......................Missed Schedule Maintenance Report ... 137 MSR621 ..............Work Order Job Card ................. Only work orders with a completed status display. Work orders that have no equipment reference are filtered out from this report. If Y is selected the dates entered in the Plan Start Date From and Plan Start Date To prompts are included in the report output. Use Productive Unit Select Y or N. EGI and equipment reference to display more detailed information. If Y is selected the data entered in the Productive Unit prompt is included in the report output. Use Plan Start Date Range Select Y or N. Note: If you do not enter a prompt (except for mandatory prompts). District Code Select the district code. Universe The following universe is used in generating this report: • Work Management Prompts Mandatory Prompts The following selection criteria is mandatory to ensure information is retrieved only from a requisite database. Use Raised Date Range Select Y or N.3620 97 MSA620 .Work Order Analysis Report This report is used to provide key analysis type information on completed maintenance activities. the selection defaults to * (All). If Y is selected the dates entered in the Raised Date From and Raised Date To prompts are included in the report output. You can drill down on the maintenance type. If Y is selected the dates entered in the Completed Date From and Completed Date To prompts are included in the report output. Use Completed Date Range Select Y or N. © 2009 Mincom .Work Orders . work group or equipment class. Enter N if all dates display in the report output. Work Group Enter the work group assigned to the maintenance activity. the selection defaults to * (All). Plan Start Date From Enter the plan start date in the range for the maintenance activity.Active are used to calculate the number of failures. Note: If you do not enter a prompt (except for mandatory prompts). Completed Date To Enter the end date range for completed maintenance activities. only work orders that have the MSSS status indicator of A . Account Code To Enter the last account code in the range to report for completed maintenance activities. Additional Prompts The following criteria is optional to limit the data displayed. all work orders are used to calculate the number of failures. If the MSSS status prompt is N. Productive Unit Enter the productive unit assigned to the maintenance activity. Raised Date From Enter the start date in the range for raised maintenance activities. Note: The MSSS Active prompt is be used for data selection but used for data filtering on the Failure Analysis tab. © 2009 Mincom . Account Code From Enter the first account code in the range to report for completed maintenance activities. Raised Date To Enter the end date in the range for raised maintenance activities. Plan Start Date To Enter the plan end date in the range for the maintenance activity.3620 MSSS Active (Maintenance Strategy and Support System) Select Y or N. Completed Date From Enter the start date range for completed maintenance activities. If the Maintenance Strategy and Support System (MSSS) status prompt is Y.98 Work Orders . Work Orders . different tabs display: Form Report Detail tab Detail Report Prompts tab and Detail tab Summary Report Separate tabs for different report views Tabs Prompts Tab This tab displays the prompt information selected. The option to drill down on more detailed information within the grid and pie chart is also available. Note: Depending on the type of report. • District Code • Completed Date From • Completed Date To • MSSS Active (Maintenance Strategy and Support System) • Account Code From • Account Code To • Plan Start Date From • Plan Start Date To • Raised Date From • Raised Date To • Work Group Actual Cost Analysis Tab This tab displays the actual cost spent on maintenance activities for each work order type. Format of Report Grid Format: • Work Order Type and Description • Actual Total Cost Pie Chart Format: • Actual Total Cost by Work Order Type and Description • Percentages © 2009 Mincom .3620 99 Report Details This report displays in a grid format. 100 Work Orders .Equipment Reference and Description • Work Order Analysis .3620 Sections • District Code Sort Order • Work Order Cost Drill Down When you drill down on aggregate results in tables and charts. Format of Report Grid Format: • Work Order Type and Description • Actual Labour Hours Pie Chart Format: • Actual Labour Hours by Work Order Type and Description • Percentages Sections • District Code Sort Order • Labour Hours © 2009 Mincom . click the following heading links (as required) to drill down to lower level information: • Maintenance Type and Description Select one of the following options to drill down to other lower level information: • Work Order Analysis .Work Group and Description Calculated Fields Actual Total Cost Actual Equipment Cost plus Actual Material Cost plus Actual Labour Cost plus Actual Other Cost Actual Labour Hours Analysis Tab This tab displays the actual labour hours on maintenance activities for each work order type. The option to drill down on more detailed information within the grid and pie chart is also available. Further popup menus can display. a hyperlink allows you to view the detail data. In the report. Hint: Mouse over a hyperlink to display a popup menu and click on the Drill Down option. Equipment Reference and Description • Work Order Analysis . Further popup menus can display.Work Group and Description © 2009 Mincom .Work Orders . In the report. The option to drill down on more detailed information within the grid and pie chart is also available. a hyperlink allows you to view the detail data. Hint: Mouse over a hyperlink to display a popup menu and click on the Drill Down option. a hyperlink allows you to view the detail data.Work Group and Description Actual Duration Analysis Tab This tab displays the split of actual duration type spent on maintenance activities for each job duration code. Further popup menus can display. Hint: Mouse over a hyperlink to display a popup menu and click on the Drill Down option. Format of Report Grid Format: • Job Duration Code and Description • Job Duration (Hours) Pie Chart Format: • Actual Duration Hours by Job Duration Code and Description • Percentages Sections • District Code Sort Order • Duration Hours Drill Down When you drill down on aggregate results in tables and charts. Select one of the following options to drill down to other lower level information: • Duration Analysis .3620 101 Drill Down When you drill down on aggregate results in tables and charts.Equipment Reference and Description • Duration Analysis . click the following heading links (as required) to drill down to lower level information: • Maintenance Type and Description Select one of the following options to drill down to other lower level information: • Work Order Analysis . Work order job codes (W0. a hyperlink allows you to view the detail data. Select one of the following options to drill down to other lower level information: • Failure Analysis . W2) are used for failure analysis that supports RCM (Reliability Centred Maintenance).Equipment Group Identifier and Description • Failure Analysis . Hint: Mouse over a hyperlink to display a popup menu and click on the Drill Down option.Work Order Job Code 1 and Description © 2009 Mincom .3620 Failure Analysis Tab This tab displays failure types recorded on maintenance activities for each equipment class. The option to drill down on more detailed information within the grid and pie chart is also available.102 Work Orders . The number of failures is the number of work orders that have non-blank W0 job code. Further popup menus can display. W1. Format of Report Grid Format: • Equipment Class and Description • Number of Failures Pie Chart Format: • Equipment Class and Descriptions • Percentages Sections • District Code Sort Order • Number of Failures Drill Down When you drill down on aggregate results in tables and charts. Use Plan Start Date Enter Y or N to enter a range of plan start dates. the selection defaults to * (All). Note: If you do not enter a prompt (except for mandatory prompts). Task Work Group Crew Enter the work order group crew for which job cards are to be printed. If Y is entered the plan start date from and plan start date to prompts must be completed. Assign To Enter the employee ID assigned to the work order task. Work Order Task The work order task number.Work Order Job Card This report is used to print work order job cards on an individual basis or for a specific period of time for a work group. © 2009 Mincom . Universe The following universe is used in generating this report: • Work Management Prompts Mandatory Prompts The following selection criteria is mandatory to ensure information is retrieved only from a requisite database. the selection defaults to * (All).Work Orders . Y defaults. job cards can be printed for all work being performed under an activity (for example. In conjunction with Mincom Work Planner. District Code Select the district code. Uncompleted Work Orders Enter Y (Yes) or N (No) to print uncompleted work orders.3620 103 MSA621 . shutdown/ outage). Additional Prompts The following criteria is optional to limit the data displayed. Note: If you do not enter a prompt (except for mandatory prompts). Plan Start Date From Enter the planned start date for the work order task in the range to be reported. Work Order To Enter a last work order number in the range to be reported. Work Order From Enter the first work order number in the range to be reported. file or business objects inbox. email. Sections • Work Order Task Requirement • Safety Instruction • Job Instruction • Completion Instruction • Work Order Completion Associated Documents Tab This tab displays document publishing information that can be published concurrently with the work order job card. different tabs display: Form Report Detail tab Detail Report Prompts tab and Detail tab Summary Report Separate tabs for different report views Tabs Detail Tab This tab lists work order task information in detailed view of each task in job card format. © 2009 Mincom . Report Details This report displays in a grid format. Note: Depending on the type of report. The associated documents can be published to printer.104 Work Orders . fax. Shutdown No Enter the shutdown code for which the report is required.3620 Plan Start Date To Enter the planned end date for the work order task in the range to be reported. Task Work Group Enter the work group assigned to the task. Work Order Task Enter the work order task number in the range you want reported. Report Details This report displays in a grid format.3620 105 MSA622 . or N to exclude requirements. Note: Depending on the type of report. Y defaults. Include Task Requirement Enter Y to include work order task with requirements recorded against them. Note: If you do not enter a prompt (except for mandatory prompts). the selection defaults to * (All). Work Order To Enter a last work order number in the range to be reported. different tabs display: © 2009 Mincom . Note: If you do not enter a prompt (except for mandatory prompts).Work Orders . equipment and resource requirements for work orders and/ or work order tasks that match the nominated selection criteria. Additional Prompts The following criteria is optional to limit the data displayed. the selection defaults to * (All).Work Order Requirements Report This report displays material. District Code Select the district code for the work order and work order tasks raised. Work Order From Enter the first work order number in the range to be reported. Universe The following universe is used in generating this report: • Work Management Prompts Mandatory Prompts The following selection criteria is mandatory to ensure information is retrieved only from a requisite database. 106 Work Orders . Sections • District • Work Order • Work Order Task Sort Order • Work Order Number © 2009 Mincom .3620 Form Report Detail tab Detail Report Prompts tab and Detail tab Summary Report Separate tabs for different report views Tabs Prompts Tab This tab displays the prompt information selected. • District Code • Work Order From • Work Order To • Include Task Requirement • Work Order Task From • Work Order Task To Detail Tab This tab lists all work orders and/or work order task requirements for work orders and/or work order tasks. Account Code Enter the account code valid for the district where the equipment belongs. Note: If you do not enter a prompt (except for mandatory prompts). the comment column displays completion code descriptions. Exclude Inactive Task Select the N or Y to exclude inactive tasks. Work Group From Enter the first work group in the range for the maintenance schedule task. Additional Prompts The following criteria is optional to limit the data displayed. This prompt defaults to Y. For tasks missing the schedule is: • Tasks committed but not completed • Tasks deferred or completed. with a completion code indicating that they should appear on the missed schedule report Also. Universe The following universe is used in generating this report: • Asset Management Prompts Mandatory Prompts The following selection criteria is mandatory to ensure information is retrieved only from a requisite database. days overdue is printed for committed tasks. Note: If you do not enter a prompt (except for mandatory prompts).Work Orders . Report End Date Select the last date for the report to display.3620 107 MSA710 . © 2009 Mincom . the selection defaults to * (All).Missed Schedule Maintenance Report This report displays all tasks associated with a piece of equipment in each work group missed in a specified period. Work Group To Enter the last work group in the range for the maintenance schedule task. the selection defaults to * (All). Note: Depending on the type of report. Sections • Work Group Sort Order • Equipment Reference © 2009 Mincom . Report Details This report displays in a grid format. Equip Ref To (Equipment Reference To) Enter the last equipment reference number in the range relating to the maintenance schedule task. • Account Code • Work Group From • Work Group To • Equip Ref From (Equipment Reference From) • Equip Ref To (Equipment Reference To) • Report End Date • Exclude Inactive Tasks Detail Tab This tab lists the tasks associated with a piece of equipment in each work group missing in a specified period. different tabs display: Form Report Detail tab Detail Report Prompts tab and Detail tab Summary Report Separate tabs for different report views Tabs Prompts Tab This tab displays the prompt information selected.108 Work Orders .3620 Equip Ref From (Equipment Reference From) Enter the first equipment reference number in the range relating to the maintenance schedule task. 3620 109 Calculated Fields Days Over Report End Date less Scheduled or Actioned Date © 2009 Mincom .Work Orders . you can drill down into work group set.Maintenance Effectiveness and Efficiency Report This report displays in a graphical manner. Only closed work orders are reported. Reactive Maint Type (Reactive Maintenance Type) Enter the maintenance types that are reactive maintenance.110 Work Orders . Completed Date From Enter the first completion date in the range you want reported. © 2009 Mincom . To extend the analysis ability. Universe The following universe is used in generating this report: • Asset Management Prompts Mandatory Prompts The following selection criteria is mandatory to ensure information is retrieved only from a requisite database. District Code Enter the district code. Completed Date To Enter the last completion date in the range you want reported. the selection defaults to * (All). Completion Allowance Enter the number of days before or after the Work Order Planned Start Date to be used to calculate the work order 'Completion within Completion Allowance' KPI. work group or equipment group identifier (EGI) and equipment reference. Note: If you do not enter a prompt (except for mandatory prompts).3620 MSAEFF . Maint Work Order Type Enter the work order type relating to the maintenance work. Proactive Maint Type (Proactive Maintenance Type) Enter the maintenance types that are proactive maintenance. key performance indicator information on the effectiveness and efficiency of maintenance activities. Equip Ref To (Equipment Reference To) Enter the last equipment reference number in the range you want reported.3620 111 MSSS Active (Maintenance Strategy and Support System) Select Y or N. only work orders that have the MSSS status indicator of A . Work Group Set Enter a work group set. Y defaults. Equip Ref From (Equipment Reference From) Enter the first equipment reference number in the range you want reported. all work orders are used to calculate the number of failures. If the Maintenance Strategy and Support System (MSSS) status prompt is Y. the selection defaults to * (All). different tabs display: Form Report Detail tab Detail Report Prompts tab and Detail tab Summary Report Separate tabs for different report views Tabs Prompts Tab This tab displays the prompt information selected. Additional Prompts The following criteria is optional to limit the data displayed. Note: If you do not enter a prompt (except for mandatory prompts). Note: Depending on the type of report. Work Group Select the work group Report Details This report displays in a grid format.Work Orders . • District Code • Completed Date From © 2009 Mincom . If the MSSS status prompt is N.Active are used to calculate the number of failures. Maintenance effectiveness is calculated for each work group set. a hyperlink allows you to view the detail data. The report displays maintenance costs in categories represented by various maintenance types that are grouped into proactive and reactive as nominated at selection prompts. You can use the drill down facility by clicking on the top left of the screen. Reactive work is all other works not found as a result of carrying out primary tasks. Format of Report Grid Format • Proactive Amount • Reactive Amount • Ratio Percentage Bar Graph Format • Work Group Set • Actual Labour Costs (Percentages) Drill Down When you drill down on aggregate results in tables and charts.112 Work Orders . Hint: Mouse over a hyperlink to display a popup menu and click on the Drill Down option. Primary tasks are carried out in order to find secondary tasks before they become failure tasks.3620 • Completed Date to • Completion Allowance • Maintenance Work Order Type • Proactive Maintenance Type • Reactive Maintenance Type • Work Group Set • Equipment Reference From/To • Work Group Maintenance Effectiveness Tab This tab lists maintenance effectiveness as the ratio of proactive to reactive works in a bar graph format. Further popup menus can display. You can drill down from a work group set to work group to month. Select from the available options to drill down to more detailed information: • Work Group Set © 2009 Mincom . and from proactive or reactive categories to maintenance types to give more analysis details. The Proactive work is executed in a structured manner. The information can be drilled down from work group set.Required by Date (Number of closed non MST work orders that have required by date)/(Total number of closed non MST work orders) Work Creation .for Reactive Maintenance Types) Maintenance Effectiveness (No. Work Creation and Planning Efficiency Tab This tab calculates and displays Maintenance Efficiency Key Performance Indicators of work allocation. Sections • District Code Calculated Fields Maintenance Work Allocation (Number of closed non MST work orders that have nominated maintenance work order types)/(Total number of closed non MST work orders .for Reactive Maintenance Types) Only closed work orders will be used in the calculation. work creation and work planning within the nominated time period and maintenance work order types.Work Orders . Only the work order type that is the nominated maintenance work order type will be used.Originator Priority (Number of closed non MST work orders that have originator priority)/(Total number of closed non MST work orders) Work Planning . work group and month to give more analysis details.Proactive Maintenance Types)/ Total number of Work Orders .Estimated Duration (Number of all closed work orders that have estimated duration)/(Total number of all closed work orders) © 2009 Mincom . Only nominated Proactive and Reactive types will be used in the calculation.3620 • Work Group • Month 113 Sections • District Code Calculated Fields Maintenance Effectiveness (Costs) Sum(Total Work Order Cost .for Proactive Maintenance Types)/ Sum(Total Work Order Cost . If the effectiveness ratio is more than 75% to 25% than the data will be highlighted in red.All maintenance type) Work Creation . of Work Orders) Total number of Work Orders .Planner Priority (Number of closed non MST work orders that have planner priority)/(Total number of closed non MST work orders) Work Planning . Estimated Cost is less than 80% then the data will be highlighted in red.Estimated duration hours)*100%/Estimated duration hours Estimated Cost Variance (Actual estimated cost .Estimated cost)*100%/Estimated cost Non MST work orders are work orders that are not created from a MST. If Work Planning .Estimated Duration is less than 80% then the data will be highlighted in red.15%)/(Total number of all closed work orders) Duration Variance (Actual duration hours .15%)/(Total number of all closed work orders) Work Planning .Estimated Cost Variance +/. Sections • District Code.Estimated Cost Variance +/.15% (Number of all closed work orders that have estimated cost variance within +/. All KPIs will look at only work orders that have the nominated maintenance work order type except the maintenance work allocation KPI. © 2009 Mincom . work group and month to give more analysis details.Originator Priority is less than 100% then the data will be highlighted in red.Planner Priority is less than 80% then the data will be highlighted in red. The information can be drilled down from work group set.15% (Number of all closed work orders that have duration variance within +/.3620 Work Planning .15% is less than 70% then the data will be highlighted in red. If work allocation is less than 90% then the data will be highlighted in red. If Work Planning . If Work Planning . If Work Creation . If Work Creation .Estimated Cost (Number of all closed work orders that have estimated cost)/(Total number of all closed work orders) Work Planning . If Work Planning .Required by Date is less than 80% then the data will be highlighted in red.114 Work Orders .Duration Variance +/.15% is less than 70% then the data will be highlighted in red. If Work Planning . Work Scheduling and Completion Efficiency Tab This tab calculates and displays Maintenance Efficiency Key Performance Indicators of work scheduling and work completion within nominated time period and maintenance work order types.Duration Variance +/. Failure Code 3 (Number of closed non MST work orders that have failure code 3)/(Total number of closed non MST work orders) Work Completion . If Work Completion .Failure Code 1 (Number of closed non MST work orders that have failure code 1)/(Total number of closed non MST work orders) Work Completion . If Work Completion .Planned Start Date (Number of all closed non MST work orders that have planned start date)/(Total number of all closed non MST work orders) Work Scheduling .Failure Code 2 (Number of closed non MST work orders that have failure code 2)/(Total number of closed non MST work orders) Work Completion . If work Scheduling .Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom .Completion Comment (Number of closed non MST work orders that have completion comment at work order header)/(Total number of closed non MST work orders) Non MST work orders are work orders that not created from MST All KPIs will look at only work orders that have the nominated maintenance work order type.Failure Code 2 is less than 100% then the data will be highlighted in red. If Work Completion .Actual Cost (Number of all closed work orders that have actual cost)/(Total number of all closed work orders) Work Completion .3620 115 Calculated Fields Work Scheduling .Actual Duration (Number of all closed work orders that have actual duration)/(Total number of all closed work orders) Work Completion .Failure Code 1 is less than 100% then the data will be highlighted in red.Planned Start Date is less than 80% then the data will be highlighted in red.Failure Code 4 is less than 100% then the data will be highlighted in red. If Work Scheduling .Actual Duration is less than 100% then the data will be highlighted in red. If Work Completion .Failure Code 3 is less than 100% then the data will be highlighted in red.Failure Code 4 (Number of closed non MST work orders that have failure code 4)/(Total number of closed non MST work orders) Work Completion .Actual Cost is less than 100% then the data will be highlighted in red. If Work Completion . If Work Completion .Completion within Allowance is less than 70% then the data will be highlighted in red.Completion Comment is less than 100% then the data will be highlighted in red. If Work Completion .Completion within Completion Allowance (Number of all closed work orders that are completed within the completion allowance)/(Total number of all closed work orders) Work Completion . of Work Orders) Total number of Work Orders .116 Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom . Format of Report Grid Format • Equipment Group Identifier (EGI) • Proactive Amount • Reactive Amount • Ratio Percentage Bar Graph Format • EGI • Percentage Calculated Fields Equipment Maintenance Effectiveness (Costs) Sum(Total Work Order Cost .for Proactive Maintenance Types)/ Total number of Work Orders .3620 MSSS Analysis Tab The Maintenance Strategy Support System (MSSS) has the capability of recording a full RCM analysis strategy within the system.for Reactive Maintenance Types) Equipment Maintenance Effectiveness (No. Maintenance effectiveness will then be calculated for each equipment group. The information can be drilled down from equipment group to equipment to month and from proactive or reactive categories to maintenance types to give more analysis details. Only nominated Proactive and Reactive Maintenance types will be used in the calculation. This tab displays maintenance costs and number of work orders in categories represented by various maintenance types that will be grouped into Proactive and Reactive as nominated at selection prompts. This tab displays the MSSS analysis strategy and number of closed work orders that match the MSSS structured loaded for Equipment Group Ids. Equip Maint Effectiveness Tab Equipment Maintenance Effectiveness is the ratio of Proactive to Reactive works recorded against an item of equipment. MSSS also facilitates a structured selection of failure codes depending on Equipment Group Id. Only work orders raised against an item of equipment will be used in the calculation. Only the work order type that is the nominated maintenance work order type will be used.for Proactive Maintenance Types)/ Sum(Total Work Order Cost .for Reactive Maintenance Types) Only closed work orders will be used in the calculation. The report provides the effectiveness of individual equipment maintenance strategies. The information can be drilled down from EGI to Equipment References to give more analysis details. 3620 117 If the effectiveness ratio is less than 75% to 25% then the data will be highlighted in red.Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom . 3620 MSAMTF . The meantime between failure is calculated as the number of days in the reporting period divided by the number of work orders raised in that period. Equip Ref To (Equipment Reference To) Enter the last equipment reference number in the range to be reported. Universe The following universe is used in generating this report: • Work Management Prompts Mandatory Prompts The following selection criteria is mandatory to ensure information is retrieved only from a requisite database. Note: If you do not enter a prompt (except for mandatory prompts).118 Work Orders . the selection defaults to * (All). Equip Ref From (Equipment Reference From) Enter the first equipment reference number in the range to be reported. Additional Prompts The following criteria is optional to limit the data displayed. © 2009 Mincom . EGI From (Equipment Group Identifier From) Enter the last EGI number in the range to be reported. the selection defaults to * (All). Completed Date From Enter the first work order completed date in the range to be reported. Note: If you do not enter a prompt (except for mandatory prompts). Completed Date To Enter the last work order raised date in the range to be reported.Mean Time Between Failure This report displays work orders raised for a productive unit. EGI To (Equipment Group Identifier To) Enter the first EGI number in the range to be reported. Note: Depending on the type of report. Maint Type (Maintenance Type) Enter the maintenance type for the work order to be reported. Work Order Type Enter the work order type to be reported. different tabs display: Form Report Detail tab Detail Report Prompts tab and Detail tab Summary Report Separate tabs for different report views Tabs Prompts Tab This tab displays the prompt information selected. • Completed Date From • Completed Date To • EGI From (Equipment Group Identifier From) • EGI To (Equipment Group Identifier From) • Equip Ref From (Equipment Reference From) • Equip Ref To (Equipment Reference To) • Equipment Class © 2009 Mincom . Raised Date To Enter the last work order raised date in the range to be reported.Work Orders . Enter End Closed Date Enter the last work order closed date in the range to be reported. Report Details This report displays in a grid format. Raised Date From Enter the first work order raised date in the range to be reported.3620 119 Equipment Class (Work Order) Enter the equipment class for the work order to be reported. Grid Format • No of WO (Number of Closed Work Orders) © 2009 Mincom .MTFB (Days) MTBF by Equipment This tab lists the mean time between failures for each equipment item for a calendar year.Days) • Year Raised Bar Graph Format • X Axis .MTFB (Days) MTBF by EGI This tab lists the mean time between failure for each equipment group identification by calendar year.120 Work Orders . Format of Report The summary displays in both grid and bar graph format. Format of Report The summary displays in both grid and bar graph format.Year Raised • Y Axis . Grid Format • No of WO (Number of Closed Work Orders) • Mean Time Between Failure (Days) (MTBF .3620 • Maint Type (Maintenance Type) • Enter End Closed Date • Raised Date From • Raised Date To • Work Order Type MTBF by Calendar Year This tab lists the mean time between failures by each calendar year. Format of Report The summary displays in both grid and bar graph format.Days) Bar Graph Format • X Axis . Grid Format • Year Raised • Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF .Year Raised • Y Axis . MTFB (Days) MTBF by Maintenance Type This tab lists the mean time between failure each maintenance type by calendar year. Format of Report The summary displays in both grid and bar graph format.Year Raised • Y Axis . Grid Format • No of WO (Number of Closed Work Orders) • Mean Time Between Failure (Days) (MTBF . Grid Format • No of WO (Number of Closed Work Orders) • Mean Time Between Failure (Days) (MTBF .Days) • Year Raised Bar Graph Format • X Axis .Year Raised • Y Axis .Work Orders . Format of Report The summary displays in both grid and bar graph format.Days) • Year Raised Bar Graph Format • X Axis . Format of Report The summary displays in both grid and bar graph format.3620 121 • Mean Time Between Failure (Days) (MTBF .MTFB (Days) MTBF by Equipment Class This tab lists the mean time between failure for each equipment class by calendar year.Days) • Year Raised Bar Graph Format • X Axis . Grid Format © 2009 Mincom .MTFB (Days) MTBF by Work Order Type This tab lists the mean time between failure for each work order type by calendar year.Year Raised • Y Axis . 3620 • No of WO (Number of Closed Work Orders) • Mean Time Between Failure (Days) (MTBF .Days) • Year Raised Bar Graph Format • X Axis .MTFB (Days) © 2009 Mincom .Year Raised • Y Axis .122 Work Orders . The information provides the average number of hours the equipment is inoperative or 'down' while it undergoes maintenance.Mean Time to Repair This report displays work order information for selected equipment and a selected work period. EGI To (Equipment Group Identifier From) Enter the last EGI number in the range to be reported. during a given work period. Completed Date To Enter the last work order raised date in the range to be reported. the selection defaults to * (All). It calculates the mean time to repair (MTTR) the equipment. EGI From (Equipment Group Identifier From) Enter the first EGI number in the range to be reported. Universe The following universe is used in generating this report: • Work Management Prompts Mandatory Prompts The following selection criteria is mandatory to ensure information is retrieved only from a requisite database. Equip Ref From (Equipment Reference From) Enter the first equipment reference number in the range to be reported. Completed Date From Enter the first work order completed date in the range to be reported. Additional Prompts The following criteria is optional to limit the data displayed. Note: If you do not enter a prompt (except for mandatory prompts). Note: If you do not enter a prompt (except for mandatory prompts). Equip Ref To (Equipment Reference To) © 2009 Mincom . the selection defaults to * (All).3620 123 MSAMTR .Work Orders . Note: Depending on the type of report. Work Order Type Enter the work order type to be reported.124 Work Orders . • Completed Date From • Completed Date To • EGI From (Equipment Group Identifier From) • EGI To (Equipment Group Identifier From) • Equip Ref From (Equipment Reference From) • Equip Ref To (Equipment Reference To) © 2009 Mincom . Enter End Closed Date Enter the last work order closed date in the range to be reported. Raised Date From Enter the first work order raised date in the range to be reported. Equipment Class (Work Order) Enter the equipment class for the work order to be reported. Report Details This report displays in a grid format. different tabs display: Form Report Detail tab Detail Report Prompts tab and Detail tab Summary Report Separate tabs for different report views Tabs Prompts Tab This tab displays the prompt information selected.3620 Enter the last equipment reference number in the range to be reported. Raised Date To Enter the last work order raised date in the range to be reported. Maint Type (Maintenance Type) Enter the maintenance type for the work order to be reported. Format of Report The summary displays in both grid and bar graph format.Year Closed • Y Axis .Year Closed • Y Axis . Grid Format • No of WO (Number of Closed Work Orders) • Mean Time to Repair (Hours) (MTTR .Hours) • Year Closed Bar Graph Format • X Axis .MTTR (Hrs) (MTTR .3620 • Equipment Class • Maint Type (Maintenance Type) • Enter End Closed Date • Raised Date From • Raised Date To • Work Order Type 125 MTTR by Calendar Year This tab lists the mean time to repair all equipment in request by each calendar year. Grid Format © 2009 Mincom . Grid Format • Year Closed • Mean Time to Repair (MTTR .Hours) MTTR by EGI This tab lists the mean time to repair each equipment group identification by calendar year.MTTR (Hrs) MTTR by Equipment This tab lists the mean time to repair each equipment in request by calendar year.Hours) Bar Graph Format • X Axis .Work Orders . Format of Report The summary displays in both grid and bar graph format. Format of Report The summary displays in both grid and bar graph format. Hours) • Year Closed Bar Graph Format • X Axis .MTTR (Hrs) (MTTR .Hours) MTTR by Work Order Type This tab lists the mean time to repair each work order type by calendar year.Hours) MTTR by Equipment Class This tab lists the mean time to repair each equipment class by calendar year. Grid Format • No of WO (Number of Closed Work Orders) • Mean Time to Repair (Hours) (MTTR . Format of Report The summary displays in both grid and bar graph format.Hours) MTTR by Maintenance Type This tab lists the mean time to repair each maintenance type by calendar year. Grid Format • No of WO (Number of Closed Work Orders) • Mean Time to Repair (Hours) (MTTR .Year Closed • Y Axis .MTTR (Hrs) (MTTR .Hours) • Year Closed Bar Graph Format • X Axis . Format of Report The summary displays in both grid and bar graph format.126 Work Orders .3620 • No of WO (Number of Closed Work Orders) • Mean Time to Repair (Hours) (MTTR .Year Closed • Y Axis .MTTR (Hrs) (MTTR . Format of Report The summary displays in both grid and bar graph format.Hours) • Year Closed Bar Graph Format • X Axis .Year Closed • Y Axis . © 2009 Mincom . Work Orders .Hours) © 2009 Mincom .3620 127 Grid Format • No of WO (Number of Closed Work Orders) • Mean Time to Repair (Hours) (MTTR .MTTR (Hrs) (MTTR .Hours) • Year Closed Bar Graph Format • X Axis .Year Closed • Y Axis . Work Order To Enter a last work order number in the range to be reported. Work Order From Enter the first work order number in the range to be reported. If Y is entered the plan start date from and plan start date to fields need to be completed. Work Order Task Enter the task number of the work order to be reported.3620 MSAXWO . the selection defaults to * (All). District Code Enter the district code.Work Order Analysis Summary This report is a summary listing of all work orders. Note: If you do not enter a prompt (except for mandatory prompts). Shutdown No Enter the shutdown number of the work order to be reported. Uncompleted Work Orders Enter Y or N if you want uncompleted work orders to be reported. Note: If you do not enter a prompt (except for mandatory prompts). Plan Start Date Range Enter Y or N to enter a range of plan start dates. Universe The following universe is used in generating this report: • Work Management Prompts Mandatory Prompts The following selection criteria is mandatory to ensure information is retrieved only from a requisite database. Additional Prompts The following criteria is optional to limit the data displayed.128 Work Orders . Defaults to Y. Plan Start Date From Enter the first work order date in the range to be reported. The work order analysis report assists asset owners and maintenance personnel in identifying equipment failure patterns in completed jobs and resource allocation requirements for open jobs. © 2009 Mincom . the selection defaults to * (All). • District Code • Shutdown No • Uncompleted Work Orders • Work Order From • Work Order To • Work Order Task • Plan Start Date Range • Plan Start Date From • Plan Start Date To Detail Tab This tab lists work order summary details spent on maintenance activities.Work Orders . Sections • District Code Sort Order • Work Order Number © 2009 Mincom . Note: Depending on the type of report.3620 129 Plan Start Date To Enter the last work order date in the range to be reported. different tabs display: Form Report Detail tab Detail Report Prompts tab and Detail tab Summary Report Separate tabs for different report views Tabs Prompts Tab This tab displays the prompt information selected. Report Details This report displays in a grid format. The report is automatically produced with each successful execution of the MSB622 .Work Order Reallocation screen when the Reallocation Limit is adjusted for a Work Order which is closed to Final Costs.Work Order Cost Reallocation procedure. © 2009 Mincom . the MSM62CA .Completion of Work Order screen when the Work Order is closed to Final Costs.Work Order Cost Reallocation Report MSB622 is an audit control of the Work Order cost reallocation procedure. Requests for the Reallocation procedure are generated via the online Report Request facility MSO080.130 Work Orders . or via the MSM62RA .3620 MSB622 . 3620 131 MSB623 . This depends on the Include Sub-Projects flag setting. An entry against a sub-system which is not installed will be ignored by the batch process. only work orders that have this work group can possibly be automatically finalised.Work Order Automatic Finalisation Report MSB623 is an audit control of the Automatic Work Order finalisation procedure. Project Number When specified. In order to be automatically finalised. A blank entry means that finalisation will not be performed for that subsystem. only the nominated sub-system will be finalised. or that have any project which is a sub-project of that project at any level in the project hierarchy can possibly be automatically finalised. However. it must also match all other selection criteria entered. this parameter is applied in the same manner as for the All Subsystems Number of Days field. only work orders that have this originator can possibly be automatically finalised. Additional Information Parameters All Sub-systems Number of Days This specifies the minimum number of days that must have elapsed between the work order completion date. only work orders that have this parent work order can possibly be automatically finalised. instead of the work order as a whole being finalised. In order to be automatically finalised. In order to be automatically finalised. Parent Work Order When specified. Assign To When specified. in order to automatically finalise the work order. Individual Subsystems Number of Days Entries may only be made to any of these fields if there is no entry in the All Sub-systems Number of Days field. Work Group When specified. In order to be automatically finalised. Originator When specified.Work Orders . then the work order as a whole will be finalised according to sub-system finalisation rules. only work orders that have this assign to person can possibly be automatically finalised. it must also match all other selection criteria entered. it must also match all other selection criteria entered. only work orders that have this Project Number. and the process run date. it must also match all other selection criteria entered. For each of the available sub-systems. © 2009 Mincom . It allows Work Orders which match the strict selection criteria to be automatically finalised. If the finalisation of an individual sub-system results in all installed subsystems being finalised. In order to be automatically finalised. it must also match all other selection criteria entered. When this field is set to Y. all matching work orders for the nominated project and for all sub. will be selected for automatic finalisation. not finalised and not capital.3620 Defaults to Y.projects of that project are finalised. When this field is set to N or space.132 Include Sub-projects Work Orders . only work orders which are completed. © 2009 Mincom . only work orders belonging to the nominated project are finalised. **Additionally** Additionally. The program reviews the stock availability (Stock On Hand . (Mincom) Equipment Number Enter a valid Equipment Number to check Work Orders for specific equipment. Work Group Enter a valid Work Group within the current district to check Work Orders for a specific Work Group. Entry is optional. 4.Dues Out) of each APL item associated with the Work Order and if all items have sufficient stock. Additional Information Parameters Work Order Status Enter O for Open Work Orders or A for Authorised Work Orders. Leave blank to indicate both status O and A are to be used in the selection process.User Work Order Status. This report can be requested on an ad hoc basis. this program should be initiated immediately prior to submitting the APL requisition. The program assumes all items on the APL are required and that only 1 X Qty Required is to be requisitioned. To provide an accurate assessment. The program has a number of limitations which should be taken into account. 3. Assigned To Individual Enter the Responsibility Code of the person to whom the Work Order is assigned.Update W/O Status for Available Material This program provides a mechanism to update the User Status of Work Orders for which sufficient stocks are available to meet APL requirements. the Work Order User Status is set to a nominated value specified in the Table File WS . © 2009 Mincom .Work Orders . 1.3620 133 MSB624 . Stock availability calculations do not take into account imminent dues-in. Entry is optional. Entry is optional. This report does not take into account Category Match values therefore all Categories are considered available for issue. 2. 3620 MSB627 . Entry is mandatory if the Equipment List Type has been entered and. Entry is validated against Table Files E0 to E9. Input is not required if an EGI has been entered. together with the List Type. A summary report is produced detailing the Work Orders created. Enter L to generate work orders for equipment items for the entered list. This report can be generated at any time. The values and their meanings are held in Table File PY.Work Order Generation for Type Defects Program MSB627 will generate Work Orders based on equipment which was derived either from an Equipment Group Identifier or an Equipment List. Standard Job Enter the Standard Job which generated work orders will be based on. Entry is validated against the Work Centre master file. Originator Priority Enter the originator's priority. but is mandatory if a List Type and ID have been entered. Parent Work Order Enter an existing Parent Work Order Number to which any generated work orders will belong. Work Group Enter the work group to which this job is assigned. Entry is validated against Table File LI. Equipment List Type Enter a valid Equipment List Type. or the Employee master file for integrated Payroll users. Work Centre Enter the work centre to which this job is assigned. Input is not required if an EGI has been entered. All generated work orders will begin with this prefix. Equipment Classification Enter up to 10 Equipment Classifications to be used as additional filters for selecting equipment. Entry is not required if an EGI has been entered. List Indicator Enter a valid List Indicator.134 Work Orders . Work Order Prefix Enter a valid work order prefix as defined on the System Control file. with the highest priority being 1. Entry is validated against the Work Group master file. must exist as a valid Equipment List. Entry is validated against Table File GI. which is a number between 1 and 99 inclusive. Originator Enter the responsibility code of the person who initiated the generation of the work orders. Equipment List Identifier Enter a valid Equipment List Identifier. Entry is validated against this table file. and the assign to person. © 2009 Mincom . This program would typically be run when defects are identified against multiple pieces of equipment of the same type or specification. Enter A to generate work orders for all equipment items for the entered list and its sub-lists. the equipment. Entry is validated against Table File RC. Additional Information Parameters EGI (Equipment Group Identifier) Enter a valid Equipment Group Identifier. Entry is validated against Table File RC. or the Employee master file for integrated Payroll users. © 2009 Mincom .3620 Assigned To 135 Enter the responsibility code of the person to whom the work order is assigned.Work Orders . Those tasks belonging to a nominated range of work orders for which offsets are in use. Additional Information Parameters Target District Enter the district to which the work orders are to be processed.Reset Tasks Plan Start Dates Report MSB628 shows the number of records read and updated in the process of re. If you enter To Work Order and leave From Work Order blank.3620 MSB628 . and for which the work order has a planned start date are updated when the Task start date does not equal the work order start date plus the offset value. otherwise the specified range of Work Order Numbers will be processed. the To Work Order number is validated to be greater than or equal to the From Work Order number. If you enter From Work Order and leave To Work Order blank.synchronising the planned start dates of Work Order Tasks. Entry must be a valid District Code. provided the resulting date change does not try to move the Task start date into or out of a committed scheduling period. the relevant scheduling information is also maintained. If they are equal. This field can also end with the wildcard character *. Either of the From or To Work Order Numbers can end with the wildcard character *. © 2009 Mincom . If a planned finish date is also present. From Work Order/To Work Order Enter either a range of work order numbers or a single work order number. Parent Work Order Number If the Parent Work Order number is given. it will only be processed when both the From Work Order Number and the To Work Order number are blank. the update will be performed until the end of the Work Order file. then the relative difference between the start and finish dates is maintained. the update will start from the beginning of the Work Order file.136 Work Orders . If the Task has been scheduled. If both numbers are given. the single work order will be processed. The Work Order Analysis Report assists asset owners and maintenance personnel in identifying equipment failure patterns in completed jobs and resource allocation requirements for open jobs among other things. D for a detailed report. Leave the To range blank to report to the last Work Order Number. If they are not required. C. WO Status-User Enter the user status of the work orders required. The selection criteria offered in this report makes for a very powerful analysis tool. Equipment List Type Enter the type of equipment list for which the report is required. It can also be requested directly from the Short Form and Long Form Work Order applications by using Action Code W. The dates entered refer to the type requested in the previous field.Authorised. Equipment Reference Range: From/To Enter the range of Equipment References for which the report is required. This report can be generated at any time from MSO080.Work Order Analysis Report This report provides a detailed or a summary listing of all Work Orders meeting the selection criteria.Closed. P or space.3620 137 MSR620 . depending on the type of work order date to be selected Close/ P-Plan Start/ on. WO StatusMincom (O/A/C) Enter the Work Order status of the work orders required. Space Work Order Date Range: From/To Enter the range of work order dates to be selected. Tasks Required (Y/N) Enter Y if task breakdowns are required on the report. Work Order Type Enter the work order type to be selected for the report. C. © 2009 Mincom .Work Orders . Leave the From range blank to report from the first Equipment Reference. Equipment Group ID Enter the equipment group ID for which the report is required. enter N and the report will show Work Order header information only. Additional Information Parameters Summary or Detailed Output Enter S to request the summary report. Date: O-Open/ CEnter O. Leave the To range blank to report to the latest date. Leave the To range blank to report to the last Equipment Reference. Work Order Number Range: From/To Enter the range of work orders for which the report is required. Options are O Open. Leave the From range blank to report from the earliest date. A . Leave the From range blank to report from the first Work Order Number. Maintenance Type Enter the maintenance type for which the report is required. Classification Codes Enter up to three work order Classification Codes in accordance with the entry made in the Classification Codes field. Enter the Standard Job Number for which the report is required. Work orders are selected for equipment on this list only.138 Equipment List ID Work Orders . Cost Centre/Account Code Range: From/To Enter the range of Cost Centre or Account Codes for which the report is required. Shutdown Code Enter the Shutdown Code for which the report is required. © 2009 Mincom . separated by a space. Leave the From range blank to report from the first code. Leave the From range blank to report from the first Component Code. Component Code Range: From/To Enter the range of Component Codes for which the report is required.3620 Enter the ID for the equipment list for which the report is required. Leave the To range blank to report to the last code. Leave the To range blank to report to the last Component Codes. Part Causing Failure Enter the part causing failure for which the report is required. Standard Job No. Leave the From range blank if no lower limit of hours is required. Originator Enter the originator of the work order for which the report is required. Work Group Range: From/To Enter the range of work groups for which the report is required. Classification Types Enter up to three work order classification types. Leave the From range blank to report from the first work group. Project Number Enter the Project Number for which the report is required. Each entry made must directly correlate to the corresponding entry in the Classification Code field. Each code can be separated by a space. not for equipment on any of the sub-lists. from which the report is required to select. Leave the To range blank to report to the last work group. This field must be entered in conjunction with the Classification Codes field. for example WO to W9. Estimated Job Hours Range: From/To Enter the range of estimated job hours for which the report is required. Leave the To range blank if no upper limit of estimated job hours is required. Modifier Code Enter the Modifier Code to be reported on. if only one is required. It can also be requested directly from the Work Order application. Additional Information Parameters Work Order Number Enter the number of the work order for which the job card is required.Job Card Report MSR621 is the job card for either a single Work Order Task or for all Tasks for a Work Order.3620 139 MSR621 .Work Order Task . Work Order Task Enter the number of the work order task required if the job card is not required for all tasks.Work Orders . Leave this field blank to request job cards for every task. © 2009 Mincom . This report can be generated at any time from MSO080. Work Order Range: From/To Enter a range of Work Order Numbers if job cards for more than one work order are required. unless they do not meet one of the other selection criteria. This report can be generated at any time. Equipment This is an optional field. Additional Information Parameters Run Number Leave blank for a system-generated Run Number or enter a valid Run Number that already exists on the Header Details of Archive Run file MSF075. Enter the completion date (inclusive) at which to process the Completed run. C.Archive Work Selection Report MSR623 allows the selection of Work Orders to be archived using an equipment reference as the main selection criterion. Prefix Enter a valid Work Order Prefix to restrict selection of work orders to those preceded by the specified prefix. Actual Cost This is an optional field. Entry is mandatory when amending an existing run. Enter Y. closed to costs. Type Enter a valid Work Order Type to restrict selection of work orders to those with the specified type. Cost Centre/ Account Code (Optional) This is an optional field. or N to select work orders that have had their costs finalised. Enter the maximum cost of a work order in dollars to be included in selection.140 Work Orders . Override/ Add Enter O to override an existing run or A to add to it.3620 MSR623 . Work Order This is an optional field. Work Order This is an optional field. Enter a valid cost centre or account code to restrict selection of work orders to those associated with the specified cost centre or account code. All work orders with a total actual cost less than or equal to this cost will be selected for archiving. Enter the Equipment Reference for archiving. Finalise Costing (Y/C/N) This is an optional field. or not finalised respectively. unless they do not meet one of the other selection criteria. This field is left blank when a new run is being created. Reference Date This field is mandatory. © 2009 Mincom . This report can be selected for the processing district or all districts. All work orders with a completed date less than or equal to this date will be selected for archiving. © 2009 Mincom . the Equipment Number on the work order must be related to the productive unit.3620 141 MSR626 . Equipment Number Enter a valid equipment number to check if specific items of equipment have Work Orders that are in backlog.Work Order Backlog Report MSR626 lists open Work Orders with a planned start date earlier than the date on which the report was run. Additional Information Parameters Work Group Enter a valid work group to check for a listing of the work group's backlog. cancelled or closed and are overdue. Productive Unit Enter a valid Productive Unit. If this value is entered. deferred.Work Orders . The report will return all Work Orders for the Productive Units sub-ordinates that are in backlog. This report can be generated at any time. This report can be used to alert maintenance personnel of Work Orders not yet actioned. Substitute Request table file before the report can be printed.Work Order Task .142 Work Orders .XML Work Order Job Card Report MSRXWJ is an XML encoded listing of a job card for either a work order task or for all work order tasks. The output from this report is used in conjunction with a Microsoft Word template to produce a formatted document. © 2009 Mincom . MSRXWJ report is a substitute for MSR621. The data relating to the job card is prefixed and suffixed by XML tags.Job Card. A substitute request must be set up on the SR .3620 MSRXWJ . .....................................Requirements (Work Orders) . 149 Dialog Box ..........................................................................Copy from Parent Standard Job ................................................................................3620 143 Work Orders ............................................................................. 155 Dialog Box .................................................................................................................................... 146 Dialog Box ...........Select Material Requirements ...Start Assignment . 160 Dialog Box .......................................................................Print Work Order Job Cards .........Copy from Parent Work Order .......Maintain System Control File ................................................................Screens Screens Dialog Box ............................. 183 Dialog Box ............................................................ 145 Dialog Box ...... 184 Dialog Box .................................................. 185 Dialog Box .. 168 Dialog Box .......................................Review Standard Text ..... 204 MSE620 ................................................................................. 159 Dialog Box .........................Additional Work Order Selection Parameters ...............................................................................................................Schedule Work ......Modify User Status .....Options (Tools » Options) .. 186 Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 157 Dialog Box .....My Work Orders ...................................................................... 150 Dialog Box .................................... 153 Dialog Box ................................. 182 Dialog Box .... 189 Dialog Box .................. 202 Dialog Box ....................... 171 Dialog Box ..........WO Task Assign To ...Finalise Work Order or Subsystem ...........................................................................................Update Estimates .........................................................................................................Cancel Work Order....................................... 161 Dialog Box .............Options (MSQ620) ................Complete WO Task .................... 148 Dialog Box ..............Maintain Systems Control File (Cont................................................................................Reschedule Tasks ..................................................Reschedule Work Orders .................................................................................................................................... 229 MSM00BA .Work Orders .......................... 164 Dialog Box ...........Work Order Durations .Schedule WO Task ............................. 241 MSM621A .................................... 243 MSM621B ............................................Cancel WO Task...... 238 MSM097A ...... 192 Dialog Box ...........................Copy from Standard Job .................................................Change Status .....................................................................................Modify Modules Installed ....................... 212 MSM001A ........ 198 Dialog Box ........Bulk Reschedule Work Orders .......................................................................Copy Text to Work Order....New Requisition ........... 230 MSM00EA ..Record Work in Progress......................... 154 Dialog Box ..Copy from Existing Work Order ....................................... 170 Dialog Box ......................................................... 158 Dialog Box ...................Complete Work Order ................................................ 172 Dialog Box .............................................................. 181 Dialog Box ..........................................) ...........................................................Work Orders Search.....................................Maintain Work Order Prefix Information ............Reschedule ................................................................. 191 Dialog Box ..............................................................................................Bulk Closure Work Orders ....................Print GIS Map......................................... 200 Dialog Box ............................. 247 © 2009 Mincom .........................Work Order Task ......... 162 Dialog Box ....Review Work Order Information .......... 221 MSM00AA ...............................................Job Instructions ....................Maintain Complete Work Order Information ..................... 211 MSE620 ........................Defer Work Order.................Work Order Assign To ........................... 163 Dialog Box .... 240 MSM620A .................................... 201 Dialog Box ................................. 147 Dialog Box .............................................District Control Information...........Select Material Requirements for a Task................................................................................................................................................................................. 218 MSM001C ............................... 156 Dialog Box ................District Control Information ....................................................................................................................Finish Assignment ................................................... 152 Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .......................... 273 MSM626B .....................................................Maintain Bulk Work Order Code and Duration ...Create Short-form Work Orders for Plant ........ 392 MSQ620 ....................................................................................Work Order Subsystem Finalization ................... 339 MSM62VA ....................................................Modify Work Order .................................Review Work Order ..............................................................Accounting Entry .............................................Create Work Orders from a Std Job Plan Parent Std Job ...........................................................................Create Task Assignments ...................... 279 MSM628A ......... 266 MSM624B ........ 345 MSM62WA ............................Maintain Work Order Task Completion Information .... 288 MSM62DA .............................................................................................. 419 MSQ629 ..............................................Review Work Order ..........Maintain Parent Work Order Information .................................................................Modify Job Duration Information ................Review Work Order Tasks ................................................................................Create/Modify/Delete Incident Logsheet Entries.....................................................144 Work Orders ............Labour Costing Transaction Entry ... 276 MSM627A ......................... 321 MSM62QA ........... 368 MSQ345 .....................................Review Complete Maintenance History ............... 411 MSQ625 ........................................ 253 MSM622B .. 453 MSQ901 ..............Maintain Work Order Billing Information .......for Work Group .............................. 277 MSM627B .................. 358 MSM633A ............................................... 307 MSM62LA ............................................. 300 MSM62IA ........................Bulk Work Order Update Selection . 364 MSQ140 .....Summary ......................Review of Parent Work Orders ...............Parent Work Order ..............Work Orders ........ 436 MSQ695 ........................................................................ 271 MSM626A .......................................Notice .................. 331 MSM62SA ..................................................................... 303 MSM62JA ......... 325 MSM62RA ......... 298 MSM62GA .............. 343 MSM62VB ..............Review Work Order Billing Information ...Create Work Order from Standard Job ..........................Summary of Tasks ............................ 311 MSM62NA ................................................................. 257 MSM622C ................................................. 318 MSM62PA ......................................................................Review Incident Logsheets .......... 431 MSQ62C .............................. 384 MSQ580 .......................................................Review Work Order . 270 MSM625B ..............General Information . 424 MSQ62C ................................................................................ 265 MSM624A .............................................Create Short-form Orders For Equipment ..Requisition..................................................Delete Work Orders .................................. 313 MSM62NB ....................................... 274 MSM626C ................ 267 MSM625A ...................................................... 299 MSM62HA .................................... 354 MSM62YA .................................Review Job Duration Information ...................Create/Maintain Short-form Work Order .............................. 336 MSM62TA ....................................................................................................Summary of Parent Work Orders ....................................................... 309 MSM62MA ......3620 MSM621D ..................................................General Information ...................................................................Create/Maintain Shortform Work Order .......Work Order Task ......... 316 MSM62NC ..................................................................Review Work Order Task Information ......................... 290 MSM62EA ......................... 363 MSM854A ............................Planning Information....... 433 MSQ650 .................. 434 MSQ655 .....Condition Monitoring Set Measurements ..............Maintain Incident Logsheets ....................................................Additional Bulk Work Order Update Selection ....................... 249 MSM622A ........................................Document ......... 262 MSM622D . 305 MSM62KA ...........Search for Task Assignments .........Review Work Order Code/Completion Information ............................................Print Selected Work Orders and/or Tasks .........................................Equipment Tracing .................................................... 460 © 2009 Mincom ................................................Create/Maintain Work Order For Equipment ...........................................Review Parent Work Order Detail .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 347 MSM62XA .............Create/Maintain Incident Work Order.. 295 MSM62FA ............................................Job Estimating ......................................Parent Work Order ...Review Duration Information .....................................................Maintain Equipment Tracing for Work Order ..........................................................................Create/maintain Shortform Work Order .................................... 282 MSM62AA ........................................Job Package ........Review Work Order ............................... 387 MSQ620 ....................... 284 MSM62CB ................Complete Work Order Tasks .................. 297 MSM62FB ................................Review Incident Logsheet Entries.........Review Work Order Materials Status ............... Work Orders .Bulk Closure Work Orders In the Bulk Closure Work Orders dialog box you can close multiple work orders in bulk. The fields on this screen are described below: Completed Date The completed date defaults to today's date. © 2009 Mincom .3620 145 Dialog Box . If no entry is made. Completed By The completed by defaults to the employee ID who will run the bulk closure. Completed Time Enter the time you want the bulk work orders to be closed. Completed Code Enter the completion code. the Closure Time will default to midnight. You can change the date when you want the work orders to be closed. Finish Time Enter the time when the job is rescheduled to finish.Bulk Reschedule Work Orders The Bulk Reschedule Work Orders dialog box enables you to reschedule work orders in bulk. This field is validated against a combination of the assigned Work Group and the Table File CREW Work Group Crew. This date must be later than the start date. Crew The Work Group Crew.146 Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom .3620 Dialog Box . Finish Date Enter the date the job is rescheduled to finish. Work Group Enter the work group to assign to the task you want rescheduled. Start Time Enter the time when the job is rescheduled to start. PLANNED DATES Start Date Enter the date when the job is rescheduled to start. The fields on this screen are described below: ASSIGNMENT Individual Enter the Employee ID you want to assign to the selected Work Order task for rescheduling. The CREW table file entry selected must have an associated value equal to the Assigned Work Group. Ignore Warnings Select this option if you do not want a warning message to display. search and select for the ID of the employee who cancelled the Work Order.Cancel Work Order The Cancel Work Order dialog box enables you to record cancellation information for a Work Order. The fields on this screen are described below: Date Cancelled Enter the date on which work related to this Work Order was cancelled. Time Cancelled Enter the time at which work related to this Work Order was cancelled.Work Orders . Cancelled Code Enter the completion code that signifies the status of cancellation of the work order from the dropdown list. Click the down-arrow to select the date from a calendar. Entry is also validated against the associated value on the SC table file. Entry is mandatory if Date Cancelled is entered. Cancelled By Enter or right-click. they are updated with this date. Entry is validated against Table File SC.3620 147 Dialog Box . If this Work Order has a number of tasks or operations that are not recorded as closed. © 2009 Mincom . Only codes that are specified as valid cancellation codes will be accepted. © 2009 Mincom . Entry is also validated against the associated value on the SC Table File.3620 Dialog Box .Cancel WO Task The Cancel WO Task dialog box enables you to record cancellation information for a Work Order task. search and select the ID of the employee who cancelled the Work Order Task. Cancelled Code Enter the completion code that signifies the status of completion of the Work Order Task or select from the drop-down list. Entry is mandatory if Date Cancelled is entered. Time Cancelled Enter the time when work related to this Work Order Task was cancelled. The fields on this screen are described below: Date Cancelled Enter the date when work related to this Work Order Task was cancelled or select from the drop-down list. Only codes that are specified as valid cancellation codes are accepted. Cancelled By Enter or right-click.148 Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom .Change Status The change status dialog box is used to enter a new task status for all selected task assignments requiring change. The fields on this screen are described below: Assigned Task Status The user-defined task status. Entry is validated against the Table File US .3620 149 Dialog Box .User Defined WO Task Status.Work Orders . For purposes of equipment history. Completed By Enter or right-click. © 2009 Mincom . Entry is mandatory if Date Completed is entered. Completed Code Enter the completion code that signifies the status of completion of the Work Order or select from the drop-down list.150 Work Orders . Paper History Kept Select this option to indicate that the paper history of a job is kept for later review.Complete Work Order The Complete Work Order dialog box enables you to record completion information for a Work Order. this date takes precedence over the date completed to register the cumulative operating statistics of the plant at the time the work was done. Out of Service Date Enter the date when the equipment relating to this Work Order was taken out of service. search and select the ID of the employee who completed the Work Order. Entry is also validated against the associated value on the SC table file. a warning message displays: ‘Warning – Date out of Service is after Date Completed’. Only codes that are specified as valid completion codes will be accepted. If this Work Order has a number of tasks or operations not recorded as closed. Entry is validated against Table File SC . The fields on this screen are described below: Tabs Completion Job Codes Completion tab The fields on this tab are described below: Date Completed Enter the date when work related to this Work Order was completed or select from the drop-down list.Maintenance Completion Status using the arrow button. they are updated with this date. When this date is later than the Date Completed. Time Completed The time when work related to this Work Order was completed.3620 Dialog Box . If no profile is located. Note: Click the icon to display the Dialog Box . you can enter any valid component code.EGI Profile Search to search for component and modifier codes. © 2009 Mincom .Work Orders . its use) is user-specified in Table File XX and appears on the window. the component profile of the group identifier is selected.W9 Table File. Job Codes tab Job Codes Enter the codes required to classify the job.3620 151 Component Code If an item of equipment is entered. but a group identifier is defined for the equipment. and can include such things as: • Failure Codes • Part Defect Codes • Work Classification Codes. The adjacent field displays the description of the code. Refer to the General Module for details about maintaining entries on Table File XX.. Component Modifier Code Enter the component modifier code used to further define the location specified by the component code. Entry is only allowed if an equipment number or reference has been entered. select the code indicating the specific sub-assembly of the work performed.Component Code. The name of each code (i. The adjacent field displays the description of the code. Entry is validated against the Table File CO . If no specific profile is located. Ellipse enables entry of up to 10 codes to classify the work order for analysis purposes. Certain codes are mandatory if that particular code on Table File XX is defined as This field is mandatory. Entry is only valid when a component code has been used. Each entry is validated against the W0 . The use of these codes is user-defined.e. Entry is validated against the Table File MO – Modifier Code. The system checks if this is a valid component for the item of equipment by examining its component profile. Entry is only valid in conjunction with a component code. Time Completed The time when work related to this Work Order Task was completed. Entry is also validated against the associated value on the SC table file Only codes that are specified as valid completion codes are accepted © 2009 Mincom . Entry is validated against Table File SC .152 Work Orders .Complete WO Task The Complete WO Task dialog box enables you to record completion information for a Work Order task. Completed By Enter or right-click. The fields on this screen are described below: Date Completed The date when work related to this Work Order Task was completed. Entry is mandatory if Date Completed is entered.3620 Dialog Box . Completed Code Enter the completion code or select from the drop-down list.Maintenance Completion Status. search and select the ID of the employee who completed the Work Order Task. Copy from Existing Work Order The Copy from Existing Work Order dialog box enables you to enter the number of the existing Work Order and use this as a template to create a new Work Order.Work Orders .3620 153 Dialog Box . © 2009 Mincom . The fields on this screen are described below: Copy Work Order Enter or right-click and search for the Work Order you want to copy. Copy from Parent Standard Job The Copy from Parent Standard Job dialog box enables you to enter the number of the existing Parent Standard Job and use this a reference to create a new Parent Work Order. search and select the Parent Standard job you want to copy.154 Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom . The fields on this screen are described below: Copy Parent Standard Job Enter or right-click.3620 Dialog Box . Copy from Parent Work Order The Copy from Parent Work Order dialog box enables you to enter the number of the existing Parent Work Order and use this a reference to create a new Parent Work Order.3620 155 Dialog Box . © 2009 Mincom . The fields on this screen are described below: Copy Parent Work Order Enter the Parent Work Order you want to copy.Work Orders . Copy from Standard Job In the Copy from Standard Job dialog box you can create a new Job Estimate from a Standard Job. District Code Select the District Code that the Standard Job belongs to from the drop-down list. © 2009 Mincom . The login district will default. The fields on this screen are described below: Standard Job Enter or right-click and search for the identifying number of the Standard Job that you want to copy.156 Work Orders .3620 Dialog Box . from the work request.Work Orders . from the standard job.3620 157 Dialog Box .Copy Text to Work Order This dialog box displays if the Do Not Ask On Create (Default to values above) option is not selected on the Options dialog box. if present. © 2009 Mincom . if present. This option is used to define the preference when extended description is to be copied from the standard job or work request to a work order. Copy Work Request Text (If Present) Select this option to copy the extended description. SELECT TEXT LOCATIONS TO BE INCLUDED INTO EXTENDED TEXT Copy Standard Job Text (If Present) Select this option to copy the extended description. Entry is mandatory if Date Deferred is entered.Defer Work Order The Defer Work Order dialog box enables you to record deferral information for a Work Order.158 Work Orders .Maintenance Completion Status using the arrow button. Time Deferred Enter the time when work related to this Work Order was deferred. Entry is mandatory if Date Deferred is entered. Deferred By Enter or right-click. The fields on this screen are described below: Date Deferred Enter the date when work related to this Work Order was deferred or select from the drop-down list.3620 Dialog Box . Only codes that are specified as valid deferral codes will be accepted. © 2009 Mincom . Entry is also validated against the associated value on the SC table file. Entry is validated against Table File SC . Deferred Code Enter the code that signifies the status of deferral of the Work Order or select from the drop-down list. search and select the ID of the employee who deferred the Work Order. 3620 159 Dialog Box . Labour Costing Select this option to finalise the Labour Costing subsystem. General Ledger Select this option to finalise the General Ledger subsystem.Work Orders . Note: If you select Final Costs option all Finalise SubSystems options are also selected. © 2009 Mincom . Production Statistics Select this option to finalise the Production Statistics subsystem. The fields on this screen are described below: Final Costs Select this option to finalise all subsystem costs for this Work Order. Payroll Select this option to finalise the Payroll subsystem. Accounts Payable Select this option to finalise the Accounts Payable subsystem. FINALISE SUBSYSTEMS Supply Select this option to finalise the Supply subsystem. Accounts Receivable Select this option to finalise the Accounts Receivable subsystem.Finalise Work Order or Subsystem The Finalise Work Order or Subsystem dialog box enables you to finalise costs. Journal Holding Select this option to finalise the Journal Holding subsystem. The fields on this screen are described below: Actual Finish Date Enter the actual finish date the work order task is to be completed.User Defined WO Task Status. Entry is validated against the Table File US .3620 Dialog Box .Finish Assignment The finish assignment dialog box is used to enter the actual finish date and actual finish time the work order task is completed. © 2009 Mincom . Assigned Task Status The user-defined task status. Actual Finish Time Enter the actual finish time the work order task is to be completed.160 Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom .Work Orders . The fields on this screen are described below: Text Box Enter descriptive information relating to the Job Instructions.Job Instructions In the Job Instructions window you can view or enter standard text in the entry field that displays.3620 161 Dialog Box . 3620 Dialog Box .Modify User Status In the Modify User Status dialog box you can select User Status from the list of codes displayed.162 Work Orders . The fields on this screen are described below: User Status Select the User Status from the drop-down list. The codes which display are user defined and are contained in the WS table file. © 2009 Mincom . or if the item is not normally held in the warehouse. Alternatively. Select the type of requisition you want created for this work order requirement. you can allow Mincom Ellipse to automatically allocate a requisition number. Credit Select this option if a credit requisition is required. A credit requisition is used when unused material is returned to the Warehouse and the Work Order is credited for the cost.New Requisition In the New Requisition dialog box you can begin the Requisition process by selecting a requisition type and allocating a requisition number. The issue requisition number entered must not already exist. The fields on this screen are described below: Issue Requisition Number Enter the requisition number or leave this field blank to allow Ellipse to automatically assign a requisition number based on the type of requisition being created. Loan Select this option if a loan requisition is required. A purchase requisition is used when the materials need to be purchased directly from a supplier as not to deplete stock. Purchase Select this option if a purchase requisition is required. REQUISITION TYPE A selection in this field group is mandatory. The purchase requisition number selected must not already exist. Normal Select this option if a normal requisition is required. © 2009 Mincom . Purchase Requisition Number Enter the requisition number or leave this field blank to allow Ellipse to automatically assign a requisition number based on the type of requisition being created. A loan requisition is used when the material being requisitioned is returned after the job is finished.3620 163 Dialog Box . A normal requisition is used when the item is in stock and is issued from the warehouse.Work Orders . an application can offer additional options for one or more application-specific operations. when you © 2009 Mincom . Tabs • Views • Messages • Timeout • Settings • Appearance • Work Order Defaults • Create Views tab Use this tab to select which screen view displays for the search facility. Application-specific preferences are described in the help for the application. and toolbar icons • for specific applications Standard options are available in all Mincom Ellipse applications. The search or detail screens display different options from the list.164 Work Orders .Options (MSQ620) Use this screen to maintain options for: • selecting different views • displaying messages • the timeout period • the title bar display • the polling period • auto-save settings and auto-close settings • the appearance of font. The fields on this tab are described below: STARTUP VIEWS Search View Select this option to start the application in Search view. For example. colour. in the Notice Manager application. The search screen displays when you open the application.3620 Dialog Box . information and select screens. however. The search screen available in Mincom Ellipse ObjectGUI applications provides a comprehensive search system for locating records stored in the Mincom Ellipse database. the Options dialog box provides an additional tab that contains preferences for sending notice reports. For example. There are two sets of standard options displayed for Mincom Ellipse applications. review and modify objects from the detail screen. if you are viewing details of one employee record and open another record. After the record displays in the search window you can open it to view the details. Messages tab Use this tab to select the type of messages to display and whether these messages display automatically at start up. DETAIL VIEWS Reuse Window for each Detail View Select this option if you want to reuse the current detail view for each subsequent detail view. You can choose to hide these messages directly from the Dialog Box . You can use the search screen to search and select an entry for a field.Work Orders . The Detail screen displays when you open the application. Open details view when only one match found Select this option to open the detail search screen when one search result is returned. the details of the first record are replaced by the second record. The fields on this tab are described below: Show Messages at Startup Select this option to display messages automatically when you start certain Mincom Ellipse applications. SEARCH VIEWS Apply Defaults on New Search Select this option to apply the defaults selected when conducting a new search. For example. For example. The Detail screen is the primary window in an ObjectGUI application for: • displaying and maintaining an existing object • creating a new object • You can create. © 2009 Mincom . Therefore.Startup Message for <Program Name> by selecting the Hide Startup Messages in the Future option.3620 165 want to modify a record you can use the search window to find the record. These messages provide brief overviews of the accessed application. Detail View Select this option to start the application in Detail view. the second record opens in a different Detail screen. You only have one detail window open and it displays details of the second record. New Window for each Detail View Select this option if you want to use a new screen for each detail view. you have two detail screens open and they display details of different employees. The search screen is also frequently available from a field. Selecting this option means that you can have details of more than one object displayed. if you have an employee record displayed in a detail window and you open a second record. closures. Show Broadcast Message Select this option to allow Mincom Ellipse to display broadcast messages from the Host Machine as they occur. TYPES Select this option to enter a maintenance type or work order type for the work order. and generally display in dialog boxes. These are messages sent by the Administrator to all users. These are messages produced by the back-end. They advise of system problems. © 2009 Mincom .166 Work Orders . Timeout tab The fields on this tab are described below: Timeout Period This field displays the Mincom Ellipse timeout period. Mincom Ellipse will wait for a reply from a program for this length of time before returning a timeout error.3620 Show TP Messages Select this option to allow Mincom Ellipse to display transaction processing messages from the host machine as they occur. updates or the need for users to log off for a period of time. Appearance tab The fields on this tab are described below: USE APPEARANCE Use Appearance Enter the default appearance for Mincom Ellipse from the drop-down list. indicating processes occurring and errors encountered. Settings tab The fields on this tab are described below: AUTOSAVE Save Settings on Form Close Select this option to automatically save the Mincom Desktop size and position when the application is closed. Available options are: • Default XP • Default Classic Work Order Defaults tab The fields on this tab are described below: STANDARD JOB Standard Job Select the standard job option and enter the number of the standard job. Copy Work Request Text (If Present) Select this option to copy the extended description. Create tab The fields on this tab are described below: CREATE FROM WORK REQUEST In this field group. if present. If not selected. Do Not Ask On Create (Default to values above) Select this option to automatically copy standard job or work request text when you create a work order from a work request. a message Copy Text to Work Order displays where you are required to select the text options to be copied for each work order created.3620 167 Maintenance Type Enter the maintenance type code for the work order. the Copy from Standard Job and Work Request Text options the work order will contain both the extended descriptions. Work Order Type Enter the work order type code for the work order. Work Group Enter the work group relating to the work order. The standard job option will override this selection. from the standard job. Automatically Create Single Task Select this option if you want a single task to be created for a work order. from the work request. © 2009 Mincom .Work Orders . if present. Copy Standard Job Text (If Present) Select this option to copy the extended description. Doc Name (Document Name) Enter a name for the map document. Print Options Select this option to print the GIS map. The fields on this screen are described below: OUTPUT MODE Bitmap Select this option to save the GIS map.Document Electronic Type. © 2009 Mincom . If this option is selected. If this option is selected. Doc Prefix (Document Prefix) Enter a prefix for the document number. BITMAP FILE The fields in this group are active only if the Bitmap option is selected.3620 Dialog Box . Link to Document System Select this option to create a new document in the Document Management module. File Type Enter the type of file the map is to be saved as. all the fields in the Document Management field group must be completed. Directory Enter or select the drive and directory to save the map in. DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT The fields in this group are active only if the Link to Document System option is selected. all the fields in the Bitmap File field group must be completed. Filename Enter a name for the map file. Entries in this field are validated against the Table File DOET .168 Work Orders .Print GIS Map This dialog box is used to print or save a Geographical Works Management (GIS) map. Document Types. Entries in this field are validated against the Table File DO .Work Orders .3620 169 Doc Type (Document Type) Enter the document type. © 2009 Mincom . If the assignee has no default address the logged in users default email address defaults and if this user has no default this field is left blank.170 Work Orders . Select the fax option to change the fax number. Fax The fax number of the employee.Print Work Order Job Cards Use this dialog box to print work order job cards.3620 Dialog Box . If the assignee has no default fax number the logged in users default fax number defaults and if this user has no default this field is left blank. © 2009 Mincom . if required. This field defaults from the Assigned to employee on the work order. if required. The fields on this screen are described below: Printer The default printer of the user where the job cards are to print. This default defaults from the assigned to employee on the work order. Select another printer ID from the dropdown list. Email The email address of the employee. The description of the printer also displays. The fields on this screen are described below: Units Complete A number from 1 to 9999999. for example 50 for 50%.Record Work in Progress The Record Work in Progress dialog box enables you to enter the number or percent of work completed to date for a Work Order.Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom .99 indicating the number of units of work completed to date.3620 171 Dialog Box . Percent Complete The percentage of units completed to date. Material requirements are recorded in the Details and Costs tabs. The information recorded in these two tabs display in the summary grid. Equipment and Resource requirements for a Work Order. Refer to the Details and Costs tab for a description of this information. © 2009 Mincom .172 Work Orders . This field displays the description of the work order. Work Order Desc. The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order This field displays the work order number.Requirements (Work Orders) The Work Order Requirements dialog box enables you to record Material. Details tab When recording a materials requirement for a work order item the Details tab is used to store details of a required item(s). District Code This field displays the district for the work order raised.3620 Dialog Box . The fields on this tab are described below: MATERIAL TYPE Select the material type option that you want to record details of an item. Tabs • • • Materials • Details • Costs Equipment • Details • Costs Resources • Details • Costs Materials tab In the Materials tab you can review material requirements for a work order. either catalogued or noncatalogued. The item information you record displays in the summary grid on the Materials tab. the following fields are available: • Stock Code • Part Number • Mnemonic Non Catalogued Select this option if the material type of the item is not held on the Ellipse catalogue. Description Enter a description of the part required for the selected work order item. If catalogued is the selected option. If the stock code is unknown. If the item required is not catalogued. The item of material required is identified by a unique stock code assigned by Ellipse. the following three fields are available: • Part Number • Mnemonic • Description The Stock Code field is not available with the non catalogued option. This field is available when Catalogued is the selected material type option. it does not have a stock code. If non-catalogued is the selected option. The part number is used in conjunction with the mnemonic to identify the material required.3620 173 Catalogued Select this option if the material type of the item is held on the Ellipse catalogue. Qty Requisitioned (Quantity Requisitioned) The quantity to be requisitioned. Normally.Work Orders . Mnemonic Select the mnemonic required for the material from the drop-down list. © 2009 Mincom . Stock Code Enter the stock code of the material required for the selected work order item and operation type. Part Number Enter the part number of the material required for the selected work order item and operation type. Government regulations could require competitive prices to be sought. Multiple prices can be sought and compared. right-click and search. the lowest priced option is selected at the time of requisitioning. Contestable Indicates if the item is contestable. If the system rate is selected as the costing method. The costing information recorded displays in the summary grid on the Materials tab. the entry for the Item Price field is generated by the system. This option relies on the costing information being available in the system. if the system rate is selected as the costing method. Fixed Amount Enter a fixed amount.174 Work Orders .3620 Costs tab When recording a materials requirement. the entry for this field is generated by the system. specific fields are available for you to enter details. The fields on this tab are described below: PRICE COSTING METHOD When you select a costing method option. The total price is calculated from the quantity recorded and the system rates. The Qty Reqd and UOM is not factored into the total. Manual Rate Select this option to select the manual costing method. the Rate Amount and Fixed Amount fields are not available. When this option is selected the Qty Rqd. © 2009 Mincom . The fixed amount indicates that the estimated costs are fixed at a certain rate regardless of the other criteria set on the Costs tab. UOM and Item Price fields are available for entry. When this option is selected. Contractor Supplied The contractor supplied option is selected if a contractor has been created on a compatible unit that is being included in a job estimate. Fixed Amount Select this option to select the fixed amount costing method. The total is automatically calculated from the entries in these fields. System Rate Select this option to select the system rate costing method. The fixed amount displays on the Materials tab in the summary grid. UOM and Fixed Amount fields are available for entry. Item Price Enter the item price if the manual rate is selected as the costing method. If the system rate is selected as the costing method. The total of a fixed amount is calculated directly from the Fixed Amount field. this tab provides for recording the costs of the item(s) specified on the Details tab. The item price displays on the Materials tab in the summary grid. When this option is selected the Qty Reqd. Total This field displays the total calculated by the system from the Qty and Price fields. This field will not display if the fixed amount costing method is selected. This field defaults in the summary grid on the Materials tab.Work Orders . This field defaults in the summary grid on the Materials tab. The item information recorded displays in the summary grid on the Equipment tab. Equipment tab In the Equipment tab you can create and review equipment requirements for a work order. then the UOM must match the catalogue item entry. This field is automatically populated with the catalogued items UOM by entering the Stock Code on the Details tab and then clicking the Show button. The equipment type is used during the planning process to match available items from the equipment register belonging to the same type. only if the System Rate or Manual Rate costing methods are selected. Qty (Quantity) This field displays the quantity entered in the Qty Reqd field. If the material item listed is catalogued. © 2009 Mincom .3620 175 QTY Qty Reqd Enter the required quantity of the item specified on the Materials tab. A summary grid contains the information recorded on the Details and Costs tabs. Refer to the Details and Costs tabs for a description of this information. the Details tab is used to store details of a required item(s). Specification of this quantity requires an entry in the UOM field. If the Fixed Amount costing method is selected. The fields on this tab are described below: Equipment Type Select an equipment type from the drop-down list. this field defaults from the Fixed Amount field. Details tab When recording an equipment requirement for a work order item. UOM (Unit of Measure) Enter the unit of measure (UOM) for the Qty Reqd field entry. Price This field displays the item price entered in the Item Price field if either the system rate or manual rate costing methods are selected. Normally. When this option is selected the Qty Rqd. Fleet Size and UOM fields are available for entry. this tab provides for recording the costs of the item(s) specified on the Details tab. When this option is selected the Qty Reqd. UOM and Fixed Amount fields are available for entry. Costs tab When recording an equipment requirement. Government regulations could require competitive prices to be sought. Multiple prices can be sought and compared. System Rate Select this option to choose the System Rate costing method. The fixed amount indicates that the estimated costs are fixed at a certain rate regardless of the other criteria set on the Costs tab. specific fields are available for you to enter details. Fixed Amount Select this option to select the fixed amount costing method. the lowest priced option is selected at the time of requisitioning. Note: The WRKC . Contestable Indicates if the item is contestable. Conditions are used in the job estimating application to weight equipment and resource requirement costs. Condition Type Select a condition type from the drop-down list.176 Work Orders . The costing information recorded displays in the summary grid on the Equipment tab. The total of a fixed amount is calculated directly from the Fixed Amount field. © 2009 Mincom . When this option is selected the Qty Reqd.Work Condition (Equip Type or Resc Code/Cond Type) associated values are used to apply the multiplying factors to the requirements. The total is automatically calculated from the entries in these fields.3620 The equipment type defaults in the Equipment tab grid. The equipment type defaults in the Equipment tab grid. This table must be configured prior to applying the condition type factors. UOM and Item Price fields are available for entry. The total is automatically generated by the information in the three fields. The entry for the Rate Amount field is generated from the Table File EF – Equipment Factor (District Code/Equipment Type/UOM). The condition type is primarily for requirements information. The system rate option relies on the costing information being available in the system. The fields on this tab are described below: PRICE COSTING METHOD When you select a costing method option. Manual Rate Select this option to select the manual costing method. you also need to enter a unit of measure in the UOM field. This field defaults in the summary grid on the Equipment tab. This field does not display if the fixed amount costing method is selected. Price This field displays the price from the Rate Amount field if either the system rate or manual rate costing methods are selected. If the system rate is selected as the costing method. This field defaults in the summary grid on the Equipment tab. This field is only available if the fixed amount option is selected as the costing method. If left blank. Qty (Quantity) This field displays the quantity entered in the Qty Reqd field. The rate amount is the cost of hiring or using items of equipment for the job.3620 177 Rate Amount Enter the rate amount if the manual rate is selected as the costing method. this field defaults to one. the entry for the Rate Amount field is generated by the system if an equipment hire rate is available for the equipment type selected. © 2009 Mincom . If you enter a quantity. The fleet size is the number of items of the selected equipment making up a fleet. if required.Work Orders . This field defaults in the summary grid on the Equipment tab. QTY Qty Reqd (Quantity Required) Enter the required quantity of the item specified on the Equipment tab. Contractor Supplied The contractor supplied option is selected if a contractor has been created on a compatible unit that is being included in a job estimate. UOM (Unit Of Measure) Enter the unit of measure (UOM) for the Qty Reqd field entry. This field is for information only and is not included in the total cost calculation. Fleet Size Enter the fleet size. Fixed Amount Enter the total cost for this equipment line item requirement regardless of the Quantity Reqd and Fleet Size entered. If the resource code is not known. Resource requirements assist the planner in assessing which employee is qualified to do the job based on their skills. Resource Code Select the resource code from the drop-down list. qualifications and other accomplishments.178 Work Orders . If the Fixed Amount costing method is selected. Details tab When recording a resource requirement for a work order item the Details tab is used to store details of a required item(s). The costing information recorded displays in the summary grid on the Resources tab. © 2009 Mincom . Entry is validated against the Table File COND . Refer to the Details and Costs tabs for a description of this information. right-click and search using MSQ732 for a resource code. Condition Type Select the Condition Type from the drop-down list. specific fields are available for you to enter details. The resource class selected dictates which list of resource codes are available. this tab provides for recording the costs of the item(s) specified on the Details tab. This field defaults in the summary grid on the Resources tab. A summary grid contains the information recorded on the Details and Costs tabs. this field defaults from the Fixed Amount field. This field defaults in the summary grid on the Resources tab. The resource code is validated against the resource class. Costs tab When recording a resource requirement. The fields on this tab are described below: PRICE COSTING METHOD When you select a costing method option. System Rate Select this option to select the system rate costing method. The item information you record displays in the summary grid on the Resources tab. only if the System Rate or Manual Rate costing methods are selected. The fields on this tab are described below: Resource Class Select the resource class from the drop-down list. Resources tab In the Resources tab you can review resource requirements for a work order.Condition Type.3620 Total This field displays the total calculated by the system from the Qty and Price fields. The entry for the Rate Amount field is generated from the system. Use Default District Labour Rates Select this option to use the default labour rates for the resource requirement cost. If the System Rate is selected as the Costing Method. Contractor Supplied The contractor supplied option is selected if a contractor has been created on a compatible unit that is being included in a job estimate. The crew size is primarily for information only.Work Orders . Fixed Amount Select this option to select the fixed amount costing method. Manual Rate Select this option to select the manual rate costing method. It will not factor in to the Total cost calculation. When this option is selected the Rate Amount. PRICE Rate Amount Enter the Rate Amount if the Manual Rate is selected as the Costing Method. Fixed Amount Enter the fixed amount. An entry must be recorded in each field. The total is automatically generated from the entries in the three fields.3620 179 The system rate option relies on the costing information available in the system. This includes all hours required from this resource type whether it be from one or many employees. When this option is selected the Fixed Amount. QTY Gross Hrs Reqd (Gross Hours Required) Enter the gross hours required for this resource type. © 2009 Mincom . Gross Hrs Reqd and Crew Size fields are available for entry. Gross Hrs Reqd and Crew Size fields are available for entry. This field defaults in the summary grid on the Resources tab. then the gross hours required are recorded as 40. if two resources of one type are required for 20 hours each. For example. This field is only available if Fixed Amount is selected as the Costing Method. Crew Size Enter the crew size. the entry for the Rate Amount field is generated by Ellipse. When this option is selected the Gross Hrs Reqd and Crew Size fields are available for entry. The total is automatically calculated from the entries in the three fields. this field defaults from the Fixed Amount field. only if the System Rate or Manual Rate costing methods are selected. Price This field displays the item price entered in the Item Price field if either the system rate or manual rate costing methods are selected. Total This field displays the total calculated by the system from the Qty and Price fields. Qty (Quantity) This field defaults from the Qty Reqd field.180 Work Orders . If the Fixed Amount costing method is selected. © 2009 Mincom .3620 This field defaults in the summary grid on the Resources tab. This field will not display if the fixed amount costing method is selected. Assigned Task Status The user-defined task status.User Defined WO Task Status. Assigned Finish Time Enter the finish time assigned to the crew or individual to reschedule the task. The fields on this screen are described below: Assigned Start Date Enter the start date assigned to the crew or individual to reschedule the task. Assigned Finish Date Enter the finish date assigned to the crew or individual to reschedule the task.Work Orders . Assigned Finish Time Enter the start time assigned to the crew or individual to reschedule the task.3620 181 Dialog Box . Entry is validated against the Table File US .Reschedule The Reschedule dialog box is used to modify the assigned start and finish dates and times of task assignments. © 2009 Mincom . Start Time Enter the time when the job is rescheduled to start.Reschedule Tasks The Reschedule Tasks dialog box enables you to reschedule planned dates for work order tasks. © 2009 Mincom . Ignore Warning Select this option if you do not want a warning message to display.182 Work Orders . The fields on this screen are described below: ASSIGNMENT GROUP Individual Enter the Employee ID you want to assign to the selected Work Order task for rescheduling. Crew Enter the crew you want to assign to the selected work order task for rescheduling. Finish Time Enter the time when the job is rescheduled to finish. Finish Date Enter the date the job is rescheduled to finish.3620 Dialog Box . Work Group Enter the work group you want to assign to the task for rescheduling. PLANNED DATES Start Date Enter the date when the job is rescheduled to start. This date must be later than the start date. The CREW table file entry selected must have an associated value equal to the Assigned Work Group. Start Time Enter the new start time for the job. Start Date Enter the new start date for the job. The fields on this screen are described below: Individual Enter the Employee ID of the person who will be assigned to the work order to reschedule. Crew The Work Group Crew.Reschedule Work Orders The Reschedule Work Orders dialog box enables you to reschedule planned dates for work orders.3620 183 Dialog Box . Finish Time Enter the new finish time for the job. Work Group Enter the work group to assign to the job you want to reschedule. This field is validated against a combination of the assigned Work Group and the Table File CREW Work Group Crew.Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom . This date must be later than the start date. Ignore Warnings Select this option if you do not want warning messages to display. Finish Date Enter the new end date for the job. 3620 Dialog Box . The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order The Work Order number that will be charged for the cost of materials on this requisition. © 2009 Mincom . The Materials Requirements need to have been created and saved on the Work Order before they will appear on the Select Material Requirements dialog box. Qty to Requisition (Quantity to Requisition) This field displays quantity of the material item that will be included on this requisition and defaults from the material requirements. Original Warehouse Enter the Warehouse that the material will be issued from.Warehouse Identification. This can be changed by selecting the drop-down menu and selecting a new warehouse. This dialog box has general information at the top that needs to be completed and then has a grid that shows all of the material requirements from the Work Order that can be included on this requisition. Material requirements that have already been requisitioned will not display in the dialog box. This field is validated against the Table File IG . This field is validated against the Table File WH .Select Material Requirements In the Select Material Requirements dialog box you can select material requirements from a Work Order to create a Requisition.184 Work Orders .Inventory Category. The Warehouse will initially default to the districts home Warehouse. Date Required By The date the materials are required. select the category of the inventory to be requisitioned. Inventory Category If the materials should be selected from a specific category. select the category of the inventory to be requisitioned. Validated on the WH table file. Qty to Requisition This number will default from the material requirements. This dialog box has general information at the top that needs to be completed and then has a grid that shows all of the material requirements from the Work Order Task that can be included on this requisition.3620 185 Dialog Box . WO Task The Work Order Task number that will be charged for the cost of materials on this requisition. The Warehouse will initially default to the district's home Warehouse. The Materials Requirements need to have been created and saved on the Work Order Task before they will appear on the Select Material Requirements dialog box. Date Required By The date the materials are required.Work Orders . This can be changed by selecting the drop-down menu and selecting a new warehouse. It is the quantity of the material item that will be included on this requisition Original Warehouse The Warehouse that the material will be issued from. © 2009 Mincom . Inventory Category If the materials should be selected from a specific category.Select Material Requirements for a Task In the Select Material Requirements for a Task dialog box you can select material requirements from a Work Order Task to create a Requisition. The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order The Work Order number that will be charged for the cost of materials on this requisition. Material requirements that have already been requisitioned will not appear in the dialog box. Statistics are used if the work is to be undertaken as a result of a piece of equipment reaching an operational milestone. SHUTDOWN DETAIL Number Enter the shutdown number. The shutdown record must already exist in order to plan a Work Order. If planned dates are used. The type defaults from the shutdown record if the shutdown number is entered. The Shutdown number indicates the Planned Start date for the Work Order. The fields on this screen are described below: SCHEDULE TYPE Select one of the following options: Shutdown Details Select this option to schedule work using shutdown data. Type Select the shutdown type from the drop-down list.3620 Dialog Box . This allows the Work Order to be brought automatically into a forecasted schedule when the plan date falls within the forecast range and the MSB700 . activity Schedule Single or Multiple Work Orders. or by linking to a known shutdown. the Work Order is added to the schedule based on calendar days and time.186 Work Orders . A shutdown schedule must already exist for this Work Order to be included.forecast batch process is run.Schedule Work The Schedule Work dialog box is a very important area as it enables you to schedule work and therefore define how the work will be handled in the planning process. Equipment Reference Enter the reference number of the equipment to be shut down PLAN DATES © 2009 Mincom . If a shutdown is used for scheduling. the Work Order displays as part of the Shutdown work to be done. This dialog box is used to schedule work in the Job Dispatch module. Statistics Select this option to schedule work using statistics. Plan Dates Select this option to schedule work using planned dates. Work can be scheduled based on a date or statistic. Must Start Indicator Select this option if it is a requirement for the job to start on the plan start date. otherwise an error or warning message displays when the date is changed. This field is only available if the Must Start Indicator is selected STATISTIC © 2009 Mincom . the Crew Code displays in this field. Error Select this option if you want an error message to display whenever there is a change to the plan start date. the Work Order Planned Start Time defaults as the Work Planned Start Time on the notice. Plan Finish Date Enter the date the job is planned to finish. Plan Finish Time Enter the time when the job is to finish. Crew Description The Crew name defaults from the Crew Code. Crew If the Work Order has already been assigned to a Crew. the Work Order Planned Finish Date defaults as the Work Planned Finish Date on the notice. When the Work Order is associated with a Work/Daily Whereabouts Notice. the Work Order Planned Start Date defaults as the Work Planned Start Date on the notice. When the Work Order is associated with a Work/Daily Whereabouts Notice. This field is only available if the Must Start Indicator is selected Warning Select this option if you want a warning message to display whenever there is a change to the plan start date. the Work Order Planned Finish Time defaults as the Work Planned Finish Time on the notice. When the Work Order is associated with a Work/Daily Whereabouts Notice.Work Orders . When the Work Order is associated with a Work/Daily Whereabouts Notice. Plan Start Time Enter the time when the job is to start. This date must be later than the planned start date.3620 187 Plan Start Date Enter the date when the job is to start. Entry is validated against the Table File SS . Value Enter the operating statistic value of the equipment when the job should start for example 10 000 (hrs) and 50 000 (km). hrs. km).188 Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom .3620 Type Select the operating statistic type of the equipment when the job should start from the drop-down list (for example.Operating Statistic Type. The new estimated duration hours is calculated from the original estimated duration divided by the original manual effort. Est. Man Effort (Manual Effort) The total effort allocated to a work order task to increase/decrease the estimated duration hours. Planned Start Time The time when the job is to start. This date must be later than the planned start date. If the Manual Effort field value is modified the finish time is recalculated. © 2009 Mincom . When the Manual Effort field value is modified a new estimated duration is recalculated based on the new manual effort. When the manual effort value is modified the Estimated Duration Hours field is recalculated based on the new manual effort value. If the Manual Effort field value is modified this date is recalculated.3620 189 Dialog Box . Offset Days The number of days by which the planned date of this task should lag behind the work order header planned start date. then multiplied by the results of the new manual effort value.Schedule WO Task The Schedule Work Order Task dialog box enables you to schedule the selected work order task by entering planned start. Planned Finish Time The time when the job is planned to finish. Planned Finish Date The date when the job is planned to finish. finish and duration details.Work Orders . The new estimated duration is calculated from the original estimated duration divided by the original manual effort. then multiplied by the results of the new manual effort value. Duration Hours The estimated duration time in hours. The fields on this screen are described below: Planned Start Date The date when the job is to start. The Planned Finish Date and Planned Finish Time fields are also recalculated. © 2009 Mincom . Warning Select this option if you want a warning message to display for you to confirm changes made to the planned start date on the Work Order task before saving.190 Work Orders . Error Select this option if you want an error message that prevents changes to the planned start date on the Work Order task before saving. otherwise an error or warning message displays when the date is changed.3620 Must Start Indicator Select this option when you want the job to start on the planned start date. Entry is validated against the Table File US .Start Assignment This dialog box allows you to enter an actual start date.User Defined WO Task Status. Actual Start Time Enter the actual start time the crew or individual was assigned to a work order task. © 2009 Mincom .Work Orders . The fields on this screen are described below: Actual Start Date Enter the actual start date the crew or individual is assigned to a work order task. Assigned Task Status The user-defined task status. You can use the calendar to select the date. start time and assign a status to the task assignment.3620 191 Dialog Box . Options (Tools » Options) Use this screen to maintain options for: • selecting different views • displaying messages • the timeout period • the title bar display • the polling period • auto-save settings and auto-close settings • the appearance of font. the Options dialog box provides an additional tab that contains preferences for sending notice reports. For example. For example. © 2009 Mincom . Tabs • Views • Messages • Timeout • Settings • Appearance • Display • Filter Views tab Use this tab to select which screen view displays for the search facility. The fields on this tab are described below: STARTUP VIEWS Reuse Window for each Detail View Select this option if you want to reuse the current detail view for each subsequent detail view. information and select screens. however.3620 Dialog Box . the details of the first record are replaced by the second record. if you have an employee record displayed in a detail window and you open a second record. There are two sets of standard options displayed for Mincom Ellipse applications.192 Work Orders . an application can offer additional options for one or more application-specific operations. and toolbar icons • for specific applications Standard options are available in all Mincom Ellipse applications. The search or detail screens display different options from the list. Application-specific preferences are described in the help for the application. colour. in the Notice Manager application. You only have one detail window open and it displays details of the second record. For example. You only have one detail window open and it displays details of the second record. DETAIL VIEWS Reuse Window for each Detail View Select this option if you want to reuse the current detail view for each subsequent detail view. the details of the first record are replaced by the second record. you have two detail screens open and they display details of different employees. Reuse Window for each Detail View Select this option if you want to use a new screen for each detail view. New Window for each Detail View Select this option if you want to use a new screen for each detail view. For example. if you are viewing details of one employee record and open another record. For example. if you are viewing details of one employee record and open another record. MULTIPE SHIFT DETAIL VIEW Reuse Window for each Detail View Select this option if you want to reuse the current detail view for each subsequent detail view. You only have one detail window open and it displays details of the second record.3620 193 New Window for each Detail View Select this option if you want to use a new screen for each detail view. if you are viewing details of one employee record and open another record. Therefore. SEARCH VIEWS © 2009 Mincom . For example. You only have one detail window open and it displays details of the second record. SINGLE SHIFT DETAIL VIEWS Reuse Window for each Detail View Select this option if you want to reuse the current detail view for each subsequent detail view. For example. you have two detail screens open and they display details of different employees. if you are viewing details of one employee record and open another record. Selecting this option means that you can have details of more than one object displayed. the second record opens in a different Detail screen. the second record opens in a different Detail screen. Therefore. Therefore. the details of the first record are replaced by the second record. For example. if you have an employee record displayed in a detail window and you open a second record. you have two detail screens open and they display details of different employees. For example. New Window for each Detail View Select this option if you want to use a new screen for each detail view. if you have an employee record displayed in a detail window and you open a second record.Work Orders . Therefore. if you have an employee record displayed in a detail window and you open a second record. you have two detail screens open and they display details of different employees. the second record opens in a different Detail screen. the second record opens in a different Detail screen. Selecting this option means that you can have details of more than one object displayed. Selecting this option means that you can have details of more than one object displayed. Selecting this option means that you can have details of more than one object displayed. the details of the first record are replaced by the second record. These are messages produced by the back-end. indicating processes occurring and errors encountered. Show TP Messages Select this option to allow Mincom Ellipse to display transaction processing messages from the host machine as they occur. The fields on this tab are described below: AUTOSAVE © 2009 Mincom . Open details view when only one match found Select this option to open the detail search screen when one search result is returned. and generally display in dialog boxes. Show Broadcast Messages Select this option to allow Mincom Ellipse to display broadcast messages from the Host Machine as they occur. Messages tab Use this tab to select the type of messages to display and whether these messages display automatically at start up. You can also select which default search displays.3620 Apply Defaults on New Search Select this option to apply the defaults selected when conducting a new search. the program displays the Dialog Box . The fields on this tab are described below: Timeout Period (Secs. Settings tab Use this tab to set auto-save and auto-close behaviour for Mincom Ellipse.) This field displays the Mincom Ellipse timeout period. You can choose to hide these messages directly from the Dialog Box . Mincom Ellipse will wait for a reply from a program for this length of time before returning a timeout error. These messages provide brief overviews of the accessed application.Startup Message for <Program Name> by selecting the Hide Startup Messages in the Future option.194 Work Orders . Timeout tab Use this tab to set the timeout period for an individual application or a group of applications. updates or the need for users to log off for a period of time. The timeout period is the time an application will wait for a response when a request for data is sent to the server. They advise of system problems. The fields on this tab are described below: Show Messages at Startup Select this option to display messages automatically when you start certain Mincom Ellipse applications. closures. These are messages sent by the Administrator to all users.Timeout. Once the timeout period is up. The fields on this tab are described below: SHIFT TYPE COLOR A list of all possible shift types and their corresponding shift type codes display in the drop-down list. A colour chart displays where you can select the colour.Equipment • MSQ620 . Revert or Reset Default buttons. Each entry displays using the same colours used in the Employee Availability Search screen.Work Requests Appearance tab The fields displayed on this tab depend on various applications. not the current block of 20. This option only displays for the following programs if the Geospatial Works Management module is installed: • MSQ600 . DEFAULT SEARCH These options only displays if you have the Maintenance module installed. select the shift type from the drop-down list and use the Colour. Display tab Use this tab to set the appearance of screen elements for Mincom Ellipse. If not selected. GIS OPTIONS Bring GIS To Front Select this option to display the Geographical Information System (GIS) map in front of other programs when locating GIS features. Revert or Default buttons.Work Orders • MSQ541 . Font Colour.Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom . To modify the colours for a specific shift type.3620 195 Save Settings On Form Close Select this option to automatically save the Mincom Desktop size and position when the application is closed. Font Colour. Retrieve All Select this option if you want Mincom Ellipse to return all search results. Select either Colour. AUTOCLOSE Close Launched Applications on Mincom Desktop Exit Select this option to automatically close any launched applications when you exit the Mincom Desktop. Work Order Task Select this option if you want the work order task search screen to display. the work order search screen defaults. Revert Reverts the colour back to the default colour. Work Code Selection of this option results in work code for the employee for each day to display on the Employee Availability Search screen. Employee Name Selection of this option results in the details on the Employee Availability Search screen to display in employee last name order. The options selected display on the MSQEAV . Font Colour This button displays a dialog box allowing the selection of the text colour to be used when displaying shifts of the specified shift type. Shift Class Select this option to Indicate which watch or shift the activity is refering to. DISPLAY DETAIL Select the type of shift detail option you want displayed on the summary screen. All colour changes made since the time the Options dialog display are discarded. Resource Type Selection of this option results in the primary resource type for the employee to display for each day on the Employee Availability Search screen. This is the default. © 2009 Mincom .196 Work Orders . Shift Description Selection of this options results in the description of the shift for the employee for each day to display on the Employee Availability Search screen.3620 Colour button This button displays a dialog box allowing selection of the background colour to be used when displaying shifts of the specified shift type.Search for Resource Availability. B watch indicates a night shift. for example A watch indicates a day shift. Shift Time Selection of this option results in the duration of the shift in hours and minutes for the employee to display for each day on the Employee Availability Search screen.Search for Employee Availability screen or MSQRAV . This is the default. Default This button sets the background and text colours of all shift types to their original values immediately prior to displaying the Options dialog box. SORT ORDER This field group of options determines the order used for the display of availability. Available Days This option controls the shift types displayed corresponding to available days.3620 197 Resource Type Selection of this option results in the details on the Employee Availability Search screen to display in Employee Primary Resource Type order. If the Available Days option is selected all available shift types display. The default is all Unavailable shift types display. If the Show All Resources option is selected all resource types display. © 2009 Mincom . SHOW SHIFT The fields in this field group vary and when selected displays those options for filtering the shift view. Employee Selection of this option results in the details on the Employee Availability Search screen to display in employee ID order. you can select which resource types are to display from the list box.Work Orders . Filter tab This tab enables you to specify the shifts and resource types to display on the Employee Availability Search screen. If the Available Days option is not selected each of the individual shift types control whether that shift type displays. Unavailable Days This option controls the shift types displayed corresponding to unavailable days. The default is all Available shift types display. If the Show All Resources option is not selected. SHOW RESOURCE The show all resources option controls the resource types displayed. Work Location/Job Class Selection of this option results in the details on the Employee Availability Search screen to display in job class level order. The default is all resource types to display. If the Unavailable Days option is selected all Unavailable shift types display. If the Unavailable Days option is not selected each of the individual shift types control whether that shift type displays. OTHER © 2009 Mincom . MATERIAL Use Calculated Costs If the Use Calculated Costs check box is selected. If the Use Calculated Costs check box is cleared. costs are not calculated from recorded requirements. Calculated Hours The total resource hours will display if the Use Calculated Costs check box is selected. the total resource cost appears in the Calculated Cost field and the total resource hours appear in the Calculated Hours field. costs are not calculated from recorded requirements. You can enter estimated cost for materials in the Estimated Cost field. the total cost for materials appears in the Calculated Cost field.3620 Dialog Box . The amount displayed is calculated from the requirements for materials recorded against the Work Order. Estimated Cost Enter an estimated cost for materials if the Use Calculated Costs check box is cleared. Estimated Cost Enter an estimated cost for materials if the Use Calculated Costs check box is cleared. Estimated Costs Enter an estimated cost for resources if the Use Calculated Costs check box is cleared. You can enter estimated cost for resources in the Estimated Cost field and the estimated hours for resources in the Estimated Hours field. Estimated Hours Enter estimated hours for resources if the Use Calculated Costs check box is cleared.Update Estimates The Update Estimates dialog box is used to specify preferences for estimated or calculated costs for each requirement type. If the Use Calculated Costs check box is cleared. Calculated Costs The total resource cost will display if the Use Calculated Costs check box is selected.198 Work Orders . New Topic The total material cost will display if the Use Calculated Costs check box is selected. The amounts displayed are calculated from the requirements for resources recorded against the Work Order. The fields on this screen are described below: RESOURCE Use Calculated Costs If the Use Calculated Costs check box is selected. Total The Use Estimated Total Cost check box will determine if a total cost for all requirements is calculated and displayed in this field or if a total estimated cost can be manually entered. costs are not calculated from recorded requirements.3620 199 Use Calculated Costs If the Use Calculated Costs check box is selected. a total cost for all requirements is calculated and displayed in the Total field. you can enter estimated other costs in the Estimated Cost field. Calculated Cost The total cost for other items will display if the Use Calculated Costs check box is selected. the total cost for other items appears in the Calculated Cost field. TOTAL Use Estimated Total Cost If the Use Estimated Total Cost check box is cleared. Estimated Cost Enter an estimated cost for equipment if the Use Calculated Costs check box is cleared. the total cost for equipment appears in the Calculated Cost field. © 2009 Mincom . If the Use Estimated Total Cost check box is selected. The amount displayed is calculated from the requirements for equipment recorded against the Work Order. Calculated Cost The total cost for equipment will display if the Use Calculated Costs check box is selected. If the Use Calculated Costs check box is cleared. Estimated Cost Enter an estimated cost for other items if the Use Calculated Costs check box is cleared. the Total field is available and you can type the total estimated cost. EQUIPMENT Use Calculated Costs If the Use Calculated Costs check box is selected. If the Use Calculated Costs check box is cleared. (The entry is not calculated from recorded requirements).Work Orders . You can enter estimated cost for equipment in the Estimated Cost field. This field is validated against a combination of the assigned Work Group and the Table File CREW Work Group Crew. Crew The Work Group Crew. © 2009 Mincom .3620 Dialog Box . search and select the Employee ID of the person be assigned to the work order task. The CREW table file entry selected must have an associated value equal to the Assigned Work Group. The fields on this screen are described below: Assign to Individual Work Group Right-click.WO Task Assign To The WO Task Assign To dialog box enables you to assign a Work Order Task to an individual and/or a crew.200 Work Orders . Work Orders - 3620 201 Dialog Box - Work Order Assign To The Work Order Assign To dialog box enables you to assign a Work Order to an individual and/or a crew. The fields on this screen are described below: Assign to Individual Right-click, search and select the Employee ID of the person assigned to the work order. Crew The Work Group Crew. This field is validated against a combination of the assigned Work Group and the Table File CREW Work Group Crew. The CREW table file entry selected must have an associated value equal to the Assigned Work Group. © 2009 Mincom 202 Work Orders - 3620 Dialog Box - Work Order Durations The Work Order Durations dialog box enables you to either specify the actual and estimated duration of a Work Order or record delay reasons and durations during the course of the job. The fields on this screen are described below: Actual Job Duration Enter the total time taken to complete the job. This time does not have to balance with the sum of detailed durations. If left blank, it is set to the total. Changing or adding details updates this total if the total of duration details already on file agrees with the total initially displayed. To reset this total to the total of details, delete the total. Estimated Job Duration Enter the time estimated to complete the job. Calculate Duration Hours This is a read only option. It is activated by selecting the Calculate Duration Hours option under the Work Order » Durations menu option. By selecting this check box the system calculates the duration hours of the job. It also calculates the estimated duration for the work order header based on the estimated duration hours entered on the work order task. When selected, it controls the wrapping of the scheduling dates on the work order header, that is, the work order planned start date/time defaults to the earliest task planned start date/time and the work order planned finish date/time defaults to the latest planned start date/time. Date Enter the date the delay reason was entered. Code Enter the delay or duration code or select from the drop-down list. This entry is validated on the Table File JI - Job Duration Code. Description This field displays the table file description of the code. Start Time The start time for the job duration. If a start time is entered than a finish time must be entered in the Finish Time field. If this field is left blank, an entry must be made in the Hours field. If you complete the Hours field, the start and finish times are calculated from the duration time entered. Finish Time The finish time for the job duration. If a finish time is entered than a start time must be entered in the Start Time field. © 2009 Mincom Work Orders - 3620 203 If this field is left blank, an entry must be made in the Hours field. If you complete the Hours field, the start and finish times are calculated from the duration time entered. Hours Enter the duration of the job in hours. If this field is left blank, entries must be made in both the Start Time and Finish Time fields. If you complete the Start Time and Finish Time fields, the hours are calculated. © 2009 Mincom 204 Work Orders - 3620 Dialog Box - Work Order Task The Work Order Task dialog box enables you to record detailed information for each Work Order Task that defines the overall Work Order. The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order No This field displays the work order number. or Prefix This field displays the prefix of the work order. The prefix is created as part of the configuration on the district control file. Task No (primary field) Enter a Task Number to identify the Task. The Task Number is used to sequence the Tasks in the order they are to be scheduled. This field is mandatory. District Code The district code associated with the work order. Work Order Desc (Work Order Description) Enter a description of the work order. This field is mandatory. Note: Click New Description to add extended text to the work order description. WO (Detail view Work Order option) This option is used to display work order details. Ellipse displays work order details for the work order the displayed task belongs. Task (Detail view Task option) Select this option to display task details. Ellipse displays task details for the task selected on the Tasks tab. Tabs • Job Information © 2009 Mincom Work Orders - 3620 • Planning • Scheduling • Costs • Completion • APL 205 Job Information The Job Information tab enables you to review or modify important information for each Work Order Task. This tab provides basic safety information as well as an opportunity to record more detailed Job Instructions in standard text format. The fields on this tab are described below: Task Description The description of the work order task. Work Group Enter a work group or right-click to search for the Work Group responsible for the Task. If a Work Group is selected that is different then the Work Group on the Work Order Header, then this is called a foreign task. During the scheduling process for the Work Order Header, the task is committed and scheduled for the foreign task Work Group. Safety Instruction Enter a Safety Instruction code that describes the safety procedure to be performed in completing the job. The Safety Instruction is validated on the Table File SI - Safety Instructions and can be selected from the drop-down list. Each task is assigned its own Safety Instruction/Completion Instruction Code combination. Job Description Enter a description for the Task. The description displays on the standard Work Order Task Job Card and should be clear enough to briefly describe the work to be done. Location From Enter a location or right-click to search for the Location where the Task will originate. This information is very important if work is being scheduled based on an assignees geographical start and finish locations. Location To Enter a location or right-click to search for the Location where the Task finishes. This information is very important if work is being scheduled based on an assignees geographical start and finish locations. Highest Task The number of tasks allocated to the work order. © 2009 Mincom 206 Work Orders - 3620 APTW Exists for Task Select this option if an application for a permit to work is created for this task. Note: Click Job Instructions to enter free text information about the job. Planning tab The Planning tab enables you to review or modify planning details for a Work Order Task. This tab controls the relationship between tasks and defines the expected workload that is required to complete the job. This tab also records who the job task has been assigned to if an individual or a crew has been designated as the responsible party. The fields on this tab are described below: Assign to Individual This field displays a work group or individual to whom the task is assigned for further workload planning. You can update this field by clicking Assign To. Crew This field displays a work group or a specific crew to whom the task is assigned within the work group for further workload planning. You can update this field by clicking Assign To. Unit of Work Enter the unit of work for each task. Entry is validated against the Table File UW - Unit of Work. Units Required Enter either the units of work required to complete tasks requiring fabrication or processing, or the number of work items required to complete the Task. The Units of Work Completed and the % Complete display for information. If the number of units required is modified, the % Complete is recalculated. Scheduled Units/Days Enter the rate of processing in units of work per day. Linked to Previous Task Select this option if the planned start date of this task is linked to the previous task. Scheduling tab The Scheduling tab holds important information that is used during the scheduling process. This tab displays the Tasks start and finish date details. The fields on this tab are described below: PLAN DATES © 2009 Mincom Work Orders - 3620 207 Plan Start Date This field displays the date when this task is scheduled to start. This date is used as the operation date in scheduling the work for the work group. This field can be updated by clicking the Schedule button in the task screen. Plan Start Time The time when the task is scheduled to start. This field can be updated by clicking the Schedule button. Plan Finish Date The date when the task is expected to be completed. This field can be updated by clicking the Schedule button. Plan Finish Time The time when the task is expected to be completed. This field can be updated by clicking the Schedule button. Offset Days This field displays the number of days when the planned date of this task should lag behind the work order header planned start date. This field can be updated by clicking the Schedule button in the task screen. DURATIONS Estimated Duration Hours This field displays the estimated duration of the task in hours. This field is review only and can be updated using the Schedule button in the task screen. EARLIEST DATES The Work Order can be subject to critical path scheduling to determine the earliest start date and earliest finish date of the job, and the number of days for which the job can remain unactioned, without impacting related Tasks. Earliest Start Date The earliest date when the task can start, based on critical path scheduling. Earliest Start Time The earliest time when the task can start, based on critical path scheduling. Earliest Finish Date The earliest date when the task can finish, based on critical path scheduling. © 2009 Mincom 208 Work Orders - 3620 Earliest Finish Time The earliest time when the task can finish, based on critical path scheduling. Float Days The number of days for which the job can remain un-actioned, without impacting related tasks. This field relates to the Earliest Start Date and Earliest Finish Date fields. Costs tab The Cost tab displays the estimated material, equipment, resource and other costs for the task. Requirements and their associated costs are recorded in the Requirements screen. The fields on this tab are described below: ESTIMATED Resource Hours This field displays the estimated number of resources in hours required to complete the job. Resource Cost This field displays the estimated resource costs required to complete the job. Material Cost This field displays the estimated material costs required to complete the job. Equipment Cost This field displays the estimated equipment costs required to complete the job. Other Cost This field displays other cost estimates required to complete the job. Total Cost This field displays the total estimated costs based on adding the estimated costs or entering a fixed estimate required to complete the job. Contractor Costs Select this option if the Work Order Task has contractor costs recorded. Contractor costs are available if a Compatible Unit and Job Estimate was used to create the Work Order and its tasks. MACHINE HOURS Estimated Enter the estimated number of hours taken to complete the job if this task was assigned to a machine centre. Actual This field displays the actual number of hours accrued during this job if this task is assigned to a machine centre. © 2009 Mincom Work Orders - 3620 209 Completion tab The Completion tab enables you to record completion requirements and review completion details for a Work Order task. The fields on this tab are described below: Complete By This field displays the person who completed the task. You can update this field after clicking Complete Task. Completed Date This field displays the date the task was completed. You can update this field after clicking Complete Task. Completed Time This field displays the time the task was completed. You can update this field after clicking Complete Task. Completed Code This field displays the code describing the circumstances when this task was completed or cancelled. You can update this field after clicking Complete Task. Completion codes are held on the Table File SC - Maintenance Completion Status. Units Complete This field displays the units of work already completed for this task. Percent Complete This field displays the percentage of this task already completed. COMPLETION Instruction Select the completion instruction from the drop-down list. The completion instruction indicates the procedure to be performed at the end of a job. These instructions are the reverse of the safety instructions. Completion instruction codes are held on the Table File CI - Completion Instructions. Text Code Select the completion text code from the drop-down list. The completion text code is used to define the text that prints on the right-hand side of the maintenance schedule. This provides a prompt for maintenance personnel to complete the information about the job, that is relevant. APL tab The APL tab enables you to review or modify Application Parts Listing (APL) information for the task. APLs can be recorded if a standard bill of materials is available that suits the needs of this task. © 2009 Mincom can be used instead of spaces. Entry is validated against the Table File CO .Modifier Code. the material requirements are deleted from the task before the APL is set up. then material requirements have been set on this task. If an APL is required instead of individual material requirements.can be used instead of spaces.210 Work Orders . Modifier Code Enter a modifier code or right-click to search for a modifier code to designate a particular component code. The value --. Equipment Group ID Select this option and enter the equipment group ID if the APL is to be held against an EGI. This prevents the creation of an APL requirement. Component Code Enter a component code or right-click to search for a component code if the APL is held against a specific equipment sub-assembly. The value --. Sequence Number Enter the sequence number to designate individual APLs. Entry is validated against the Table File MO .3620 The fields on this tab are described below: APL Equipment Reference Select this option and enter the APL Equipment Reference if the APL is to be held against an individual piece of equipment. © 2009 Mincom . Material Requirement Exist If this option is selected.Component Code. It cannot be edited. Options are: My WorkOrders Displays all work orders assigned to the currently logged-on user. This field is not displayed for the Retrieve for WorkGroup option. Valid status options are: Any Status Displays all work orders regardless of status matching the search criteria. It cannot be edited. 'My WorkOrders' is selected by default. (Default) Authorised Displays only authorised work orders matching the search criteria. Completed Displays only completed work orders matching the search criteria. Open Displays only open work orders matching the search criteria. SEARCH CRITERIA Work Orders Assigned to Employee This search field displays the employee id of the currently logged-on user. A status can also be specified. Work Group The work group assigned to the work order.My Work Orders The My Work Orders screen provides facilities for searching for and reviewing details of work orders assigned to the current user or optionally to a nominated work group. Current District This search field displays the district name and code of the current district. Retrieve For WorkGroup Displays all work orders assigned to the specified work group.Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom . This screen is available from the menu or the Ellipse home page. This field is only displayed for the Retrieve for WorkGroup option. Status The status of the work orders.3620 211 MSE620 . This field is only displayed for the Retrieve for WorkGroup option. This field is only displayed for the Retrieve for WorkGroup option. The fields on this screen are described below: Options The method used to search for work orders. Records found matching the search criteria display in the results grid for selection and return to the calling application. Equipment Search Type Select the type of equipment search required. The fields on this screen are described below: Options Enter one of the following options: Search Select this option to search using the entered criteria. A Work Order number must be entered for this option. Work Order (Work Order Number) The work order number. This must be specified for an Exact Match. Search Method The method used to search for work orders. PRIMARY SEARCH CRITERIA At least one primary search criteria must be specified for all search types except an Exact Match. Exact Match Displays only the matching work order. Search via Ref Codes Select this option to search for Work Orders by Reference Codes. Starts With Displays all work orders which start with the specified characters and match the entered search criteria. eg MSE857 . Options are: All Displays all work orders matching the entries made in the search fields.3620 MSE620 .Work Orders Search The Work Order search screen provides facilities for searching for a work order from another application. Clear Select this option to clear the entered search criteria. Starts From Displays all work orders starting from the specified characters which match the entered search criteria. Valid equipment search types are: • All © 2009 Mincom .Employee Weekly Labour Costing. based on a specific search method and criteria.212 Work Orders . Equipment List Type (Equipment List Type) An equipment list is an ordered list of items. Work Group The work group assigned to the work order.Work Group Crew. Valid options are: List Items Only Retrieves all work orders for the selected Equipment List.3620 213 • Equipment or Plant Number • Equipment Class • Equipment Group Identifier • Equipment Location • Productive Unit • Equipment Status Equipment List Ind Indicates whether both lists and sub-lists are to be searched for the selected Equipment List. Originator ID The employee ID of the person who created the work order. Lists and SubLists Retrieves all work orders for the selected Equipment List and any sub-lists of that list. Crew The crew the Work Order has been assigned to. Search Method Select whether to search for All or only Open work orders. Entry is validated against the Table File LI . The parent work order is validated against the Parent Work Order file MSF625. Parent Work Order The parent work order number to list work orders belonging to that parent work order. Equipment Reference The equipment number for the work order. © 2009 Mincom .Equipment List Type. Each item has an individual piece of equipment or a subordinate equipment list. This is validated against the Table File CREW .Work Orders . Estimate Number The job estimate number. SECONDARY SEARCH CRITERIA Component Code A code indicating the subassembly. Component Mod Code (Component Modifier Code) © 2009 Mincom . This field displays only if the Project Control module (3660) is installed. The description displays to the right. (Default) Open Displays only open work orders matching the search criteria.3620 Project Number The Project Number to search for all work orders belonging to a project. Closed Displays only closed work orders matching the search criteria. Request ID The work request ID to display all work orders created from this work request. Account Code The account code or cost centre for the work order. System Status The system status code of the work orders. All Districts Indicates if the search should include work orders for all districts. If not selected. the search will be restricted to work orders for the current district.214 Work Orders . Authorised Displays only authorised work orders matching the search criteria. Entry is validated against the Project file MSF660. Shutdown Number The shutdown number of the work orders to be selected. Uncompleted Displays only uncompleted work orders matching the search criteria. Valid system status codes are: All Displays all work orders regardless of status matching the search criteria. Assigned To The employee ID of the person assigned to the work order. © 2009 Mincom .Work Orders . Shutdown Type The code for the shutdown type. Failure Part The identity of the part causing the failure. Location The location referenced on the work order. The adjacent field displays the originator's priority description. The description displays to the right. preventative. The values and their meanings are held on the Table File PY . safety. The User Work Order Status is changed manually on the work order as the job progresses through different stages of work. Standard Job No The number and description of the standard job template used to automatically create a work order. inclusive. however the Required Start Date and Required by Date fields are updated with the Plan Start Date and Plan Finish Date field dates.Work Order Priority Code. Entry in this field is validated against Table File SD . If no priority is entered the tolerance calculation is not performed. Work Order Type The work order type to be searched. Tolerances are defined in the PY table file and if this field is modified they are recalculated. This entry is validated against the Table File PY Work Order Priority Code. Tolerances are defined in the PY table file and if this field is modified they are recalculated.Plant Shutdown Type. Examples of maintenance types are breakdown. Maintenance Type The code for the type of maintenance being performed. Entry is validated against WO Table File. This is a number from 1 to 99.3620 215 A code indicating the subassembly if there is more than one subassembly. and District The district in which the standard job number exists. User Status This code is used to define the status of a work order or task. Originator Priority The originator's priority defaults from the work request priority if the work order was generated as a result of a work request. Planners Priority The priority set by the person who planned the job. 1 is the highest priority. 216 Work Orders . Planned Start Date From The earliest date the work order was planned to commence on. depending on the code description name defined in the tables. The table files can be set up so they do not display on the screen. Segment From The first continuous asset segment in the current range associated with an item of equipment.Work Order Classification 0 W1 .3620 Raised Date From The earliest date the work order was created on. Segment To The final continuous asset segment in the current range associated with an item of equipment. Raised Date To The latest date the work order was created on.Work Order Classification 1 through to: W9 . REFERENCE CODES Reference Code The reference codes for work orders as agreed during implementation. and are user-defined in both table name and table entry: W0 . Planned Start Date To The latest date the work order was planned to commence on. A list of valid codes for work orders displays. The table code descriptions that display on the screen are configured by the customer as part of the work order system setup.Table File Control Record. Note: The following work order class field names will differ. © 2009 Mincom . JOB CODES The fields on this tab are described below: The Job Codes shown on this tab use ten table files (W0-W9).Work Order Classification 9 The name of each code can be altered by changing the code description on Table File XX . A table file XX entry can also be used to indicate which Work Order Job codes are mandatory. Reference Code Value The value of the reference code for the work order. Work Orders .3620 217 © 2009 Mincom . modify.3620 MSM001A . Modify Program Printer Allocations Use this option to enter default printing parameters for batch reports produced by Ellipse.Maintain System Control File Use this menu screen to access and maintain System and District Control files. Modify District Control Information Use this option to modify existing districts' specific control file settings. present. and future accounting periods for a given district. Modify Bank Accounts for a District Use this option to create. The fields on this screen are described below: Option Enter one of the following options: Maintain Systems Control Information Use this option to update information held on the System Control file at a global level. Modify Accounting Periods for a District Use this option to maintain past. Hint: Changing fields within the System or District Control files after implementation could lead to corrupted files or program failure. This creates information on the District Control file. telephone numbers. This would usually only be for certain control type reports or updates. Modify HR details for a District Use this option to define default Human Resources and payroll information for a district. If in doubt as to the impact of changing any control settings. The options selected determine the functionality available through the activation of modules and entry of data. or delete bank account information held on the District Control file. This option can also be used to review a financial year to ensure month end has occurred in all periods for a given financial year. and relevant government IDs. Use this option for activating modules and maintaining other system control settings. or for a newly created district that is yet to have its data loaded.218 Work Orders . refer to your Mincom Support consultant. Modify Current Period Information Use this option to identify or update the current accounting periods for modules used within districts. The System and District Control files contain information used to control functionality within Ellipse. Suspend District Use this option to deactivate district attributes for a district that is no longer required. Modify District Address Details Use this option to create or maintain each district's postal address. Define a New District Use this option to create a new legal entity or charter. © 2009 Mincom . Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable. Modify Account Code for Use this option to update Ellipse with account codes required to prepare a District balanced entries for various accounting transactions within the integrated system. For example. Maintain Warehouse Control Information Use this option to maintain information relating to the setup of a warehouse within Ellipse. Copy District This field displays only when selecting option Define a New District. Maintain Site Control Information Use this option to maintain information relating to the setup of a site that uses the Permits to Work module. Enter the district from which information is to be copied for the new district. The following information does not copy from the old district.3620 219 Reactivate District Use this option to reactivate a district for use after the district has been defined and the details have been added. This field is mandatory for all options. Warehouse This field refers to a major stock storage location within a district. and must be entered directly: • Bank Accounts • Account Codes • Accounting Periods • Current Periods • Program Printers • District Address Details Where a Copy From district derives the Chart of Accounts or the Expense Elements from another district. It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that all default expense elements are valid within the Copy To district prior to processing. Close District Use this option to close a district if no longer required. A district can be thought of as a separate set of books. District Enter the district code. the default expense elements copied during the Copy District function will not exist within the Copy To district. This field is required when option Maintain Warehouse Control Information is selected. © 2009 Mincom . military base or geographical location that performs business in its own right. business unit.Work Orders . except options Maintain Systems Control Information and Maintain Warehouse Control Information. This field identifies an accounting entity. Where a Copy From district controls its own Chart of Accounts or Expense Elements. the default expense elements copied during the Copy District function will be correct and available for use within the Copy To district. 220 Work Orders .Site Code. This field is required when the option Maintain Site Control Information is selected.3620 Site Code This field refers to a site for the purposes of setup details for the Permit to Work module. © 2009 Mincom . The entry in this field is validated against the Table File PSIT . The fields on this tab are described below: Item Classification Enter a number between one and seven to indicate the order of this screen.Maintain Systems Control File (Cont. Enter a number between one and seven to indicate the order of this screen.Work Orders .3620 221 MSM001C . Tabs • Catalogue • Accounts Payable • Suppliers • Customers • Equipment • Scheduling/WO's • Journal Holding • Chart of Accounts • General Ledger Catalogue tab Enter numbers from one to seven to indicate the order in which Cataloguing screens are to appear. A zero indicates that the screen is to be bypassed.) Use this screen to update the Systems Control file with details relating to the Materials and Maintenance modules. Colloquial Name This field defines the position in the sequence of Cataloguing screens of the Colloquial Name Information screen. Part Number Information Enter a number between one and seven to indicate the order of this screen. A zero indicates the screen will be bypassed. © 2009 Mincom . This field defines the position in the sequence of Cataloguing screens of the Item Classification screen. This field defines the position in the sequence of Cataloguing screens of the Part Number Information screen. A zero indicates the screen will be bypassed. A zero indicates the screen will be bypassed. Extended INC Allows for a nine character Item Name Code to be used for cataloging purposes. A zero indicates the screen will be bypassed. Item Commentary This field defines the position in the sequence of Cataloguing screens of the Item Commentary screen. Last Stock Number Allocated This is the last stock number allocated by Ellipse.222 Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom . A B in this field takes you directly to the matching item screen. Enter a number between one and seven to indicate the order of this screen. Enter a number between one and seven to indicate the order of this screen.3620 APL Fitment (Application Part List Fitment) This field defines the position in the sequence of Cataloguing screens of the Application Part List screen. Extended Description This field defines the position in the sequence of Cataloguing screens of the Extended Description screen. This is a counter which increments automatically. A zero indicates the screen will be bypassed. the last stock number allocated is incremented automatically when Ellipse generates the next number. An extra field will be displayed for the INC to allow an additional four characters to be included. Cross Reference This field defines the position in the sequence of Cataloguing screens of the Cross Reference screen. Enter a number between one and seven to indicate the order of this screen. A zero indicates the screen will be bypassed. First Search Screen On catalogue inquiry screens. If the catalogue numbers are not manually assigned. A zero indicates the screen will be bypassed. an A displays a screen that allows you to enter additional descriptive filters to further narrow your search criteria. Enter a number between one and seven to indicate the order of this screen. Last INC Number Allocated (Last Item Name Code Number Allocated) This is the last item name code number allocated. The fields in this group are described below: The fields on this tab are described below: Receipt of Services The Ellipse Accounts Payable system includes the capability to record the receipt of service orders. © 2009 Mincom . Ellipse assigns a number automatically and increments this counter.Work Orders . Validate PO Number for Field Release (Validate Purchase Order Number for Field Release) Enter Y if the Purchase Order Number is to be validated when users load invoices for field release purchase orders. If a list number is not assigned by the user when creating a list. Next MSB265 Run Number Enter the number that identifies the next run of the Invoice Approval report (MSB265). Check Subsystem for Service Items This field has become obsolete and does not impact the system regardless of whether the value entered is Y or N. This indicator activates or de-activates the facility. this number should be 1. Next MSB267 Run Number Enter the number that identifies the next run of the Invoice Batch Match report (MSB267). Accounts Payable tab The following information can be created or modified only if the Accounts Payable module is installed. Once the decision has been made to activate or de-activate. Enter N if purchase orders do not have to be received into Ellipse before an invoice for those service orders may be paid.3620 223 Last List Number This field applies to lists in the Foreign Military Sales module only. this number should be 1. Upon initial setup of the system. This is the last list number allocated by Ellipse. and Ellipse automatically increments the number each time MSB261 is generated. Enter Y if service purchase orders must be received into Ellipse (similar to a goods purchase order) before an invoice for that service can be paid. and Ellipse automatically increments the number each time MSB265 is generated. and Ellipse automatically increments the number each time MSB267 is generated. Upon initial setup of the system. Next MSB261 Run Number Enter the number that identifies the next run of the Generate Automatic Invoices report (MSB261). this number should be 1. Upon initial setup of the system. it is recommended that the indicator is not amended. this number should be 0. Such modifications must be authorised (in a separate process) before the customer can be used in a sale transaction. For example. Customers tab The fields on this tab are described below: Last Customer Number Allocated Enter the last customer code allocated by Ellipse. Such modifications must be authorised (in a separate process) before the supplier can be used in a purchase order. Upon initial setup of the system. Supplier Class Heading B Market Share Classification 2 for commodity types. This field is used to record the percentage of market share held by the supplier for each commodity type. This field is used to record the percentage of market share held by the supplier for each commodity type. the percentage of the domestic market for each of the commodities supplied. Supplier Class Heading A Market Share Classification 1 for commodity types.224 Work Orders . For example. pre-defined number. 2 Step Authorisation Process Enter Y if separate steps for modifying and approving customer changes are required. Equipment tab The fields on this tab are described below: Last Equipment Number Allocated Enter the last equipment number allocated by Ellipse. Upon initial setup of the system. this number should be 0. 2 Step Authorisation Process Enter Y if separate steps for modifying and approving supplier changes are required. the percentage of the domestic market for each of the commodities supplied. This is a system-incremented field but may be entered or changed to force Ellipse to start at a new.3620 Suppliers tab The fields on this tab are described below: Last Supplier Number Allocated Enter the last Supplier Code allocated by Ellipse. Activating this facility may impact on the use of new or recently modified suppliers. © 2009 Mincom . Activating this facility can impact on the use of new or recently modified customers. Work Orders . The daily average derived against an equipment item's Operating Statistic Profile from the recorded statistics is used to predict future maintenance requirements. This default value is used only when a Maximum Days value has not been specified in the Operating Statistics Profile of an equipment item or its Equipment Group Identifier (EGI). The routine then calculates a date at which to begin searching for the next record by subtracting the Day Average from the date of the most recent record. Continuous Asset Delimiter Enter a symbol to be used as a delimiter between continuous asset segments when entering or displaying and validating an equipment reference field. slash and asterisk (& / *) are more visible. If this field is not entered. The Structured Plant Nos flag must be Y if a delimiter is used. Default Warranty WO Type (Default Warranty Work Order Type) © 2009 Mincom . . The Day Average value determines the number of days over which the daily average is to be calculated for an item of equipment. Fullstop. This default value will be used only when a Day Average value has not been specified in the Operating Statistics Profile of an equipment item or its Equipment Group Identifier (EGI). comma or apostrophe (. whereas ampersand. When setting the delimiter. whenever the Forecast program (MSB700) is run. The routine finds the most recent operating statistic record for the item. On system startup. Scheduling/WO's tab The fields on this tab are described below: Last Maintenance Schedule Run Number Enter the last maintenance schedule run number allocated. This field must be Y if a continuous asset delimiter has been entered. the system will not allow the use of continuous asset segments. It then checks that this record is eligible. The routine finds the most recent operating statistics record for the item. this should be set to zero. Maximum Days Enter the default value for the Maximum Days which will be used in the calculation of daily averages for equipment items. by comparing the date of the record against today's date.3620 225 Structured Plant Numbers Enter Y if a Structured Plant Number is required. less the Maximum Days value. keep in mind that it should be visible and easily recognised. The scheduling mechanism maintains this field from then on. OPERATING STATISTICS Day Average Enter the default value for the Day Average which will be used in the calculation of daily averages for equipment items. The Maximum Days value determines whether operating statistics are sufficiently up-to-date to allow a daily average to be calculated for the item. ') characters may be overlooked. Enter Y if the number of transactions updating a particular control account is large. © 2009 Mincom . Ellipse automatically increments this value when inter-district journals are allocated. causing database performance issues.Work Order Types.) • Ampersand (&) • Colon (:) An example of using account delimiters is when entering a journal entry or a non-order invoice entry. the work order type applied to the Work Order is not overwritten. Permissible characters include: • Full-stop (.3620 Enter the work order type to be applied to work orders during work order creation when Ellipse detects that a warranty condition is in force. Entry is validated against the Table File WO . Account Delimiter Enter an appropriate character for delimiting cost code segments. Journal Holding tab The fields on this tab are described below: Cash Accounting Enter Y to enable cash accounting across all districts within Ellipse. Inter-District Journal Prefix Enter the prefix used on inter-district journals. If this field is left blank. not a General Ledger code).226 Work Orders .) • Comma (. This flag should only be changed when there are no active processes within Ellipse that generate transactions. After system initialisation. the work order or project number and press ENTER. Ellipse generates the full account code.) • Dash (-) • Slash (/) • Semi Colon (. the expense element. for an account connected to a project or work order (with a cost centre attached. Last Inter-District Journal Number Allocated Enter the last inter-district journal number allocated by Ellipse. Enter Y if interdistrict transactions are used frequently and deadlocking is an issue. Enter N if deadlocking within your system is not an issue. Enter the delimiter. Order Transactions This field dictates the way unposted totals are updated against accounts as transactions are generated. This is the standard Ellipse functionality. inter-district accounting entries are recorded against the system-defined inter-district account codes. For more information.Currency Type. The fields in this group are described below: The fields on this tab are described below: Subledger Delimiter This is an optional field. This currency type code must exist on the Table File CU . Otherwise. refer to Maintaining Interdistrict Processing.) • Comma (.ledger entry is HOTEL • The sub-ledger delimiter as set up in the System Control file is / © 2009 Mincom . refer to Maintaining System Control Settings .System Activities.) • Dash (-) • Slash (/) • Semi Colon (. Validate Control Accounts Enter Y to validate control accounts.Travel Expense Type of which a valid sub. For more information.Work Orders . as defined by the account code on the initiating accounting entry.) • Ampersand (&) • Colon (:) An example of using the sub-ledger delimiter is: • General Ledger posting account is 11101504362 • This account is linked to the sub-ledger of TE . General Ledger tab The following information can only be entered if the General Ledger module is installed. Permissible characters are the same as for the cost code segments delimiter. whereby interdistrict accounting entries can be targeted to inter-district account codes. Enter an appropriate character for delimiting subledger data entry wherever entry of an account code and subledger data applies.3620 227 Chart of Accounts tab The fields on this tab are described below: Inter-District Table of Accounts Used Enter Y if inter-district processing is subject to an inter-district table of accounts. Euro Currency Type Enter the currency type code used for the European Monetary Unit. Permissible characters include: • Full-stop (. 228 Work Orders .3620 When processing an entry to this account code in Ellipse. © 2009 Mincom . the account and sub-ledger would be entered as: • 11101504362/TEHOTEL Do not enter the same delimiter as one already defined for cost code segments (see Account Delimiter). If the module is not installed.Modify Modules Installed Use this screen to update the information held on the Table File MD .3620 229 MSM00AA . N displays. DESCRIPTION This field displays the title of the Ellipse module. The fields on this screen are described below: MODULE This field displays the numerical identifier for each Ellipse module.Modules Installed. This screen enables users to define the modules that are installed for their organisation. All available Ellipse modules are defined in the MD Table File. The modules are listed in numerical order. you must identify the modules that are active by entering Y. Y displays.Work Orders . A module is a group of programs with related functionality. During the startup process. © 2009 Mincom . INSTALLED If the module is installed. 230 Work Orders . Many customers include the Ellipse instance as part of each district name. Entry is not required if the district will use the date format identified in the System Control file. When the modules are not active. BUSINESS UNIT XYZ . Tabs • General • Suppliers • Forward Purchasing Agreements • Repairable Item Management • Fuel and Oil • Work Orders • Equipment Costing • Scheduling • Fixed Assets • Telex/Fax • Notices General The fields on this tab are described below: Country Code Enter the code indicating which country this district operates in. The screen is divided into general information about the district and sections with modulespecific fields. Date Format Enter the code relating to the date format to be used in this district. for example. Entry in this field is mandatory. The fields on this screen are described below: District Name Enter the name of the subsidiary company. the associated control fields are not available. or accounting unit.District Control Information Use this screen to create or modify information maintained on the control file for an individual district.3620 MSM00BA . Examples of this include Fixed Asset Revaluation and Value Added Tax (VAT) reporting within the UK. Examples are: © 2009 Mincom . Entry is mandatory and is validated against the Table File CR.PRODUCTION. branch. The specified country code directly impacts on certain calculations carried out within the district.Country Code. Online Report Retention Days Enter the number of days that online reports will be retained on file. © 2009 Mincom . Enter N for it to be unavailable. These defaults can only be applied to MSM screens. Entry in this field is optional. This indicates whether a report identification banner can be specified when a report is requested. I DD-MM-YY (International format) For example. Banner Required Enter Y for this facility to be enabled.59.Work Orders . this information must be entered in HH. enter 31/DEC/10 for 31 December 2010. This default can be overridden when reviewing the report. enter 31-12-10 for 31 December 2010. Multi-Warehouse (Multiple Warehouses) Enter one of the following values to identify whether or not this district operates multiple warehouses: Y Indicates that there is more than one warehouse in the district and that they are all to be included in the re-ordering process. USA and the host machine was based in Brisbane.MM format. not to MSQ screens: 0 Enter to indicate that screen defaults cannot be assigned.3620 231 A DD/MM/YY (Australian format) For example.00 would be entered if the district was in Atlanta. 1 Enter to indicate that a user ID must be used when assigning screen defaults. Time Difference Enter the time difference between the time zone that this district operates in and that of the host machine. 2 Enter to indicate that screen defaults are to be assigned at the global level. and can be a value between -23. Window Default Level Enter the window default level to be applied when assigning default values and editing rules to screen fields. If completed. E Indicates that there is more than one warehouse in the district but not all of them are to be included in the reordering process. For example. and is used if vendor-held warehouses exist. M DD/MMM/YY (Military format) For example. enter 31/12/10 for 31 December 2010.59 and +23. -14. Australia. enter 12/31/10 for 31 December 2010. 3 Enter to indicate that screen defaults can be assigned with a user ID or at the global level. U MM/DD/YY (USA format) For example. Entry is validated against the Table File WH Warehouse Identification. for clients in these countries. for Australian Goods and Services Tax (GST) in Accounts Payable. Bypass Estab (Bypass Establishment) Enter Y to bypass Position Management (formerly called Establishment) module transactions or authority checking in this district. However. otherwise. Consumption Tax Type Enter the consumption tax type your organisation will be accruing. the Ellipse additional tax functionality is to be used for Accounts Payable. it will not enable the consumption tax functionality. Consumption Tax should be set to R. to re-route. in Purchasing. This option is used For Australia GST and For the UK VAT as the additional tax functionality in Ellipse is used to process consumption tax calculations for Accounts Payable invoices. Enter R to allow the consumption tax to be enabled for the Accounts Receivable module in isolation of the Purchasing and Accounts Payable modules. As stated above. return. enter N.232 N Work Orders . This field only has an effect if the Position Management module is installed. Warehouse Enter the central or main warehouse for the district. R If consumption tax processing is for Accounts Receivable only. It will appear as the default warehouse on many of the warehousing and issue requisition screens. N Enter N if the Accounts Receivable module is not implemented. United Kingdom VAT. the Ellipse consumption tax functionality is best suited for Accounts Receivable. Enter Y to enable the consumption tax throughout Ellipse modules (that is. or authorise a given transaction. Valid values are Y and N. Ellipse consumption tax functionality is only used for Accounts Receivable processing. Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable modules). Note for Australia and the United Kingdom. © 2009 Mincom .3620 Indicates that the district operates a single warehouse. however. Consumption Tax Enter one of the following values: Y If consumption tax is to be used in this district. Additional Tax Enter Y if additional tax is to be used in this district. Establishment Commentary This field is used if Diary (Notification) text messages are to be recorded and sent when an establishment-generated (position management generated) transaction is acted on using the MSM877A . we suggest that you do not use this value as it cannot be changed at a later stage to Y or E. For example. and possibly for state taxes in the USA. If N is entered. For example.Authorise Transactions screen. for Australian GST and UK VAT purposes. This will be the literal that Ellipse displays on all screens where consumption tax fields exist. Work Orders . The accounting calendar is maintained using the MSM00CC . Accounting Periods per Annum Enter the number of accounting periods used within the site ledger and in the costing mechanisms for the year. You can have up to 14 accounting periods in a year. Suppliers tab The fields on this tab are described below: Performance Parameters (Days late in Ascending Sequence) Ellipse automatically maintains statistics on the number of occasions when a supplier is late in delivering materials orders. the fourth category deliveries later than category 3. A default additional tax code can only be entered if the Additional Tax field is set to Y. Sales Tax Applies Enter Y if sales tax applies and N if sales tax does not apply. issuing or transfer processes. Where Additional Tax applies.Modify District Accounting Periods screen. For example. the district default Additional Tax code defaults. In either case. if this field is set to 7. In Australian districts. since GST is employed. Entering zero disables password expiry. Four categories of late delivery are provided according to the number of days overdue.Maintain Tax Code Definitions). Valid values are current tax codes stored in the Tax Code System Definition file (maintained by MSO018 . Category 2 Enter the number of days late that apply to the second least late classification for late delivery.Supplier Business Information defaults. orders delivered one to seven days late increment the late delivery field for least late.3620 233 Default Additional Tax Code Enter a default additional tax for the district. © 2009 Mincom . the Additional Tax code can be modified. this sales tax indicator should be set to N. Category 1 Enter the number of days late that apply to the least late classification for late delivery. the Additional Tax code from the Additional Tax Defaults fields on MSM20DA . Validate Bin Location Enter Y to enforce the use of pre-established bin locations in the receiving. If there is no supplier Additional Tax codes in these fields. Password Expiry Days Enter the maximum number of days allowed before Ellipse forces a change of passwords. The following fields give the current stratification for days late for three of the categories. if required. Leaving this field blank indicates that work orders will remain open until they are manually authorised by a user with the appropriate security. Category 4 . Consolidates all items for quotation under the same quote number(D) or generates multiple quote numbers (M). Consolidate Quote Items This field displays M to generate multiple quote numbers (default).3620 Category 3 Enter the number of days late that apply to the third least late classification for late delivery. Enter D for one quote number. I • repair requests are created at issue time R • repair requests are created at requisition time S • repair requests are created at issue time • repair requests are created when acquitting the issue requisition at zero quantity and not completing the requisition Work Orders tab The fields on this tab are described below: Auto Authorisation (Automatic Authorisation) Enter Y to indicate that automatic authorisations of work orders will occur on creation. Create Repair Request Enter either I. T or R.Balance This field displays the lead times greater than the third least late classification for late delivery (Category 3).234 Work Orders . Repairable Item Management tab The fields on this tab are described below: Repair Expense Element Enter a valid expense element to use as a default on the debit of the cost of a repair on receipt. Last Quote Number Enter the last quotation number allocated by Ellipse. © 2009 Mincom . Forward Purchasing Agreements tab The fields on this tab are described below: Quotation Prefix Enter the prefix used on quotations. Reallocation Credit Expense Element Enter a valid expense element to use as a default on the credit transaction of the work order reallocation process. Note that if the value of this field is set to N. since this indicator is set to N.Work Orders . Fuel and Oil tab The fields on this tab are described below: Warehouse Enter a default warehouse for fuel and oil issues. Scheduling tab The fields on this tab are described below: Last Shutdown Number Enter the last shutdown number assigned by Ellipse.3620 235 Reallocation Debit Expense Element Enter a valid expense element to use as a default on the debit transaction of the work order reallocation process. Bin Location Enter a default bin location for fuel and oil issues. in the format MMYY. Equipment Costing tab The fields on this tab are described below: Last Archive Period Enter the period last archived with respect to equipment costing. Entry must be Y or N. no depreciation amounts or General Ledger transactions will be calculated. Equipment Hire Retention Days Enter the number of retention days to be used for equipment hire transactions. © 2009 Mincom . However. Default Transaction Type Enter the default transaction type for fuel and oil issues.Fixed Assets Month End report at the end of each period to roll over the Fixed Assets module into the next accounting period. Entry is validated against the Table File WH Warehouse Identification. you will still need to execute the MSB685 . Entry is optional. Entry is validated against the Table File IT Issue Transaction Type. Fixed Assets tab The fields on this tab are described below: Calculate Depreciation Enter Y to calculate depreciation and post it to the Transaction file when running the Fixed Assets Month End. Maintain Foreign Currency Exchange Rates. the retention days can be changed if the default is greater than zero. When a telex or fax is produced. The last transmitted ID prefix and number are used by Ellipse to assign transmission numbers to identify each telex or fax transmission. Retention Days Enter the number of days for which telexes or faxes are to be retained before being deleted. Ellipse calculates the annual depreciation charge then the charge for each period. Telex/Fax tab The fields on this tab are described below: Telex Local Country Code Enter the local country code to be used for telex transmissions. This will be the default for all programs that send telexes and faxes.Journal Holding details has secondary currency enabled.236 Work Orders . This field is required if you are using telex functionality. Secondary Currency Rptg (Secondary Currency Reporting) This field is mandatory when MSM00DA . Last Count Sheet Number Enter the last count sheet number assigned by Ellipse. Last Asset Number Enter the last asset number assigned by Ellipse. When sending or re-sending manual telexes or faxes. telexes and faxes are stored in the Packet Switching file. Secondary currency fields are not available. The exchange rates in MSM912A .Maintain District Control Information . Last Xmit ID: Prefix (Last Transmit Identification: Prefix) Enter a one-character.3620 Pro-Rate Calculation Enter Y to pro-rate the depreciation calculation for assets according to the number of days in the closing accounting period. Enter Y to enable secondary currency fields for entry. When calculating depreciation charges. After submitted. You cannot enter Y unless the Calculate Depreciation field also contains Y. the system looks at these fields in the © 2009 Mincom . An entry of N results in Ellipse automatically calculating the secondary currency values from the local currency fixed asset values using MSM912A .Maintain Foreign Currency Exchange Rates are not used. For example. the periodic charge is based on the number of days in the accounting period that the depreciation is being calculated for. alphabetic prefix to be used when assigning transmission numbers. you can reduce the number of retention days to save space in the Packet Switching file. or increase the retention days if you want to re-send the message at a later date. Local and secondary currency values must be entered throughout the Fixed Assets (3680) module. If the Pro-Rate Calculation field is set to Y. if the last transmitted number is T00003 and you enter the prefix A and number 0. then updates this field. Entry is optional where Notifications are in use. The Work Notice Required field controls whether work notices are to be created for the nominated district. the system looks at these fields in the District Control file. If the field is left blank.Fax Interface Type. assigns the next sequential number as the transmission number. Fax Interface Type Enter the type of fax interface to be used.3620 237 District Control file. Ellipse assumes a default of N. © 2009 Mincom . For example. The Daily Whereabouts Notice Required field controls whether notices are to be created for the nominated district. Ellipse assumes a default of N. Enter a number (up to five digits) from which to start assigning transmission numbers.Work Orders . When a telex or fax is produced. Daily Whereabouts Notice Required This is an optional field if the Notifications module is installed. Entry will be validated as Y or N. the next fax submitted will be given the Transmission Number A00001. You can reset these fields by modifying the current entries. Entry is validated against the Table File FI . This field is required if you are using fax functionality. then updates this field. Number The last transmitted ID prefix and number are used by Ellipse to assign transmission numbers to identify each telex or fax transmission. assigns the next sequential number as the transmission number. This is a mandatory field if the Notifications module is installed. If you leave the field blank. Notices tab The fields on this tab are described below: Work Notice Required Entry must be Y or N. 238 Work Orders . FOR USE WHEN NO PREFIX APPLIES Parent Sequence Number This is the last number assigned by Ellipse for either a non-prefixed or prefixed parent work order.3620 MSM00EA . To initialise. therefore it is not available online. Use this screen to create or modify information maintained on the control file with regard to work order prefix information to control automatic assignment to work orders. enter the sequence number as one number less than the next work order (subordinate) number to be assigned.District Control Information Maintain Work Order Prefix Information This screen is one of a number of screens used to set up District Control information. Prefix Enter the alphanumeric prefix to apply to the work order number. Enter N if leading zeroes are required. Work order prefixes are District specific so work order prefixes must be set up in each District if needed. enter the sequence number as one number less than the next parent work order number to be assigned. The first prefix line is not available because it is used to define the zero-suppression rules for work orders that do not have prefixes. Enter a description for the prefix. Description This field is available for work order prefixes only. Each additional line defines the zero suppression rules for each work order prefix. To initialise. Hint: The grid is for entering the details of prefixes you wish to apply to Work Orders. Workorder Sequence Number This is the last number assigned by Ellipse for either a non-prefixed or prefixed work order. © 2009 Mincom . Zero Suppress Enter Y to signify that leading zeroes on system-generated work order numbers are to be suppressed. This is validated against the WO table file. The first line defines the need for leading zeros on any work order that does not use prefixes. The description should be clear enough to understand when the prefix should be used on a work order. The fields on this screen are described below: District Name This field displays the name of the district that is being maintained. Workorder Seq No. © 2009 Mincom . depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: D Delete a Prefix Record. enter the sequence number as one number less than the next parent work order number to be assigned.Work Orders . (Workorder Sequence Number) This is the last number assigned by Ellipse for either a non-prefixed or prefixed work order. To initialise. enter the sequence number as one number less than the next work order (subordinate) number to be assigned. To initialise. The following actions are available. Act (Action Code) Enter a valid action code.3620 239 Parent Seq No This is the last number assigned by Ellipse for either a non-prefixed or prefixed parent work order. A prefix record can be deleted by overtyping it. STANDARD TEXT Text Heading This field displays the text heading.3620 MSM097A . the stock code for that item displays. For example: • Commentary attached to stock codes or suppliers • Narrative attached to purchase orders • Text for employee payroll details • Text for employee higher duties records • Text for recruitment records such as position vacancy details. vacancy status.character code that specifies the type of text. if the text commentary is inventory instructions for a stock item.employee applicant details and applicant activity status • Text for training records such as training programs/ courses/ sessions and training history • Text for resource types The fields that display depend on how the screen is accessed. The fields on this screen are described below: Text Code This field displays the two. © 2009 Mincom . For example.Review Standard Text This screen is used to display textual information relating to various areas of Ellipse. non.240 Work Orders . Line This field displays the line number of the commentary displays. Commentary Type This field displays if a commentary type is required. Text This field displays the text itself. Modify All Work Order Information Use this option to open all work order fields for modification.Maintain Complete Work Order Information This screen is used to update Work Orders. Modify Work Order Code/ Completion Information Use this option to modify work order code and /or completion information. Modify Work Order Reallocation Information Use this option to modify work order reallocation information. The planning Planning Information screen displays and only the planning information is available for modification. The work order Duration Information duration screen displays and only duration information can be modified. Modify Work Order Task Planning Information Use this option to modify work order task planning information.3620 241 MSM620A . The work order tracing screen displays and only tracing information can be entered or modified. This screen is a sub-menu for a range of general maintenance screens which can update all information in the Work Order data set. On confirmation all tasks for the work order are also deleted. Modify Work Order Use this option to modify work order duration information. The work order task completion screen displays and only work order task completion information can be modified. The fields on this screen are described below: Options Enter one of the following options: Create a Work Order/Task Use this option to create a new work order and/or work order task. © 2009 Mincom . The work order code/completion information screen displays and only work order code completion information is available for modification Maintain Equipment Tracing for Work Order Use this option to maintain equipment tracing for a work order. The general information screen displays and only general information is available for modification. Modify Work Order General Information Use this option to modify work order general information. Modify Work order Task Completion Information Use this option to modify work order task completion information. All fields are available to enter data. Delete a Work Order Use this option to delete an existing work order. Modify Work Order Use this option to modify work order planning information. A number of screens are available to create and maintain work order information.Work Orders . The work order task planning screen displays and only work order task planning information can be modified. most specific to a type of Work Order. The work order reallocation screen displays and only reallocation information can be modified. © 2009 Mincom . COPY FROM (create option only) Standard Job Enter a Standard Job number to use as a reference to create a new Work Order. Prefix Enter a prefix number if neither a Work Order or Task were entered in the Work Order or Task Number fields. Task Number Enter a task number to use as a reference to create a new Work Order.3620 Work Order Number Enter a Work Order number. Task Number Enter a task number. Work Order Enter a Work Order number to use as a reference to create a new Work Order.242 Work Orders . District Enter the district code which identifies the district in which the copied work order exists. The review screen displayed depends on the option selected. a summary of all tasks for the work order is displayed. MSM621B . If the task is entered. Only work orders that match all characters before the * are selected. The search parameters are mutually exclusive. For the options to review work order costs. If this field is left blank. Equipment Search Type Enter the appropriate information.Review Work Order Information This screen is a sub-menu. The Work Order Number must not be entered for any other options.3620 243 MSM621A . Entry is validated against the Table File WS Table File. Work Order Task Enter a numeric task number for the associated work order for option 2. This field is mandatory for these options. The partial work order must end with *. Use it to enter selection criteria to review work order. © 2009 Mincom . You can enter an unlimited number of search parameters on this and the subsequent selection screen. The fields on this screen are described below: Option Enter the Option for the action required. For options 1 and 2. enter a complete Work Order Number. this field is optional.Work Orders . If user enter a number it must be incomplete if entered. Work Order The work order number.Review Work Order Information. The work order must be on file. Mincom Work Order Status Enter one of the following codes to restrict the review to work orders with the specified status: O Open Unauthorised A Authorised and Open C Completed U Uncompleted (status O and A work orders) User Work Order Status Enter the user status attached to the work order to restrict the review to work orders with that status. it must be on file. Calculate Estimates must be turned off for the Work Order Number. For option 3. for integrated Payroll users.Equipment List Type. The list type and identifier must exist as a valid equipment list. • A for retrieval of work orders for all items of the entered list and its sub-lists. This code is validated in accordance with the standard costing validation mechanisms. Entry is validated against the Table File RC . Parent Work Order Enter the number to search for work orders belonging to a parent work order.Responsibility Code or the Employee master file. Valid entries are: • L for retrieval of work order for equipment items of the entered list. Originator Enter the responsibility code of the person who initiated the work order. The Equipment Search Type field indicates the kind of equipment search. An equipment list identifier must be entered in the Equipment Search Key. as follows: E A Continuous Asset segment range can be entered in conjunction with an Equipment or Plant Number to restrict the search to Work Orders that refer to Continuous Asset segments falling within the range specified in the search criteria C Equipment Class G Equipment Group Identifier L Equipment List N Equipment Location P Productive Unit S Equipment Status The search key is the appropriate identifier. List Indicator This field is mandatory if the user entered an Equipment Type of L. Entry is validated against Table File LI . This field is mandatory if you entered an Equipment Type of L. If one field is completed. List Type Enter the list type of the list to be created. Account/Cost Centre Enter the account code or cost centre to which the jobs requiring review are charged. Note: You can only enter equipment search type E for option 4. The parent work order is validated on the Parent Work Order file (MSF625).3620 The Equipment Search Type and Equipment Search Key fields are used together.244 Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom . the other must also completed. If only one date is to be searched. Entry in this field is validated against the Work Group master file MSF720. inclusive. as they represent the primary access paths to the work order information.3620 245 Work Group Enter or search for the work group to which work orders are currently assigned. enter that date in both fields. If only one date is to be searched. to select only jobs between these dates. Raised Dates Enter the range of dates for which the work orders are raised. Entry is validated against the Table File RC . inclusive. you must enter one of the following. The second date defaults to the last date on file.Review Work Order Information screen displays. The first date defaults to the earliest date on file.The MSM621B . © 2009 Mincom . for integrated Payroll users. Additional Filters Enter Y to enter additional selection criteria. The first date defaults to the earliest date on file. enter that date in both fields. Enter N to review work orders in all districts for which you have access security. Current District Only Enter Y to restrict the search to the current district. Planned Start Dates Enter the range of dates for which the work orders are planned to start. This field is mandatory for option 4. Assign to Individual Enter the responsibility code of the person to whom the work orders are assigned. • Equipment Search • Originator • Account/Cost Centre • Parent Work Order • Work Group • Assign to Individual • Project.Work Orders . to select only jobs between these dates. The second date defaults to the last date on file. If you selected option 3 and did not enter a partial Work Order Number.Responsibility Code or the Employee master file. if entered. © 2009 Mincom . the above fields.3620 If you entered a partial work order for option 3. act as a filter.246 Work Orders . The fields on this screen are described below: Originator's Priority The code indicating the originator's priority.Modifier Code. Entry is validated against WO Table File. © 2009 Mincom .3620 247 MSM621B . Entry in this field is optional. These are used to create the work orders. If the district is not entered.Work Order Priority Code. Planner's Priority Enter the code indicating the planner's priority. Entry is validated against the Table File MT Table File. this code represents the main statistical dissection of work order activity. The Standard Job is validated against the Standard Job file (MSF690). The District Code is validated against the System Control file (MSF000). Maintenance Type Enter the maintenance type to be searched.Work Orders . Shutdown Type The code indicating the type of shutdown. Entry is validated against Table File CO . For maintenance-related work orders. This field is validated against the Table File PY . Standard Job and District Enter a Standard Job Number and district. This field is validated against the Table File PY Work Order Priority Code.Plant Shutdown Type. Modifier Code Enter the code used to further define the location specified by the component code.Additional Work Order Selection Parameters This screen is the second in a set of two that enable the entry of selection criteria to review work order information. This field is validated against the Table File SD . Entry is only allowed when a component code has been entered. the district currently in operation is used. Entry is validated against the Table File MO .Component Code. Work Order Type The work order type to be searched. Component Code Enter the Component Code of the equipment sub-assembly from the drop-down list. 3620 Part Causing Failure Enter the identity of the part causing failure. WORK ORDER CLASSIFICATIONS Classification Code Enter the codes to classify the work orders to be searched. Ellipse provides for up to 10 user-defined codes to classify the work order for analysis purposes. Entry is not validated. © 2009 Mincom .248 Work Orders . Only work orders that match the entered codes are selected for display. inclusive. Entry is validated against Table Files W0 to W9. Assigned to Individual This field displays the employee ID of the person to whom the task was assigned. Number of Tasks The number of Tasks contained in the Standard Job Plan. Entry is validated on the Work Order file (MSF620). District This field displays the district. Modifier Code If the component has a modifier identified. Standard Job The Standard Job Number for this task.Summary This screen displays the most significant information in a condensed format for the work order selected for review. © 2009 Mincom .Work Orders . Tasks Completed This field displays the number of tasks completed for the work order and can be modified. Component Code This field displays the Component Code. Definition tab The fields on this tab are described below: Description of Job This field displays the short description of Work Order Equipment Reference This field displays the equipment number or equipment reference for the target being reviewed. the modifier code and description display. Raised Date This field displays the date the work order was created.3620 249 MSM621D .Review Work Order . if one has been assigned to it. The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order Number Enter a Work Order Number to review. 3620 User Status This field displays the code of the currently assigned User Status. DURATION HOURS Estimated (Duration Estimate Hours) This field displays the estimated duration of the activity in hours. otherwise an error or warning message displays when the date is changed. Scheduling tab The fields on this tab are described below: SHUTDOWN DETAILS Equipment (Shutdown Equipment Number) The shutdown equipment number and description to which this schedule applies. Must Start This field displays the indicator that displays Y if it is a requirement for the job to start on the plan start date.250 Work Orders . Type This field displays the type of shutdown the work is included in. © 2009 Mincom . Costs tab The fields on this tab are described below: COSTS Estimated Resource Hours The gross resource hours estimated for the subordinate Work Orders. Planned Start This field displays the date when the job is to start. Number This field displays the shutdown number the work is included in. Actual Resource Hours The total actual resource hours charged to subordinate Work Orders. Planned Finish This field displays the planned finish date. and the units of work completed.3620 251 Actual (Duration Actual Hours) This field displays the actual duration of the activity in hours.Unit of Work. Cost Allocation tab Parent Work Order This field displays the Parent Work Order Project If costing is allocated to a project.Work Orders . Units Required This field displays the number of units of work required to complete the job. Account This field displays the account code to which costs are allocated. Earned Value This field displays the value of the work completed to date and is calculated based on the rate held on the associated value of the unit of work. this field displays the project number to which the cost allocation relates. Units Complete Enter the number of units that have been completed against this work order or project. The following actions are available. Entry is validated against the Table File UW . Unit of Work This field displays the unit of work. Percent Complete This field displays the percentage of this task already completed. Action Enter a valid action code. depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: C Review WO Codes/Completion Information D Review WO Duration Information E Review WO Extended Description F Review WO Completion Comments G Review General Information I Review Issue Requisitions for WO © 2009 Mincom . 252 Work Orders .3620 J Review Issue Requisitions for WO K Review Journal Transactions (All) for WO M Review WO Equipment Tracing O Review WO Materials Information P Review WO Planning Information R Review WO Reallocation Information T Review WO Summary of Tasks U Update Work Order Information X Review Work Order Costs by Category © 2009 Mincom . 3620 253 MSM622A . and has action codes to related displays. This screen displays general information about the work order. © 2009 Mincom .Planning Information • MSM622C . Entry is validated on the Work Order file (MSF620). Description of Job This field displays the short description of Work Order Definition tab The fields on this tab are described below: EQUIPMENT DETAILS Reference (Equipment Reference) The equipment number for the work order.Review Work Order . Location This field displays the new location. Component Code This field displays the Component Code.Review Work Order . This updates the equipment register record when the work order is saved. This screen displays general information. Refer to the following sections for additional information: • MSM622B .Work Orders .Review Work Order/Completion Information The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order Enter a Work Order Number to review. This entry is validated against the Table File EL . District This field displays the district.General Information This screen is one of a set that displays all master file information for a work order.Equipment Location. Modifier Code If the component has a modifier identified. the modifier code and description display. preventative.Equipment Status. Originating Document Type This field displays the document number. Originator Priority This field displays the originator's priority. Examples of maintenance types are breakdown.3620 Status This field displays the status code of the equipment's current status. Date Required This field displays the date the requisition item was required. Work Group The work group to which the crew is assigned. Maintenance Type The code and description that designates the basic category of maintenance being performed. Date Raised This field displays the date the work order was created. This entry is validated against the Table File ES . Originator This field displays the originator. © 2009 Mincom . Assigned To This field displays the assigned responsibility. when items are being reviewed for a issue requisition or work order. This field is displayed when the Standard Job Based check box is clear. Many of the statistical and management reports of the maintenance system use this code as a selection parameter. Detail tab The fields on this tab are described below: MAINTENANCE DETAILS Work Order Type This field displays the work order type. User Status This field displays the code of the currently assigned User Status. Document Number The document number. This field is mandatory when creating a new crew. safety. This updates the equipment register record when the work order is saved.254 Work Orders . RELATED WORKORDER DETAILS Related Work Order This field displays the Work Order related. if one has been assigned to it. depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: C Review WO Codes/Completion Information D Review WO Duration Information E Review WO Extended Description F Review WO Completion Comments I Review Issue Requisitions for WO J Review Journal Transactions for WO L Review Document Info Linked to WO General M Review WO Equipment Tracing O Review WO Materials Information P Review WO Planning Information R Review WO Reallocation Information T Review WO Summary of Tasks © 2009 Mincom . Action Enter a valid action code. Capital Work Order This field displays the Capital Work Order Standard Job The Standard Job Number for this task. The project description displays in the adjacent field.Work Orders .3620 255 ACCOUNT DETAILS Cost Centre/Account This field displays the Cost Centre or Account. The following actions are available. Parent Work Order This field displays the Parent Work Order Project The project number to which the work order belongs. 3620 Review Work Order Costs by Category © 2009 Mincom .256 X Work Orders . Authorised Date This field displays the date the work order was authorised. The second field displays the description.General Information • MSM622C .3620 257 MSM622B .Work Order Code/Completion Information The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order Number Enter a Work Order Number to review. Authorised By This field displays the person who authorised the work order. Entry is validated on the Work Order file (MSF620).Review Work Order .Review Work Order . © 2009 Mincom . Planner Priority This field displays the priority set by the person who planned the job.Planning Information This screen is one of a set that displays all master file information for a work order. Definition tab The fields on this tab are described below: EQUIPMENT DETAILS Reference (Equipment Reference) The number of the equipment for the relevant work order. Work Group The work group to which the crew is assigned. This screen displays the planning information for the work order as a whole. Refer to the following sections for additional information: • MSM622A . This screen displays planning information and has action codes to related displays. This field is mandatory when creating a new crew. Originators Priority This field displays the originator's priority. Assign To This field displays the identification of the person to whom the task is assigned.Work Orders . 258 Work Orders . Maintenance Type The code and description that designates the basic category of maintenance being performed. This field is displayed when the Standard Job Based check box is clear. Estimated Equipment The estimated cost of equipment required to fulfil the work order. Many of the statistical and management reports of the maintenance system use this code as a selection parameter. safety. preventative.3620 Number of Tasks This field displays the number of tasks on the work order and can be modified. Actual Material The actual costs for materials required to fulfil the work order. Estimated Material The estimated cost of material required to fulfil the work order. Costs tab The fields on this tab are described below: COSTS Estimated Resource Hours The gross resource hours estimated for the subordinate Work Orders. User Status This field displays the code of the currently assigned User Status. Complete Tasks This field displays the number of tasks completed for the work order and can be modified. Examples of maintenance types are breakdown. and the units of work completed. © 2009 Mincom . Estimated Resource The estimated cost of resources required to fulfil the work order. Actual Resource Hours The total actual resource hours charged to subordinate Work Orders. Actual Resource The actual costs for resources required to fulfil the work order. Earned Value This field displays the value of the work completed to date and is calculated based on the rate held on the associated value of the unit of work. Actual Other The actual costs of other costs required to fulfil the work order. DURATION Estimated Duration Hours (Duration Estimate Hours) This field displays the estimated duration of the activity in hours. Entry is validated against the Table File UW . % Complete (Percentage Complete) This field displays the percentage of work completed to date for the corresponding work order/task/project.Work Orders . if the Show Work in Process is set to Yes on the District Control file.3620 259 Actual Equipment The actual costs for equipment required to fulfil the work order.Unit of Work. Estimated Total The total of estimated costs. Actual Duration Hours (Duration Actual Hours) This field displays the actual duration of the activity in hours. Estimated Other The estimated cost of other costs required to fulfil the work order. Unit of Work This field displays the unit of work. Units Required This field displays the number of units of work required to complete the job. Notes: The % Complete field displays when using daily view. Actual Total The total of actual costs. © 2009 Mincom . Units Complete Enter the number of units that have been completed against this work order or project. The following actions are available.000 km. STATISTICS Statistic Type (Statistic Type) The primary Operating Statistic type (from the Table File SS . Statistic Value The value of this statistic when work should start. Equipment (Shutdown Equipment Number) The shutdown equipment number and description to which this schedule applies. Planned Finish Date This field displays the planned finish date. Action Enter a valid action code. for example 50. Type This field displays the type of shutdown the work is included in. Scheduling The fields on this tab are described below: PLANNING DATES Planned Start Date This field displays the date when the job is to start.260 Work Orders . SHUTDOWN DETAILS Number This field displays the shutdown number the work is included in. 10.Operating Statistic Type) if the MST is scheduled based upon statistics.3620 Actual Cost Realloc The total of the costs reallocated. depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: C Review WO Codes/Completion Information D Review WO Duration Information E Review WO Extended Description F Review WO Completion Comments © 2009 Mincom .000 hr. X Review Work Order Costs by Category © 2009 Mincom . Is to be processed before any other action code entered simultaneously.3620 261 G Review WO General Information I Review Issue Requisitions for WO J Review Journal Transactions for WO M Review WO Equipment Tracing O Review WO Materials Information R Review WO Reallocation Information T Review WO Summary of Tasks.Work Orders . Review work order task details for single task work order. Entry in this field is controlled by the Complete menu option. Date Completed This field displays the date when all work related to this work order was completed.Planning Information (MSM622B) The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order Enter a Work Order number. Location This field displays the location code relevant to this equipment item. Work Order Details tab The fields on this tab are described below: EQUIPMENT DETAILS Reference (Equipment Reference) The number of the equipment for the relevant work order. © 2009 Mincom .General Information (MSM622A) • Review Work Order . The code description displays in the adjacent field. Entry in this field is controlled by the Complete menu option. Completion Code This field displays the completion code depending on whether the work order was closed. Completed By This field displays the ID of the employee who performed the work or closed the work order. Reference to the following sections for additional information: • Review Work Order . This screen displays codes. This screen displays all the codes and related descriptions pertaining to the completion of the job.3620 MSM622C . with English-language descriptions.Review Work Order Code/Completion Information This screen is one of a set that displays all master file information for a work order.262 Work Orders . Equipment Status The current equipment status code. The second field displays the description. cancelled or deferred. pertaining to the completion of the job. Examples of maintenance types are breakdown. Action Enter a valid action code. preventative. The following actions are available. safety.3620 263 Entry in this field is controlled by the Complete menu option. Statistic Type The operating statistic code and value used as an indicator of the expected life of equipment fitted in this installation position. Maintenance Type The code and description that designates the basic category of maintenance being performed.Work Orders . depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: 9 Review Reference Codes D Review WO Duration Information E Review WO Extended Description F Review WO Completion Comments G Review WO General Information I Review Issue Requisitions for WO J Review Journal Transactions for WO M Review WO Equipment Tracing © 2009 Mincom . Job Codes tab The fields on this tab are described below: Job Code Type This field displays the job code type that identifies the type of sub-task being undertaken as part of the repair task. This field is displayed when the Standard Job Based check box is clear. Job Code Description This field displays the job description code that identifies the type of sub-task being undertaken as part of the repair task. Job Code This field displays the job description code that identifies the type of sub-task being undertaken as part of the repair task. Many of the statistical and management reports of the maintenance system use this code as a selection parameter. Paper History Kept This field displays indicator shows paper history is kept for review. 264 Work Orders .3620 O Review WO Materials Information P Review WO Planning Information R Review WO Reallocation Information T Review WO Summary of Tasks X Review Work Order Costs by Category © 2009 Mincom . © 2009 Mincom . It displays duration information of a work order. The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order Number Enter a Work Order number. This screen displays the information generally input in originally entering a work order for future performance. Reference should also be made to screens MSM622A. MSM622C.3620 265 MSM622D .Work Orders . MSM622B.Review Duration Information This screen is one of a set that displays all master file information for a work order. The description displays on the right. depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: A Review APL for Task I Review Issue Requisitions for WO J Review Job Instructions for Task R Review Task Details © 2009 Mincom .266 Work Orders .3620 MSM624A . The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order Enter the Work Order Number to restart the review. You can enter a new Work Order Number to restart display.Summary of Tasks This screen displays a summary of all tasks belonging to a selected work order. The work order is validated against the Work Order master file for the district selected. The following actions are available. Plan Start Date This field displays the date when the job is to start.Review Work Order . Status This field displays the status of Task of Work Order. Action Enter a valid action code. Work Centre This field displays the work centre ID where each task belongs. Work Group This field displays the work group ID where each task belongs. Task The work order task number. Review Work Order Task Information This screen displays the full details of a task belonging to a selected work order. The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order Number Enter the Work Order Number to restart the review. If entered. Definition tab Work Group or Centre This field displays the Work Group or Work Centre for current Work Order Task. the task is validated on the Work Order Task master file.3620 267 MSM624B . Job Description Code This field displays the job description code that identifies the type of sub-task being undertaken as part of the repair task. Assign to Individual This field displays the employee ID of the person to whom the task was assigned. If this field is left blank the first task for the work order is reviewed. © 2009 Mincom . Work Order Task Enter the Task Number of the work order for review.Work Orders . The work order is validated against the Work Order master file for the district selected. Enter a new Work Order Number and Task Number to restart display. Valid values are: • Y (Linked) • N (Not linked) • Space (Linked). The texts of these safety instructions are held in a standard text file (SI). Safety Instruction Code The safety instruction code and description for the safety instructions to be performed before the job starts. Linked Task This field displays a value to link the previous task. Completion Instruction Code This field displays the Completion Instruction Code to indicate the completion instructions to be performed after the job is completed. 268 Work Orders . The completion text is held in a standard text file (CC). Must Start This field displays the indicator that displays Y if it is a requirement for the job to start on the plan start date. APL Component A code indicating the subassembly. This field can be updated by clicking the Schedule button. © 2009 Mincom . otherwise an error or warning message displays when the date is changed. such as circle ABCDEF or brush length **** mm. Float Days This field displays the number of days when the job can remain unactioned without impacting related tasks. Sequence The sequence number used to distinguish the APL from others. Modifier This field displays the Modifier Code for an equipment-based task. Unit of Work This field displays the unit of work required to complete the Task. Estimated Machine Hours This field displays the number of estimated hours any machinery will be required to operate for this Standard Job Task. Units Required This field displays the number of units of work required to complete the job. Units Complete This field displays the units of work already completed for this task. Plan Finish Date The date when the task is expected to be completed.3620 Completion Text Code The completion text code and title for the text that prints on the right side of maintenance schedules for easy return of completion information. Planning tab The fields on this tab are described below: Plan Start Date The planned start date of the task. Crew This field displays the crew planned to do the work. Resourcing tab The fields on this tab are described below: Resource Class This column displays the resource class.Work Orders .3620 269 % Complete (Percentage Complete) This field displays the percentage of work completed to date for the corresponding work order/task/project. The following actions are available. Action Enter a valid action code. if the Show Work in Process is set to Yes on the District Control file. Estimated Hour The hours estimated for the resource type to complete the selected scheduled task. Actual Hours This field displays the total actual resource hours charged to subordinate Work Orders. Scheduled Units/Day This field displays the rate of processing in units of work per day. depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: A Review APL for Task C Review Completion Task Text I Review Issues Requisitions for WO J Review Job Instructions for Task P Print APL for Task Q Review Repair Requests © 2009 Mincom . Resource Code This field displays the resource code. Notes: The % Complete field displays when using daily view. If the employee doesn't have a default prefix. If both fields are left blank. If entered. the work order prefix can optionally be entered. • MSF625 Parent Work Order © 2009 Mincom . the record must be on the appropriate file. The fields on this screen are described below: Option Enter the Option for the action required. If a prefix only is entered. Parent Work Order Number or Prefix For the Create (addition) option. the parent work order is assigned from the next available number with no prefix. the parent work order number is mandatory and must be on file.3620 MSM625A . Ellipse assigns the next available number with the prefix. Ellipse assigns the parent work order number from the next available number and prefix using the employee's default prefix. If entered.270 Work Orders . If it is left blank. It enables user to select of the type of action to be performed and enter the identification of an existing record. • MSF695 Parent Standard Job Parent Work Order Either of this field or Parent Standard Job can be entered in Create mode to display information from the files to assist in creating the new parent work order.Maintain Parent Work Order Information This screen is a sub-menu. the parent work order number can be entered or left blank. For the Modify and Delete options. COPY EXISTING Parent Standard Job Either of this field or Parent Work Order can be entered in Create mode to display information from the files to assist in creating the new parent work order. either a parent standard job or existing parent work order. the record must be on the appropriate file. to use as a skeleton. Planned Start Date/Planned Finish Date Enter the dates when work on the first subordinate work order is planned to commence and the date when work on the last is planned to finish. Date Required By Enter the date the work order is required to be completed by the originator. This screen displays either blank. Date Raised Enter the date the job is initiated. A message indicates whether: Extended Description Exists or Extended Description Does Not Exist The fields on this screen are described below: Parent Work Order This field displays the Parent Work Order Description Enter a short description to describe the job.3620 271 MSM625B . These fields act as a guide in the entry of similar fields on subordinate work orders.Work Orders . and the date on which authorisation took place. if the entire job pertains to a single piece of equipment. This field is mandatory. The number of existing subordinate jobs exists on this screen for reference purposes. Originator Enter the code of the person initiating this job. This field is optional. Equipment Number or Reference Enter the equipment ID (for reference purposes). Authorised By/Date Authorised Enter the code of the person authorising this job. modify or delete parent work orders.Parent Work Order This screen is used to create. This field is optional © 2009 Mincom . depending on your company's procedures. Information can be changed by overtyping. or with information from the Parent Standard Job file (MSF695) or Parent Work Order file (MSF625). The effect of entry of authorisation varies. Maintain Parent Work Orders Information screen. © 2009 Mincom .272 Work Orders . This field displays only when delete mode is selected on the MSM625A .3620 Confirm Deletion Enter Y to delete the displayed parent work order. User can enter a combination of Prefix. Equipment Reference and Originator except for option 1. Entry is validated against the Equipment Register file (MSF600). The originator is validated against the Employee Master file. You cannot enter both a Parent WO number and a Parent WO Prefix. according to the equipment numbering standards. Refer to the Work Order Authorisation procedures for details on the security of this field. The fields on this screen are described below: Option Enter the Option for the action required. Parent Work Order Status Enter a parent work order status to restrict the review to this code. It allows selection of parent work orders for review. User can enter a combination of Prefix. When you save the details entered on the Parent WO tab. User can enter a combination of Prefix. User can enter a combination of Prefix. the system allocates the next available Parent Work Order with that prefix. Equipment Reference and Originator except for option 1.3620 273 MSM626A . Equipment Reference and Originator except for option 1. Equipment Reference Enter an Equipment Reference.Work Orders .Review of Parent Work Orders This is a sub-menu. Equipment Reference and Originator except for option 1. Parent Work Order (Parent Work Order) Enter a full or partial Parent Work Order number. Parent Work Order Prefix (Parent Work Order Prefix) Enter a prefix. This field is mandatory for option 1. Originator Enter the originator's responsibility code for the Work Order. © 2009 Mincom . Planned Finished Date This field displays the date when the job is scheduled to finish.3620 MSM626B . Authorised By This field displays the person who authorised the work order. Description of Job This field displays the short description of Work Order General tab The fields on this tab are described below: Originator This field displays the originator. Date Raised This field displays the date the work order was created.274 Work Orders . Planned Start Date This field displays the date when the job is to start.Review Parent Work Order Detail This screen displays all information for a selected parent work order. The fields on this screen are described below: Parent Work Order Enter a parent work order to restart the review. Date Required By This field displays the date the work order is required to be completed by the originator. Equipment Reference This field displays the equipment reference to be reviewed. Date Authorised This field displays the date the work order was authorised. Cost of Subordinates tab The fields on this tab are described below: © 2009 Mincom . 3620 275 Estimated Resource Hours The gross resource hours estimated for the subordinate Work Orders. Resource Hours of Subordinates tab © 2009 Mincom .Work Orders . Estimated Other Costs The estimated other costs recorded on the subordinate Work Orders. Material Costs The actual costs for materials required to fulfil the work order. Actual Resource Hours The total actual resource hours charged to subordinate Work Orders. Actual Other Costs The estimated other costs recorded on the subordinate Work Orders. Actual Equipment Costs The actual costs for equipment required to fulfil the work order. Actual Total Costs The total actual costs recorded on the subordinate Work Orders. Estimated Equipment Costs The estimated costs for equipment recorded on the subordinate Work Orders. The fields on this screen are described below: Prefix Enter a prefix to restart the review. an equipment reference or an originator.Summary of Parent Work Orders This screen displays summary information of parent work orders matching a work order number prefix. depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: R Review Parent Work Order S Select Work Orders W Review Summary of Subordinate Work Orders © 2009 Mincom . The following actions are available. Parent Work Order This field displays the Parent Work Order Action Enter a valid action code. This field can be changed as Equipment Reference or Originator.3620 MSM626C .276 Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom . If an associated value on the SH table file designates the code as a Production Allocation Shift Code. Shift Select the code of the shift in which the incident took place from the drop-down list. enter the date that the incident took place. Entry is validated against either MSF810 or the Employee Master File for integrated payroll users. If maintaining or deleting an existing logsheet entry. Originator Enter or right-click to search for a Responsibility Code to restrict selection of items to only those originated by that person.3620 277 MSM627A . Equipment Reference Enter or right-click and search for an equipment ID to restrict selection of items to only those pertaining to the entered equipment. enter the date of the incident.Maintain Incident Logsheets Use MSM627A to enter selection criteria to create. This field can only be entered in conjunction with the Modify and Delete options. Date If creating a logsheet entry.Work Orders . The fields on this screen are described below: Option Enter one of the following options: Create Logsheet Entries Select this option to create a new logsheet entry. Delete Logsheet Entries Select this option to delete a logsheet entry which is no longer required. This field can only be entered in conjunction with the Modify and Delete options. The default is today's date. Modify Logsheet Entries Select this option to modify an existing logsheet entry. modify or delete Incident Logsheet entries. Entry is validated against the Work Group master file MSF720. the shift code will not be allowed. Work Group Enter or right-click and search for the code of the Work Group performing the work when the incident took place. Entry is validated against Table File SH. 3620 Entry is validated against MSF600. Incident Status Select one of the following options to restrict the search and display of logsheet entries to those with a status that corresponds to the code entered: C Closed O Open If left blank.278 Work Orders . regardless of their status. all entries that satisfy the selection criteria are displayed. © 2009 Mincom . Work Orders . Date The date when the incident started. The default is the current time. Incident Logsheet Entries are displayed based on the selection criteria entered in MSM627A.Create/Modify/Delete Incident Logsheet Entries Use MSM627B to create. in the format HH:MM. Entry is mandatory if a Standard Job for the Incident Short Form Work Order is not available. Shift The shift code of the shift during which the incident occurred. Work Order Prefix Enter a valid work order prefix to apply to the creation of Work Orders related to the incidents raised.3620 279 MSM627B . Incident Description Enter a short description of the incident. Start Time Enter the time that the incident occurred. © 2009 Mincom . The fields on this screen are described below: Work Group The responsible Work Group when the incident occurred. This entry defaults from the selection criteria entered in MSM627A. This entry defaults from the selection criteria entered in MSM627A. modify. Valid work Order prefixes and associated last used Sequence Numbers are held on the System Control file (MSF000). This entry defaults from the selection criteria entered in MSM627A. This window also provides a link to enable the creation of Work Orders in relation to a particular incident. Maintenance Type Enter the Maintenance Type Code for this incident from the drop-down list. and delete Incident Logsheet Entries for an incident occurring during a particular shift for a specific Work Group. it is optional. Job Duration Code Select the Job Duration Code for the incident from the drop-down list. This field can only be completed if a Component Code has been entered. Entry is validated against Table File JI. Entry is mandatory if a Work Order is to be raised in relation to the incident. Otherwise. End Time Enter the time at which the incident ended. This field can only be completed if an Equipment Reference has been entered. Entry is optional. The combination of Equipment/Component/Modifier is also validated against the Equipment Profile. it is optional.3620 This field is validated against Table File MT. Entry is validated against Table File MO.280 Work Orders . Entry is mandatory if a Work Order is to be raised in relation to the Incident. Modifier Select the Modifier Code for the component related to the incident from the drop-down list. Entry is validated against Table File CO. Component Enter the ID of the component related to the incident from the drop-down list. Otherwise. © 2009 Mincom . the incident is independent of the Work Order and changes to the JDC will not flow on to any Work Order based upon this Work Order. Once it has been created. Ellipse will calculate the end time accordingly. If this field is left blank and the Duration Hours field is completed. Originator Id Enter the Responsibility Code of the person raising the incident from the drop-down list. Entry is mandatory if a work order is to be raised in relation to the incident. the JDC is attached to the newly created Work Order. Equipment Number or Reference Enter or right-click and search for the Equipment Number or Reference ID of the equipment related to the incident. if it exists. in the format HH:MM. for integrated Payroll users. If a Work Order is to be raised. Status The status of the incident logsheet entry. Entry is optional. Otherwise. it is optional and is validated against Table File RC or the Employee Master File. 3620 281 Duration Hours Enter a number in the range 0 to 99999. Ellipse will default the Standard Job according to the Work Order prefix entered. Entry is optional. if one was created. If Work Order creation is required and no Standard Job is entered. Work Order This field displays the work order created from this incident. The following actions are available.MSM621D W Create/maintain incident work order . Standard Job Enter or right-click and search for the Standard Job Number to be used as a template for the creation of Work Orders in relation to the incident. This field is mandatory if action code C .MSM633A O Reopen incident R Review work order details . If both the End Time and Duration Hours fields are completed. Corrective Action The corrective action taken in relation to the incident.MSO62T B Auto WO creation use incident descript . If this field is left blank and the End Time field is completed.MSO62T C Close incident D Delete incident E Maintain extended description .95. Ellipse will verify that the entries are correct and correspond to each other. depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: A Auto WO creation use default descript . to indicate the number of hours taken by the incident.Work Orders .MSM096A H Review equipment history . the system will calculate the duration hours accordingly. Entry is optional and is validated against the Standard Job Master file. Action Enter a valid action code.Close incident is selected in the Action field.MSM62TA © 2009 Mincom . or enter the hours in the format HH:MM. An error message will display if a discrepancy occurs. 3620 MSM628A . Req Type This field displays the requisition type code for which requisitions are displayed. Action Enter a valid action code. Type) is shown on the screen.282 Work Orders . The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order Enter the work order against that issuing and purchasing information is required to be displayed. to distinguish between purchase requisitions (P) and issue requisitions (I). This screen displays all issue and purchase requisitions with a cost allocation that includes the selected work order. The purchase order and item is shown for requisitions that have been placed as order in addition to the current purchasing details. depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: A Review Requisition cost Allocations © 2009 Mincom . These details include: • the date ordered and the date due • the quantity ordered and received • the allocated and total value of the item A requisition type (Req. The following actions are available. Req. Requisition types are: P Purchase requisitions I Warehouse requisitions All Requisitions of any type Supplier This field displays the supplier name for the requisition item.Review Work Order Materials Status This screen displays materials information in relation to issue requisitions and direct charge items required for a work order. Entry is validated on the Work Order file (MSF620). Number This field displays the requisition number of the requisition. Work Orders .3620 283 E Review Requisition Extended Description I Review Requisition Item Detail O Review Purchase Order Item Detail R Review Requisition Header Details © 2009 Mincom . Closed • A .Modify Work Order . The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order This field displays the work order number entered on the MSM620A .3620 MSM62AA . Tabs • Work Order Details • Equipment Details Work Order Details tab The fields on this tab are described below: Cost Centre/Account Enter the cost centre or account to which the job is to be charged.284 Work Orders . This field is mandatory if the work order is capital. This field is not available when the Utilities Asset © 2009 Mincom . District The district code associated with the work order.Open • C . Standard Job The number of the standard job to which the work order is linked.Authorised Description Enter a short description of the reason for the job. This field is mandatory if equipment number and project number are not provided.General Information Use this screen to update general information related to a Work Order. Printer Enter the project number to review the project general information. This code is used to create the General Ledger number when only the work order number is entered in an accounting transaction. If the work order is capital and has un-capitalised costs. Status This field displays the status of the project: • O . the cost centre/account cannot be changed.Maintain Complete Work Order Information screen. Maintenance Type. This date can not be a future date.User Work Order Status. This field is optional. Date Required Enter the date the work order is required to be completed by the originator.Work Order Priority Code. If the work order has associated costs. Date Raised Enter the date the work order was created.3620 285 Accounting Module is installed. This field is optional. however a work group/work centre and/or an assigned to person must be entered. The priority code numbers are between 1 and 99 inclusive.Work Orders . Entry is validated against the Table File . Work Order Type Enter the Work Order Type or select a valid entry from the Table File WO .WS . Originator Priority The code indicating the originator's priority. Default is today's date if left blank.Work Order Type. If the Maintenance Scheduling (3701) module is installed when you enter the work group the work order is scheduled when a scheduling run is processed for this work group. Capital Work Order Enter Y to indicate this is a capital work order or N to indicate an operating work order. Parent Work Order Enter the number if the work order belongs to a parent work order. no estimate items are present and where Job type is derived from the cost centre. costs exist against the work order. This field is validated against the Table File PY . If this field is left blank the work group of the first work order task created with a work group defaults. Entry is validated against the Work Group master file. it cannot be set as a capital work order. A capital work order must be capitalised (costs cleared from the Capital Work in Progress accounts and posted to the Fixed Asset Register) before it can be finalised. Maintenance Type Enter the maintenance type or select a valid entry from the Table File MT . Originator Enter the Employee Id of the person who created the Work Order. User Status The user-defined status code. This relationship accumulates the costs incurred by this work order at the parent work order level and the work order. Work Group Enter the work group this job is assigned. © 2009 Mincom . Assigned To Enter the Employee Id of the person to whom the work order is assigned. entry of a project is mandatory and the entered project must be a capital project. Project Enter the project number if this work order belongs to a project.Equipment Status. removed or modified.Originating Document. as well as being accumulated on the work order itself. Equipment Details tab The fields on this tab are described below: Reference Enter the equipment id on which the job will be performed.Modifier Code. Number This field displays the code selected in the Originating Document Type field. batch program MSB664 . Originating Document Type Enter a valid originating document type to indicate the original source of the job. A message is displayed indicating whether the program has been successfully submitted or not. This relationship accumulates all costs incurred by the work order against the Project Number and its parent projects. When the project number on a work order with existing costs is added.3620 Related Work Order This field is optional and is a reference between two work orders.Update Project Costs is submitted online to reallocate the work order costs to the appropriate project(s).Component Code. Entry is only allowed when a component code has been entered.Equipment Location. Component Code Enter a valid component code or select an entry from the Table File CO .286 Work Orders . If MS (Maintenance Schedule) or CM (Condition Monitoring Test) are selected the document number identifies the schedule or condition test. Modifier Code Enter the code used to further define the location specified by the component code. Entry is validated against the Table File MO . The following actions are available. depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: © 2009 Mincom . Equipment Status Enter a valid equipment status or select from the Table File ES . Action Enter a valid action code. Location Enter a valid location or select from the Table File EL . Entry is validated against the Table File OD . If the work order is capital. The MSM62DA .summary screen displays.Maintain Work Order Billing Information screen displays. T Maintain WO Task Details.Maintain Work Order Code Completion Information screen displays.Maintain Text screen displays. The MSM621C .Planning Information screen displays. The MSM58JA . W Print Work Order Details.Modify Work Order Task Information screen displays. The MSM140A . V Review Open/Authorised Work Orders for Eq/Comp/Mod. The MSM62EA . K Print WO Job Card.Maintain Equipment Tracing For Work Order screen displays. The MSM623A .Review Std Job Plans/Parent Std Jobs/Std Jobs Summary screen displays. M Maintain WO Equipment Tracing Info. R Maintain WO Reallocation Information. The MSM692D . I Create Issue Requisitions for WO.Maintain Work Order . D Maintain WO Duration Information. E Maintain WO Extended Description. The MSM62CA .Review Work Order Information . The MSM096B . P Maintain WO Planning Information. The MSM62BA .Work Orders . The MSM62RA .Maintain Warehouse Requisition . J Review Standard Jobs for Task List. A message is returned Job Submitted for Processing L Maintain Document Info Linked to WO General. A message is returned Job Submitted For Processing.3620 287 C Maintain WO Completion Information.Maintain Entity To Document Link screen displays.Maintain Job Duration Information screen displays. © 2009 Mincom .Normal Issue screen displays. It is not possible to finalize all Subsystems when the Work Order is Capital and has associated costs. Once a subsystem is finalized. Allowable entries are Y or N. The initial default for all subsystem finalization flags is N. Refer to screen MSM62CA .for further information regarding the Work Order finalization flag and its effect on the subsystem finalization flags. If all installed subsystems except General Ledger are finalized. The current list of such subsystems is as follows : • Supply • Accounts Payable • Payroll • Labour Costing • Journal Holding • Accounts Receivable • General Ledger • Production Statistics By setting the corresponding Finalization flag to Y for an individual subsystem. it may not be unfinalized (UNLESS the reallocation frequency is C (Cyclic). The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order Number The identifying number of the work order.288 Work Orders . However.3620 MSM62CB . If all Installed Subsystems are Finalized. © 2009 Mincom . no further costs may be accrued against the work order by functions within that subsystem. and the Units Invoiced/Charged is zero). the Actual Cost Reallocated is zero. Subsystem Finalization Flag Each installed Ellipse subsystem. will have a corresponding subsystem finalization flag field. or the frequency is E (End). which allows costing against a Work Order. then the Work Order in Total is also Finalized. This screen displays the current Costing Finalization flag settings for each of the installed Ellipse subsystems. then the General Ledger subsystem will also be finalized. on a subsystem basis.Work Order Subsystem Finalization This screen provides for the maintenance of the Costing Finalization flags. by this program (resulting in all subsystems being finalized).Work Order Code/Completion Information . and allows finalization of the work order for one or more of these subsystems. programs from other subsystems may successfully cost to that work order. providing that their finalization flag is set to N. Work Orders .3620 289 © 2009 Mincom . Equipment Register.Equipment Status table file on MSF010. as required.Equipment Register. If the work order has a date out of service or a date completed recorded. The date out of service takes precedence over the date completed. The current location of the equipment reference displays from the MSF600 . Entry is mandatory if this date is not available from the work order to be actioned. © 2009 Mincom . Entry is validated against the ES .Maintain Equipment Tracing for Work Order Use this screen to enter equipment tracing information for rotable equipment for a work order. The fitted equipment reference entered is validated against the MFS600 .Equipment Register to determine if it exists and is traceable. The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order This field displays the work order with the equipment tracing information. The current status of the equipment reference from the MSF600 . Location This field displays the location of the equipment reference entered on the work order being processed. Entry is validated against the EL . Status This field displays the status of the equipment reference entered on the work order being processed. The Status and Location fields can only be completed if you also entered an equipment reference on the work order. The Status and Location fields can only be completed if you also entered an Equipment Reference on the Work Order. Fitted Equipment Reference Enter the fitted equipment reference to be actioned.Equipment Register.3620 MSM62DA .290 Work Orders .Equipment Location table file on MSF010. Equipment This field displays the equipment being traced. The entered fitted equipment reference is traceable if the fitted equipment reference has the traceable flag set to Y on the MFS600 . this date displays in this field.Equipment Register. The entered fitted equipment reference is traceable if the fitted equipment reference has the traceable flag set to Y on the MFS600 . Date Enter or change the date of the action. the valid tracing actions are: © 2009 Mincom .3620 291 This field is mandatory. The Status and Location fields can only be completed if you entered an equipment reference on the work order.Equipment Status table file on MSF010.rebuild in situ or N . This field is mandatory if you entered data in either the Fitted Equipment Reference or an Installation Position Equipment fields. If the tracing action is repair unfitted. The current status of the equipment reference from the MSF600 . If the item of equipment is in store.repair in situ has been entered. This field is validated against TA – Tracing Actions table file on MSF010. Fitted Tag Enter the serviceable or unserviceable tag number of the fitted equipment.Equipment Register.equipment register. The current location of the equipment reference displays from the MSF600 . Fitted Location Enter the location of the equipment reference entered on the work order being processed. Entry is validated against the EL . the valid combinations of the tracing action codes differ depending on whether the fitted equipment is in store or not. Reset Schedule Enter a valid code to reset or review the maintenance schedule tasks for the installation position reference entered.Equipment Location table file on MSF010. Fitted Status Enter the status of the equipment reference entered on the work order being processed. R Review Required Tracing Action Enter the tracing action code for the record being updated.fitment. The following codes can be entered: Y Reset Required N No reset or review required. Entry is only allowed where a tracing action of B .Work Orders . L . Entry is validated against the ES . Component Code table file on MSF010. This field is mandatory. the valid tracing actions are: B Fitment D Rebuilt Offsite E Rebuilt Onsite H Exchange I Scrap J Disassemble K Sold O Repair Unfitted Tracing Action Description This field displays the description of the tracing action.292 Work Orders . Installation Tag Enter the serviceable or unserviceable tag number of the installation position equipment where the item of equipment is being fitted or defitted. Installation Component Enter the Component Code for where the fitted equipment is being traced. This field is validated against the MSF600 Equipment Register. You cannot complete this field if the installation position equipment is itself currently fitted to another item of equipment. Refer to the equipment numbering standards for information about entry format. Entry is validated against the MSF601 . This field is validated against the CO .3620 B Fitment I Scrap K Sold N Repair in Situ If the item of equipment is not in store. If multiple entries are made for one equipment reference. Installation Position Equipment Enter the equipment reference for where the fitted equipment is being traced. the subsequent lines can have blank equipment references and the screen will copy down.Alternate Equipment Register Reference file to ensure the tag number is not linked to another item of equipment. © 2009 Mincom . 3620 293 The default is the value held for the fitted equipment entered. This field is mandatory. depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: A Defit all Currently Fitted Equipment C Select Currently Fitted Equipment to Defit . or if it exists but the rotable equipment indicator is 4 as tracing is not allowed in this installation position.MSM62UA D Delete tracing incident © 2009 Mincom . The Installation Position Equipment. Installation Modifier Enter the component modifier code for where the fitted equipment is being traced. Note: An installation position reference is mandatory if one of the following tracing actions is entered: B Fitment C Defitment L Rebuild in Situ N Repair in Situ You cannot complete these fields if one of the following tracing actions are entered: D Rebuild Offsite E Rebuild Onsite H Exchange I Scrap J Disassemble K Sold O Repair Unfitted Action Enter a valid action code.Work Orders . This field is validated against the MO . Installation Component and Installation Modifier fields entered are validated against the MSF610 .Equipment Group Identifier Component file if the equipment reference or its EGI has the validate profile flag set on the MSF617 .Modifier Code table file on MSF010. component code and modifier code as a whole. The entered Installation position reference will not be accepted if it does not exist. Note: The installation position refers to the equipment reference. The following actions are available.Equipment Profile file. 294 R Work Orders .3620 Review Equipment Holes and Double Fitments .MSM656A © 2009 Mincom . or if the start/stop times are not significant. Plant Shutdown ID This field displays the shutdown number of the work orders. it is set to the total. Enter the start/stop times only. a warning is given. Date Enter the date that the delay or work activity start. If the Hours field is blank. blank it out. Hours/Start Time/Stop Time Enter the duration of the activity in one of a number of ways. This entry is validated on the Table File JI . It assumes that stop time is no more than one day after start time. Estimated Job Duration This field displays the time estimated to complete the job. if the total of duration details already on file agrees with the total initially displayed. © 2009 Mincom . The work order description displays to the right. If all three fields are entered.Work Orders . Changing or adding details also update this total. It does not have to balance with the sum of detailed durations. Actual Job Duration Enter the total time taken to complete the job. The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order This field displays the work order number. and the computed elapsed time does not agree with the entered elapsed time. to have the program calculate the elapsed hours. both start and stop times are mandatory. Estimated duration is entered when the work order is created or planned and appears on this screen for reference.Job Duration Code.3620 295 MSM62EA . If left blank. To reset this total to the total of details. Enter elapsed time in the Hours column.Modify Job Duration Information This screen allows duration information (elapsed time) for a work order to be entered. if more than 24 hours. Duration Delay Code Enter the delay or duration code or select from the drop-down list. Whole numbers without a delimiter are taken as hours. The 24-hour clock applies to time-of-day fields. The program does not check for hours or times overlapping.3620 Elapsed time and time of day can be entered in HHH:MM formats.296 Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom . this field does not require entry.Main Menu screen.Work Orders . For work orders which have a single task. it can also be entered in the subsequent screen listed above. entry is optional. all tasks for the work order will be displayed on the Complete Work Order Tasks screen (MSM62FB). If the task number is left blank. This field is mandatory. Task Number Enter the appropriate task number.Maintain Work Order Task Completion Information This screen is selected from MSM000B .3620 297 MSM62FA . For Option 1. The fields on this screen are described below: Option Enter the Option for the action required. Work Order Number Enter a Work Order number. © 2009 Mincom . That is to be updated. Entry is validated against the Employee master file. for work orders that are unrelated to units of work but that are multi-task. Action Enter a valid action code. The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order Number Enter the Work Order Number to be updated.298 Work Orders . Entry is validated against the Table File also RC Table File.3620 MSM62FB . This field is mandatory Description This field displays the description of this job. The following actions are available. If the Completed By field is filled in and this field is left blank. if it has not been previously entered. This field is mandatory Completed Date Enter the date of completion of the task. style. today's date is assumed. Completion Code Enter the code indicating the type. depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: C Maintain Task Completion Text © 2009 Mincom .Complete Work Order Tasks This screen enables user to complete work order tasks. or reason for completion. This field is validated against the Table File SC . Completed By Enter the corrected employee code.Maintenance Completion Status Codes. Work Orders . This field is optional Work Order Enter a valid Work Order Number to be selected for printing. User can the select further work orders and tasks for printing. This field is optional. Otherwise. Defaults can be defined for the following fields via the Standard Default facility (MSM051A). • Descriptions of the work order or task are displayed for confirmation prior to processing. This field is mandatory if a Task Number is entered. Printer . This field is optional © 2009 Mincom .3620 299 MSM62GA . Entry is validated against the Table File PR Table File. Entry is validated against the Work Order master file.Printer-Name 1 If you enter a Work Order Number without a task. If you enter a work order and task. Entry is validated against the Work Order Task master file. Print Tasks Enter Y to obtain summary details of all tasks pertaining to a Work Order. a request is submitted for the Print Work Order Details program (MSR620). the screen re-displays blank with the ID of the previously selected printer. a request is submitted for the Print Job Card Details program (MSR621). Otherwise it gets details for the particular Work Order. User can enter work orders and tasks to be printed to a nominated printer. Entry is not applicable when a valid Task Number belonging to the Work Order Number is entered. This field is optional Description This field displays a description of the task.Print Selected Work Orders and/or Tasks This screen enables user to print selected work orders and tasks in a random basis. Task Enter a valid Task Number belonging to the Work Order Number entered. After successful execution. The fields on this screen are described below: Printer ID Enter a valid printer name. • A message displays after processing. This screen displays blank. indicating whether or not submission of jobs was successful. User does not have to complete this field when user create a work from a Maintenance Schedule Task.Standard Job Review Menu screen to search for the Standard Job.3620 MSM62HA . The work group defaults to that on the Standard if it is recorded on the Standard Job. depending on the value of the Costing flag: © 2009 Mincom . If you are creating work orders for a continuous asset type of equipment. The valid Work Order Number prefixes are held on the System Control file (MSF000). Work Group Enter the code of the work group responsible for performing this task. Equipment Details tab Equipment Reference Enter the ID of the equipment on which this job is to be performed. Entry is validated against the Table File RC . The following happens. Refer to the equipment numbering standards for the method of equipment entry. leave this field blank and enter an Equipment Reference and press F9. The equipment reference is also validated according to the Costing flag held against the item of equipment on the Equipment Register (MSF600). In this case. Task field is filled in. Standard Job Enter the Standard Job Number to be used to create the work orders.Responsibility Code or the Employee master file. Originator Enter the responsibility code of the person who initiated the work order. the segment range can be entered as part of this field.Summary screen to display Standard Jobs for that Equipment Number. Sched. Alternatively. You can also leave this field blank if you are creating a work order from a Maintenance Schedule which has a Standard Job. The system transfers to the MSM692D . Entry is validated against the Work Group master file (MSF720). the Maint.Review Standard Jobs . for integrated Payroll users. The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order Number or Prefix Either enter a Work Order number that has not yet been used or leave this field blank for Ellipse to use the next available Work Order Number.Create Work Order from Standard Job Screen MSM62HA enables user to enter the minimum amount of information required to create a work order and its related tasks from a Standard Job. enter ? in this field.300 Work Orders . Ellipse transfers to the MSM691A . If user does not know the number. Entry is validated against the Component Code Table Code (CO). this code is used to find a Maintenance Schedule Task (MSF700) record. The MSF700 record must have a Standard Job. MSF700 also has a work group. Component and Modifier references. This work group overrides any work group entered on this screen. This field is optional. APL DETAILS APL Type The APL type is either E for equipment number or G for EGI (Equipment Group Identifier). which identifies repeating maintenance tasks.3620 301 A Equipment Reference has costing allowed. If no profile is found then any Component Code can be entered as long as it is valid. Maintenance Schedule Task Enter the task number for a Maintenance Schedule. but is only allowed if you have entered a Component Code. Number of Tasks The number of Tasks contained in the Standard Job Plan. Equipment Reference entered is allowed. This field is optional. If no specific profile is found for the item of equipment but it has a group identifier defined. The system also checks that this is a valid component for this item of equipment by examining its component profile. W Equipment Reference does not have costing allowed. Component Code Enter the component code of the maintenance schedule. This job is used to create the work order. Job/APL Details tab JOB DETAILS Job Description The job description from the standard job. © 2009 Mincom . This field is optional. Entry is validated against the Modifier Code Table Code (MO). E Equipment Reference does not have costing allowed. Along with the Equipment.Work Orders . a warning is displayed but the Equipment Reference is allowed. This field is optional. but is only allowed if user have entered an Equipment Number or Reference. an error is displayed and the Equipment Reference is not allowed. Modifier Code Enter the Component Modifier Code for the work order or that relates to a Maintenance Schedule. which is assigned to do the repeating task. the component profile of the group identifier is checked. Modifier (Component Modifier Code) A code indicating the subassembly if there is more than one subassembly. Sequence The sequence number used to distinguish the APL from others. depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: 9 Maintain Reference Codes K Print WO Job Card R Review Standard Job Information W Print Work Order Details © 2009 Mincom .302 Work Orders . Action Enter a valid action code.3620 Component A code indicating the subassembly. Printer Enter Y in the appropriate fields and the ID of the printer to be used if user want to immediately print either the work order or APLs required for the job (in requisitioning format). The following actions are available. If a prefix is entered. The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order Prefix The work order prefix.Create Short-form Orders For Equipment This screen enables user to create work orders by the quickest means. W Equipment Reference does not have costing allowed. Originator Enter the code of the person initiating this job. an error is displayed and the Equipment Reference is not allowed. If no profile is found. Entry is validated against the Table File RC Table File or the Employee master file for integrated Payroll users. the system assigns the complete work order number. Equipment Reference entered is allowed. Refer to the equipment numbering standards for the method of equipment entry. using minimal information. If this field is left blank. The following happens. The system also checks that this is a valid component for this piece of equipment by examining its componentry profile. a warning is displayed but the Equipment Reference is allowed.Work Orders . If user is creating work orders for continuous assets. the segment range is entered as part of this field. depending on the value of the Costing flag: A Equipment Reference has costing allowed. the system assigns the next number for the prefix. This field is optional. and is valid on the System Control file (MSF000). If no specific profile is found and the item has a group identifier defined. This field is mandatory for every work order line entered.Component Code. The Equipment Reference is also validated according to the Costing flag held against the item of equipment on the Equipment Register (SMF600). Component Code Enter a valid component code or select an entry from the Table File CO . © 2009 Mincom . any Component Code can be entered as long as it is valid.3620 303 MSM62IA . This field is mandatory Equipment Reference The equipment number for the work order. the componentry profile of the group identifier is checked. E Equipment Reference does not have costing allowed. Cost Centre/Account Enter the cost centre or account that this job is to be charged.304 Work Orders .Equipment Location. Work Group Enter the work group this job is assigned. this number must not already exist on the Work Order File (MSF620). User can only complete this field if a Component Code has been entered. The default value is taken from that held against the Standard Job on the window (if this value is available). This field is mandatory. This field is mandatory. If entered. Work Order Number Enter the complete Work Order Number unless user want the system to assign. it is taken from the value held against either the Equipment Reference or the Project Number. If the Maintenance Scheduling (3701) module is installed when you enter the work group the work order is scheduled when a scheduling run is processed for this work group. Entry is validated against the Table File MO Table File. depending on the costing option available. Otherwise. This code is used to create the Genera Ledger Number in cases where only the Work Order Number is entered in an accounting transaction. Work Order Description Enter a short description to describe the job. This field is optional Equipment Location The location of the equipment. © 2009 Mincom . Entry is validated against the Work Group master file. This field is optional.3620 Modifier Code Enter the component modifier code that identifies the component to be monitored. If this field is left blank the work group of the first work order task created with a work group defaults. Entry is validated against the Table File EL . If no specific profile is found and the item has a group identifier defined. The Equipment Reference is also validated according to the Costing flag held against the item of equipment on the Equipment Register (SMF600). This field is mandatory for every work order line entered. Component Code Enter a valid component code or select an entry from the Table File CO . Entry is validated against the Table File RC Table File or the Employee master file for integrated Payroll users. The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order Prefix The work order prefix. using minimal information. If a prefix is entered. and is valid on the System Control file (MSF000). This field is mandatory Equipment Reference The equipment number for the work order. E Equipment Reference does not have costing allowed. the system assigns the next number for the prefix. the segment range is entered as part of this field. If no profile is found. Refer to the equipment numbering standards for the method of equipment entry. The following happens.3620 305 MSM62JA .Component Code. W Equipment Reference does not have costing allowed. a warning is displayed but the Equipment Reference is allowed. Originator Enter the code of the person initiating this job.Create Short-form Work Orders for Plant This screen enables user to create work orders by the quickest means. If user is creating work orders for continuous assets. depending on the value of the Costing flag: A Equipment Reference has costing allowed.Work Orders . an error is displayed and the Equipment Reference is not allowed. the componentry profile of the group identifier is checked. This field is optional. The system also checks that this is a valid component for this piece of equipment by examining its componentry profile. If this field is left blank. any Component Code can be entered as long as it is valid. © 2009 Mincom . Equipment Reference entered is allowed. the system assigns the complete work order number. Entry is validated against the Table File MO Table File. This field is mandatory. The default value is taken from that held against the Standard Job on the window (if this value is available). If the Maintenance Scheduling (3701) module is installed when you enter the work group the work order is scheduled when a scheduling run is processed for this work group. Entry is validated against the Work Group master file. This code is used to create the Genera Ledger Number in cases where only the Work Order Number is entered in an accounting transaction. If entered. this number must not already exist on the Work Order File (MSF620).306 Work Orders . Work Group Enter the work group this job is assigned. depending on the costing option available. Cost Centre/Account Enter the cost centre or account that this job is to be charged. If this field is left blank the work group of the first work order task created with a work group defaults. it is taken from the value held against either the Equipment Reference or the Project Number. © 2009 Mincom . User can only complete this field if a Component Code has been entered.3620 Modifier Code Enter the component modifier code that identifies the component to be monitored. Otherwise. Work Order Number Enter the complete Work Order Number unless user want the system to assign. This field is optional Work Order Description Enter a short description to describe the job. This field is mandatory. This field is optional. CC/Account This field displays the account code where this work order is charged. © 2009 Mincom .Work Orders . Date Raised This field displays the date the work order was created. the modifier code and description display. Date Required This field displays the date the work order is required to be completed by the originator. if it is being carried out on behalf of another cost centre. This screen can be accessed from a menu screen. Component Code This field displays the Component Code. Cost Centre/Account This field displays the Cost Centre or Account.Delete Work Orders This screen is used to entered the work order number to be deleted. Originator priority This field displays the originator's priority. Equipment Number or Reference (Equipment Reference) The equipment number for the work order. and confirm the deletion. Reall. The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order Number Enter the work order number to be deleted. Originator This field displays the originator. Work Order Type This field displays the work order type.3620 307 MSM62KA . Modifier Code If the component has a modifier identified. when items are being reviewed for a issue requisition or work order. Confirm Deletion Enter Y after display of the selected work order to confirm deletion of the work order and its associated tasks. Originating Doc Type This field displays the document number.308 Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom .3620 Parent Work Order This field displays the Parent Work Order Related Work Order This field displays the Work Order related. Date This field displays the date that the delay or work activity start. Estimated Job Duration This field displays the time estimated to complete the job.Review Job Duration Information This screen is one of a set that displays all master file information for a work order.3620 309 MSM62LA . The description of code is displays on right. Hours This field displays the duration of the job in hours. Stop Time This field displays the stop time of the job. The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order Enter a Work Order number. Action Enter a valid action code. Start Time This field displays the planned start time of the job. Actual Job Duration This field displays the actual time to complete the job. depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: © 2009 Mincom . This screen displays the duration information for the work order that includes delay or actual work time. Duration Delay This field displays the Code of duration delay.Work Orders . The following actions are available. 3620 C Review WO Codes/Completion Information E Review WO Extended Description F Review WO Completion Comments G Review WO General Information M Review WO Equipment Tracing O Review WO Materials Information P Review WO Planning Information R Review WO Reallocation Information T Review WO Summary of Tasks © 2009 Mincom .310 Work Orders . Entry in this field is optional. depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: C Complete Work Order G Review Work Order J Job Instructions L APL R Review Task T Update Task © 2009 Mincom . Crew Enter the crew to be maintained for this Work Group. Entry is validated against the Work Group file (MSF720). Task Number (Standard Job Task) This field displays the task number for the standard job. Plan Finish This field displays the date scheduled for finishing the work specified in the work order.for Work Group This screen enables user to review all work order tasks associated with a given work group. The work order description displays to the right. Validate that the crew entered exists on the CREW table and that the associated value is equal to the entered Work Group.3620 311 MSM62MA . Action Enter a valid action code. Work Order This field displays the work order number. The following actions are available. Plan Start The time scheduled for starting the work specified in the work order.Review Work Order Tasks .Work Orders . The fields on this screen are described below: Work Group Enter the Work Group Code to review associated work order tasks. Resources may or may not already exist for the crew entered. 3620 Update Work Order © 2009 Mincom .312 W Work Orders . all open and authorised work orders are selected. Bulk work order statuses are either O . This code will be validated against the Table File WS . The Equipment Search Type field indicates the kind of equipment search. this field is mandatory. The List Type and Identifier must exist as a valid Equipment List. as follows: © 2009 Mincom . Work Group Enter or search for the work group to which work orders are currently assigned.Authorised.3620 313 MSM62NA .Open or A . If this field is left blank. Entry is validated against the Table File LI . an Equipment Search Key must also be entered. Entry in this field is validated against the Work Group master file MSF720. An Equipment List Identifier must be entered in the Equipment Search Key field. List Type If an Equipment Search Type of L is entered. At least one primary selection criteria must be entered on this screen. User Status Enter the user status code of the work orders or select from the drop-down list. EQUIPMENT SELECTION CRITERIA Equipment Search Type Enter the equipment or plant number or select the equipment search type from the drop-down list.Equipment List Type.Work Orders .Additional Bulk Work Order Update Selection screens. The Equipment Search Type and Equipment Search Key fields are used together. If you enter an Equipment Search Type. Equipment Search Key Enter the appropriate information.User Work Order Status. Work Orders only display if they meet ALL criteria set in the filters on the MSM62NA and MSM62NB . The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order Status Enter the status of the work orders or select from the drop-down list.Bulk Work Order Update Selection This screen allows you to search and select specific criteria to access work orders for the purpose of bulk updating. Responsibility Code or the Employee master file. Entry is validated against the Project file MSF660. Project Number The Project Number to search for all work orders belonging to a project. entry in this field is mandatory. Parent Work Order The parent work order number to list work orders belonging to that parent work order.Responsibility Code or the Employee master file. This code is validated in accordance with the standard costing validation routine. The following indicators are available: L Retrieves Work Orders for equipment items of the entered list. The parent work order is validated against the Parent Work Order file MSF625. A Retrieves Work Orders for all items of the entered list and its sub-list Originator Enter the responsibility code of the person who initiated the work order. If an Equipment Search Type of L is entered. Entry is validated against the Table File RC . Account/Cost Centre Enter or search for the Account Code or cost centre to which the jobs requiring selection are charged. Assign to Individual Enter the responsibility code of the person to whom the work orders are assigned. for integrated Payroll users. Indicator Enter the indicator or select from the drop-down list.314 Work Orders . Entry is validated against the Table File RC .3620 E A Continuous Asset segment range can be entered in conjunction with an Equipment or Plant Number to restrict the search to Work Orders that refer to Continuous Asset segments falling within the range specified in the search criteria C Equipment Class G Equipment Group Identifier L Equipment List N Equipment Location P Productive Unit S Equipment Status The search key is the appropriate identifier. © 2009 Mincom . for integrated Payroll users. You must enter dates in both fields. This field displays only if the Maintenance Scheduling module (3701) is installed. Entry is validated against the Plant Shutdown file MSF750. Additional Filters Enter Y to allow entry of additional search filters. This presents only those jobs raised on or between the two dates.Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom . Planned Start Dates Enter the range of dates during which the required work orders are planned to start. This presents only those jobs planned to start on or between the two dates. Shutdown Number Enter the shutdown number of the work orders or select from the drop-down list. You must enter dates in both fields. DATE SELECTION CRITERIA Raised Dates Enter the range of dates during which the required work orders were raised. The MSM62NB .Additional Bulk Work Order Update Selection screen displays for you to enter additional search filters.3620 315 This field displays only if the Project Control module (3660) is installed. Only one of the two dates is required for the selection to be activated. Only one of the two dates is required for the selection to be activated. Only work orders that have been assigned to the entered shutdown number are selected. This screen displays after entering a primary search criteria on the MSM62NA screen by selecting Y in the Addition Filters field.3620 MSM62NB . Modifier Code Enter or select the modifier code from the drop-down list used to further define the location specified by the component code. The District Code is validated against the System Control file MSF000. Standard Job Enter or right-click. Entry in this field is validated against the Standard Job file MSF690.Additional Bulk Work Order Update Selection This screen allows you to enter additional filters to restrict the list of work orders for bulk update. Entry in this field is validated against Table File PY .Work Order Priority Code.Modifier Code. District Enter the District where the standard job belongs. Entry in this field is only allowed if the Component Code field has been completed.316 Work Orders . Entry in this field is validated against Table File CO . This indicates the specific sub-assembly on which the Work Orders are to be filtered. Planner's Priority Enter or select the planners priority for the work order from the drop-down list. the district currently in operation is used. Component Code Enter or select the component code from the drop-down list. If the district is not entered. © 2009 Mincom . The fields on this screen are described below: Originator's Priority Enter or select the originators priority for the work order from the drop-down list. Entry in this field is validated against Table File PY . Entry in this field is validated against Table File MO . Only Work Orders meeting ALL criteria set in the filters display on the MSM62NA and MSM62NB screens. search and select a standard job number used to create the required work orders.Work Order Priority Code.Component Code. The default value is W1. Part Causing Failure Enter the identity of the part causing failure.Maintenance Type. Job Code Type 1 Enter or select from the drop-down list the job code Table File types W0 to W9 . The system provides up to 10 user-defined codes to classify the work order for analysis purposes.Work Order Job Codes to be displayed/updated on the multiple-item update screen MSM62NC. inclusive. Entry in this field is not validated. Entry in this field is validated against Table File WO . Entry is validated against Table File types W0 to W9 . © 2009 Mincom . Job Code Type 2 Enter or select from the drop-down list the job code Table File types W0 to W9 .Plant Shutdown Type. The default value is W0. this code represents the main statistical dissection of work order activity.Work Order Job Codes. Shutdown Type The code for the shutdown type. Entry in this field is validated against Table File MT .Work Order Job Codes to be displayed/ updated on the multiple-item update screen MSM62NC.3620 317 Work Order Type Enter or select a work order type from the drop-down list. Only work orders that match the entered codes are displayed. JOB CODES Work Order Classification Codes Enter or select from the drop-down list the codes to classify the work orders required to be searched. Maintenance Type Enter or select the maintenance type from the drop-down list. For maintenance-related work orders.Work Orders . Entry in this field is validated against Table File SD .Work Order Types. 3620 MSM62NC . Work Order The identifying number of the work order.318 Work Orders . This date will be used for: • Work Order completion date. © 2009 Mincom . for integrated users. Entry is mandatory if a System Completion Code is entered in the detail section. Equipment Reference This field displays the equipment reference number. Equipment Description This field displays the description of the equipment as recorded in the Equipment Reference field. Entry is mandatory if a System Completion Code is entered. MSM62NC enables you to update completion and duration type information for all Work Orders selected.Bulk Work Order Update Selection and MSM62NB . search and select the ID of the employee who either performed the work or closed the Work Order. Completed By Enter or right-click.Additional Bulk Work Order Update Selection screen. Date Enter a valid date. The fields on this screen are described below: Search By: Work Group: These fields display the code and description of the primary search criteria entered on MSM62NA Bulk Work Order Update Selection screen. Position attributes are verified on the Associated Position Management master file. Work Order Description This field displays the description of the work order.Maintain Bulk Work Order Code and Duration Based on selection criteria entered on the MSM62NA . Entry is validated either against the Payroll master file. or Table File RC Responsibility Code. Entry is mandatory if a Job Duration code is entered in the detail section. • Duration update. Work Order Job Codes. Action Enter a valid action code. Job Duration Code Enter or select a Job Duration/Delay Code from the drop-down list. as indicated in the selection details on MSM62NB . The following actions are available. Entry in this field is validated against Table File W0 W9 . depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: A Create Short Form WO for Plant MSM62JA C Maintain WO completion information MSM62CA D Maintain WO duration information MSM62EA E Maintain WO extended description MSM096A G Maintain WO general information MSM62AA I Maintain WO tasks MSM623A K Maintain WO task Completion MSM62FA L Labour costing Transaction Entry MSM854A M Maintain WO Equipment Tracing Info MSM63DA N Create/Maintain Short Form WO MSM62PA O Maintain Operating Statistics MSM400A © 2009 Mincom . These three entries together complete the nominated Work Order. Entry is validated against Table File SC . Entry in this field is only valid if the Completed By and Date data fields are completed at the header level.Work Orders . Planned Finish Enter the planned finish date and time.3620 319 Job Codes Enter the job codes to classify the Work Order. The default is zero.Job Duration Code.Maintenance Completion Status. Entry in this field is mandatory or optional as per job code definition. Hours Enter elapsed time of activity in hours.Additional Bulk Work Order Update Selection screen. Completion Code Select a Completion Code from the drop-down list. Entry is validated against Table File JI . The following actions are available.320 Work Orders . depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: B Labour Costing Transaction Entry MSM854A © 2009 Mincom .3620 P Maintain WO planning information MSM62BA R Maintain WO Reallocation Information MSM62RA T Maintain WO task details MSM623A V Create Short Form WO for Plant MSM62IA W Create/Maintain Short Form WO for Task MSM62QA X Maintain Text MSM096B Action Enter a valid action code. or enter the Work Order Prefix and have Ellipse assign the next number for this prefix. The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order or Prefix Enter a complete Work Order Number. The same processing as for the prefix input applies. If one exists the program uses it as a template for work order creation. Otherwise. one of the following applies. Standard Job Enter a Standard Job number to use as a reference to create a new Work Order.3620 321 MSM62PA . Any details already entered on the screen is to be overwritten.Work Orders . This field is protected if Actual Costs or Actual Labour Hours exist for the particular work order. This field is optional Printer Enter a valid printer name. have Ellipse assign the whole number by leaving the prefix field blank. this is used as the default. Parent Work Order Enter the number if the work order belongs to a parent work order. or allow Ellipse to assign a number if in Create mode. Work order prefix only applies to creations. • If a prefix has been entered the program looks for a default Standard Job in the format M62P<PREFIX>. Entry in this field applies only to creation of work orders.Create/Maintain Short-form Work Order This screen enables user to create and modify work orders by entering a minimum of data. This relationship accumulates the costs incurred by this work order at the parent work order level and the work order. If this field is not completed and a user-defined default Standard Job exists. In the latter case. • If no prefix has been entered the program tries to use a default Standard Job (M62PMW). Valid prefixes and associated Last Used Sequence Numbers are held on the System Control file (MSF000). © 2009 Mincom . If a work order number is entered and the work order already exists then the details is to be returned to allow maintenance. the program only defaults fields that have not been entered by the user. User can only complete this field if Print actions (W or K) are selected. Entry is validated against the Table File PR Table File. If it uses a Standard Job as a template. In this case. Assign To/Completed By Enter either the person that this work order is assigned to or is completed by. This field has two purposes: • Before and after completion of a work order. The number is between 1 and 99 that the highest is 1. This field is validated against the Table File PY . Completion Code Defaults from SC Table File Completed By Defaults to the contents of the Assign To/Completed By field. This field is mandatory. This field is mandatory Shutdown Type The code indicating the type of shutdown. user must set up a default Completion Code by entering Y in the associated value of the appropriate code on SC Table File. Maintenance Type Enter the maintenance type code for the work order. If the Establishment module (3870) is installed this field can either be protected or unprotected and defaulted to the userid.3620 Work Order Details tab Originator Enter the Responsibility Code of the person who initiated the work order. Entry is validated against the Table File MT . © 2009 Mincom . Completed Enter Y to complete a work order.Plant Shutdown Type. Entry is validated against RC Table File or the Employee master file (MSF810) if the Establishment module (3870) is installed. Work Order Type Enter the Work Order Type Code that applies to this work order. Entry is validated against the Table File MT Maintenance Type . This field is validated against the Table File SD .322 Work Orders . The default is N. The following defaults are be used when you complete a work order: Completion Date Defaults to today's date. To enable completion of a work order from this window. This field is optional.Table File. Originator Priority The code indicating the originator's priority. it is used to maintain the ID of the person to whom the work order is assigned.Work Order Priority Code. Note: The Assign To and Work Group fields are optional. Otherwise. depending on the value of the Costing flag: A Equipment Reference has costing allowed.e. if required. User can complete both fields. W Equipment Reference does not have costing allowed. The default value is taken from that held against the Standard Job on the window (if this value is available).Work Orders . This field is optional Cost Centre/Account Enter the cost centre or account that this job is to be charged. Entry is validated against the Work Group master file (MSF720). The following happens. However. User cannot enter a date in the future. it is taken from the value held against either the Equipment Reference or the Project Number. user must complete at least one of them. This field is mandatory if the Standard Job selected does not contain an Account Code or Reallocation Account Code. Otherwise. the segment range can be entered as part of this field. Refer to the equipment number standards for the format of Equipment Reference entry. a warning is displayed by the Equipment Reference is allowed. this field is optional. In this case. Equipment Details tab Reference The identifier or reference of the equipment on which this task was performed. If user is creating work orders for a Continuous Asset type of equipment. the completed indicator changes from N to Y) this field is used to store the ID of the person completing the work order. If the Maintenance Scheduling module is installed. This code is used to create the Genera Ledger Number in cases where only the Work Order Number is entered in an accounting transaction. Date Raised Enter the date the job is initiated. Equipment Reference enter is allowed.. © 2009 Mincom . depending on the costing option available. Date Required Enter the date that the work order is required to be completed. The Equipment Reference is also validated according to the Costing flag held against the item of equipment on the Equipment Register (MSF600). The default is today's date. completing this field causes the work order to be scheduled when a scheduling run is processed for this work group. This field is mandatory. Work Group Enter the work group that this job is assigned.3620 • 323 When a work order is being completed (i. Entry is validated against RC Table File or the Employee master file if the Position Management module (3870) is installed. Work Order Description tab Description Enter a short description of the reason for the job. Action Enter a valid action code.324 E Work Orders .3620 Equipment Reference does not have costing allowed. The following actions are available. depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: 9 Maintain Reference Codes B Blank out Description C Maintain WO Codes/Completion Information D Maintain WO Duration Information E Maintain WO Extended Description F Maintain WO Completion Comments G Maintain WO General Information I Create Issue Requisition for WO K Print WO Job Card L Labour Costing Transaction Entry M Maintain WO Equipment Tracing Information O Review WO Materials Information P Maintain WO Planning Information R Maintain WO Reallocation Information T Maintain WO Task Details W Print WO Details X Review Issue Requisitions for WO © 2009 Mincom . an error is displayed and the Equipment Reference is not allowed. • When using a Standard Job as a template. The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order Number of Prefix Enter a complete Work Order Number. or allow Ellipse to assign a number if in Create mode. otherwise one of the following is applied. the program only defaults those fields that have not been entered by the user.Create/maintain Shortform Work Order This screen allows creation or maintenance of a work order and a single task via one screen. • This is a single task creation window. Description of Job Enter a short description to describe the job. have Ellipse assign the whole number by leaving the prefix field blank. This relationship accumulates the costs incurred by this work order at the parent work order level and the work order. this is used. In the latter case. If a work order number is entered and the work order already exists then the details is to be returned to allow maintenance. therefore only one task is copied from the template standard job regardless of the number of tasks under it. The Standard Job task used for default must have a single task number 001. Work order prefix only applies to creations.3620 325 MSM62QA .Work Orders . or enter the Work Order Prefix and have Ellipse assign the next number for this prefix. This field is optional Standard Job Enter a Standard Job number to use as a reference to create a new Work Order. If a user defined defaulted job exists. Parent Work Order Enter the number if the work order belongs to a parent work order. • If no prefix was entered the program tries to use a default Standard Job M62QMW and the same processing as for the prefix input applies. © 2009 Mincom . Valid prefixes and associated Last Used Sequence Numbers are held on the System Control file (MSF000). Any details already entered on the screen is to be overwritten. Entry is only applicable to creations. • If a prefix has been entered the program looks for a default Standard Job in the format M62Q <prefix> and if one exists it uses it as a template for the Work Order creation. This field is protected if Actual Costs or Actual Labour Hours exist for the particular work order. User Status Enter the user status code of the work orders or select from the drop-down list.Responsibility Code. this field is either be protected or unprotected and defaulted to the user ID. For Action W a value for PRINTER must be entered. Entry is validated against the Table File RC . or for integrated payroll users. Printer On entry to the program the PRINTER field contains a default printer. then the warranty work order type is defaulted. Work Order Type Enter the Work Order Type or select a valid entry from the Table File WO . © 2009 Mincom . The number is between 1 and 99 that the highest is 1. The field may be left with the default value. Entry is validated against the Table File MT Table File. This is used for both the work order and the task. This field is optional Work Order Details tab Originator Enter the responsibility code of the person originating this project or sub-project. If Ellipse determines that the equipment entered is still under warranty. Work Group Enter the Work Group to which this job is assigned. This is one of two work order priorities. Originator Priority The code indicating the originator's priority. The field may be left with the default value. blanked out or a user specified value be may supplied.Work Order Priority Code. This field is mandatory. this code represents the main statistical dissection of work order activity. This field is validated against the Table File PY .User Work Order Status. the other being the planners priority. If no printer is entered the printer defaults from the Work Group of the Work Order. This field is mandatory.3620 This field is mandatory. For Actions K or W the printer name is used to print the Task or Work Order. the employee master file. For Action K entry of a value for PRINTER is optional. Entry is validated against the Work Group Master file. or a user specified value may be supplied. Maintenance Type Enter the Maintenance Type. This code will be validated against the Table File WS . The printer is validated at the district and global level on the Table PR File Type.(MSF810) Depending on the access level of the user. For maintenance related work orders.Work Order Type. This is to be used as both the work order and task description.326 Work Orders . Assign to Individual Enter the responsibility code of the person to whom the work orders are assigned. then so must be the Cost Code/Account. This field is optional and. in addition to job procedures pertaining to individual jobs. for integrated Payroll users. Safety and Completion Instruction Enter the Safety Instruction Code and the Completion Instruction Code. Otherwise the Cost Code/Account can not be an AFUDC controlled code. The default is today's date. Date Required Enter the date the work order is required to be completed by the originator. This is used for both the work order and the task. This date is used as the Due Date when scheduling the task for the work group. Project Enter the project number to be associated with this work order.Work Orders . Entry is validated against the Table File JD Table File. entry in this field causes the work order to be scheduled when a scheduling run is processed for this work group. Job Description Enter the code that indicates the primary action to be taken to complete the job. Note: These are standard procedures applying to the job. is validated on the Project Control File MSF660. Planned Start Enter the date on which this task is scheduled to commence. Date Raised Enter the date that the work order was raised. This is consequently the most important job planning data item. This field is optional.3620 327 If the Maintenance Scheduling module is installed. This field is optional. User cannot enter a date in the future. often the reverse of the safety procedures. Entry is validated against the Table File RC . if entered. The Completion Instruction code indicates the procedures that should be performed at the end of the job. If the project number is under AFUDC control.Responsibility Code or the Employee master file. that are always used in tandem the first indicating standard text describing procedures that should be performed before or during the job to ensure safe conditions. © 2009 Mincom . It is used to further define the location specified by the component code. Modifier Code Enter a modifier code from the drop-down list. E If the equipment reference does not have costing allowed. then the costing information cannot be modified. the segment range is entered as part of the Equipment Reference field. then an AFUDC controlled project must be entered. Component Code Enter the code for the sub-assembly on which the task was performed. an error is to be displayed and the equipment reference is not allowed. This field is optional. User can only complete this field if an Equipment Number or Reference has been entered.328 Work Orders . If no specific profile is found for this item of equipment but it has a group identifier defined. © 2009 Mincom . a warning is to be displayed but the equipment reference is allowed. W If the equipment reference does not have costing allowed. Entry is validated against the Table File MO . If the Capital Work Order has any associated costs.Modifier Code. If the Work Order refers to a Continuous Asset. This code is used to create the General Ledger Number in cases where only the Work Order Number is entered in an accounting transaction. Valid codes are maintained on Table File CO. If the code entered has a segment that is under AFUDC project control. The following occurs depending on the value of the costing flag: A If the equipment reference has costing allowed. the default value is from that held against the standard job on the window (if the standard job's value is available). If the equipment is under warranty. The system also checks that this is a valid component for this item of equipment by examining its componentry profile. This field is mandatory. otherwise it is from that held against either the equipment reference or the project number. If no profile is found. If no value is entered. any Component Code can be entered as long as it is valid.3620 Cost Centre/Account Enter the Cost Centre or Account to which this job is to be charged. Refer to the equipment number standards for the format of input. depending on the costing option set. the equipment reference entered is allowed. The equipment reference will also be validated according to the costing flag held against the item of equipment on the Equipment Register (MSF600). an extra confirmation process is to be performed. Equipment Details tab EQUIPMENT DETAILS Reference The identifier or reference of the equipment on which this task was performed. Otherwise an AFUDC controlled project can not be entered. the componentry profile of the group identifier is checked. • Modifier Code Enter a Modifier Code if appropriate. being a group or equipment items or components which share the same parts and maintenance characteristics. identified in the GI .Work Orders . This field is optional. The value -. • Equipment Group Identifier. A resource can be any item required that can be expressed in hours: • machinery hours • labour hours This forms the basis of extensive resource planning and allocation in maintenance systems. If the general task maintenance window is also used to update this task.Equipment Reference (if Equipment Registeris installed) • G . APL DETAILS Enter the APL (Application Parts Listing) to be used. • Sequence Number Enter the sequence number if appropriate.Equipment Group Identifier APL Reference Enter one of the following (indicate by the APL Type): • • Equipment Reference. if material is required for this job. Component Code Enter a Component Code if appropriate. It indicates the type of resource required. The Resource Code is user defined and is validated against the TT Table file.can be used instead of spaces. Resource tab Each work order task has the capability to record the estimated resources required.can be used instead of spaces. but do not appear on this window. The value --. it is possible that there may be two extra resource groups that exist. The APL is entered using the following fields: • APL Type Enter the Equipment identification type being one of: • • E . This field is optional and is validated against the CO table file. being an equipment or plant number identified in the equipment Register file (MSF600). A question mark (?) in any APL related field causes the APL Preview Mechanism to be activated (MSO131).table file.3620 329 This field is optional but only be allowed where a component code has been entered. to designate a particular Component Code. A particular Resource Code can only appear once for a work order task. © 2009 Mincom . to designate individual Application Parts Listing. This field is optional and is validated against the MO table file. Due to space restrictions only four resource groups appear on this window. they only appear as defaults if no resources are initially entered. Estimated Hours Enter the total required resource hours for this job.Create/Maintain Shortform Work Order. The following actions are available. Action Enter a valid action code.330 Work Orders . any remaining codes remain blank even if some exist on the standard job template. depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: 9 Maintain Reference Codes C Maintain WO Codes/Completion Information D Maintain WO Duration Information E Maintain WO Extended Description G Maintain WO General Information I Create Issue Requisitions for WO J Maintain WO Task Job Instructions K Print WO Job Card M Maintain WO Equipment Tracing Information P Maintain WO Planning Information R Maintain WO Reallocation Information T Maintain WO Task Details V Review Open/Authorised Work Orders for Eq/Comp/Mod W Print Work Order Details © 2009 Mincom . Crew Enter the number of persons or machines normally needed to do the job efficiently. If resources are initially entered on the MSM62OA .3620 If the standard job used as a template includes resources on the task. If one of them is blank reallocation does not occur. an error is to be produced by the Reallocation program (MSB622).3620 331 MSM62RA . Instead. Note: Both the credit and debit default reallocation expense elements must be set up for the reallocation process to work. This screen displays with existing information and allows modifications.Maintain Work Order Billing Information This screen enables user to maintain cost reallocation information in relation to a work order.Work Orders . Defaults can be defined for the following fields via the Standard Default facility (MSM051A): • Reallocation Method (RLOC-METHOD1) • Reallocation Frequency (RLOC-FREQ-IND1) The default debit and credit reallocation expense elements set up on the district control windows are displayed here for reference purposes. A warning is displayed the first time this window is displayed if any of the default reallocation expense elements are blank. The following fields only appear if the Accounts Receivable module is installed: • Billable Indicator • Billing Level Indicator • Purchase Order Number • Purchase Order Item Number • Customer Number • Revenue Code • Amount Invoiced • Standard Value The Reallocation Project field is protected if the work order project is not blank. The Reallocation Method and Reallocation Frequency fields are also protected if any of the following fields are greater than zero: © 2009 Mincom . The following fields are protected if the Billable Indicator is Y and the total cost invoiced is greater than zero: • Billable Indicator • Customer Number • Customer Mnemonic • Reallocation Method • Reallocation Frequency. Work Order Project This field displays the work order number or project number the requisition item is associated with. the reallocation expense element defaults to the Reallocation Debit Expense Element that is set up on the MSM00BA . If a project number is entered and the Reallocation Account field is left blank. This field only applies if the work order project is blank. Reallocation Account (Reallocation Cost Account) The cost centre/ Cost Code/ General Ledger Account Code to be used for reallocation of costs on this work order. This field is optional.3620 • Units Invoiced/Charged • Total Cost Reallocated. Default Expense Element Credit This field displays expense element to use in the credit portion of the reallocated costs. Particularly for end of job reallocation. Reallocation Method The method to be used to reallocate the work order cost. the account related to that work order displays enabling you to confirm or make changes as required. Reallocation Project The Project Number to reallocate the work order costs to. Entry is validated against RM Table File. This field is optional. REALLOCATION DETAILS Default Expense Element This field displays expense element to use in the debit portion of the reallocated costs. If this field is left blank and a reallocation work order is entered. this flag can be set to prevent charging of further costs against the work order. the project account displays for confirmation or amendment.District Control screen. Costing can be finalised on this window as the reallocation is processed.332 Work Orders . If only a cost centre is entered. Work Order Account This field displays Account that the current Work Order to be charged. © 2009 Mincom . The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order This field displays the work order number. This field is optional. © 2009 Mincom . PO No.Work Orders . Reallocation Frequency Enter one of the following indicate when reallocation of this work order occurs: C Indicates reallocation occurs on a cyclic basis (daily. If you do not enter an expense element in this field. This field is mandatory if a reallocation method is entered. Entry in this field is mandatory if the Accounts Receivable module is installed and the Billable Indicator is Y. Billable Indicator Indicates whether the work order units are billable. weekly. Credit Expense Element Enter a valid expense element to use in the credit portion of the reallocated costs. The adjacent field displays the customers name. or Mnemonic A mnemonic may be entered as an alternative to the customer number. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE DETAILS Customer Number Enter the customer number to be invoiced.Revenue Code. the system uses the default credit reallocation expense element that is set up on the MSM00BA . You must enter a revenue code in this field if the Accounts Receivable module is installed and the Billable Indicator is Y. Entry is not required if the work order is billable. etc. Entry in this field is validated against Table File RV ./Item Enter a valid purchase order number and item to indicate the source of the work that is required. Revenue Code Enter a revenue code for the work order or select from the drop-down list.). This field is optional Note: A reallocation method based on work completed cannot be entered if the work order is billable. E Indicates reallocation occurs when the work order is finalised. Otherwise.3620 333 This field is mandatory if a Reallocation Account/project/work order are entered. Entry in this field is mandatory if the Accounts Receivable module is installed and the Billable Indicator is Y.District Control file. This modification rule applies only to Non-Billable Work Orders. This field is optional Recharge Value Limit Recharge Value Limit Enter a number in the range 0 to 9999999999. If the reallocation amount is greater. Quote Value can then only be increased. the reallocation amount is checked against it. When this field is modified check the Actual Costs Reallocated to see if Quote value has reached this limit. the reallocation amount is calculated as follows: Actual Cost/Earned Value +/. Amount Invoiced This field displays the amount to be invoiced for the purchase order and item indicated. This field is optional. eg. If this field is completed.to indicate that the MSF740 record type is to be used for invoicing.Percent Specified This field cannot be completed if the reallocation method is based on the quoted value and the work order is not billable. This field is mandatory if the reallocation method selected is based on the quoted value.334 Work Orders .3620 Billing Level Ind. © 2009 Mincom . If this field is completed. (Billing Level Indicator) Enter one of the following options from the drop-down list: • P .99 to indicate that the reallocated costs cannot be greater than the limit specified.to indicate that Project level is to be used for invoicing. • Y . Standard Value This field displays the standard value of the purchase items. Otherwise. This field is optional. +/. only up to the specified limit is reallocated to the Costs account. This will increase the quoted value used to create the invoice by this percentage.to indicate that the Work Order is available to be billed. Quote Value Enter the value quoted for this work order. This field only applies when the work order reallocation is based on actual costs. • W . This field is optional. A cyclic frequency reallocates the total quote value when the Reallocation process is run. The difference is held against the work order until the limit is increased. Note: Total Quote Value entered is to be reallocated at the frequency specified.Margin Percent Enter a % if the Quoted Value is in use (refer to Reallocation Method field). Only the recharge value limit increases.Work Orders . An appropriate error message displays when the recharge value limit is attempted to be decreased. The following actions are available. depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: B Review Purchase Order C Maintain WO Codes/Completion Information D Maintain WO Duration Information E Maintain WO Extended Description G Maintain WO General Information I Create Issue Requisitions for WO M Maintain WO Equipment Tracing Information P Maintain WO Planning Information T Maintain WO Task Details © 2009 Mincom . check the actual costs reallocated to see if the recharge value limit has reached this limit. This modification rule only applies to Non-Billable Work Orders. Action Enter a valid action code.3620 335 Notes: When the Recharge Value Limit field is modified. E Indicates reallocation occurs when the work order is finalised. Work Order Account This field displays Account that the current Work Order to be charged. weekly.). REALLOCATION DETAILS Default Expense Elements: Debit This field displays expense element to use in the debit portion of the reallocated costs. © 2009 Mincom . Reallocation Method The method to be used to reallocate the work order cost. Reallocation Account (Reallocation Cost Account) The cost centre/ Cost Code/ General Ledger Account Code to be used for reallocation of costs on this work order. Reallocation Project The Project Number to reallocate the work order costs to. (Reallocation Frequency) Indicates when reallocation of this work order occurs: C Indicates reallocation occurs on a cyclic basis (daily.336 Work Orders . Default Expense Elements: Credit . The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order This field displays the work order number. Reallocation Freq.This field displays expense element to use in the credit portion of the reallocated costs. This field only applies if the work order project is blank. etc. Entry is validated against RM Table File.Review Work Order Billing Information This screen enables user to review cost reallocation information in relation to a work order. Work Order Project This field displays the work order number or project number the requisition item is associated with.3620 MSM62SA . • W ./Item The purchase order number and purchase order item number that indicates the source of the work required. Amount Invoiced This field displays the amount to be invoiced for the purchase order and item indicated.the Project level is to be used for invoicing. The adjacent field displays the customers name. Quote Value can then only be increased. When this field is modified check the Actual Costs Reallocated to see if Quote value has reached this limit.Work Orders .the MSF740 record type is to be used for invoicing. © 2009 Mincom . Quote Value Enter the value quoted for this work order. Standard Value This field displays the standard value of the purchase items. eg. This modification rule applies only to Non-Billable Work Orders. This field is validated against Table File RV . Billing Level Ind (Billing Level Indicator) Indicates the billing level to be applied to this work order. Otherwise. Note: Total Quote Value entered is to be reallocated at the frequency specified. A cyclic frequency reallocates the total quote value when the Reallocation process is run. Valid options are: • P . Credit Expense Element The expense element to use in the credit portion of the reallocated costs. PO No.the Work Order is available to be billed. Billable Indicator Indicates whether the work order units are billable. • Y .3620 337 Variance Account The account to which cost variances are to be reallocated.Revenue Code. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE DETAILS Customer Number The customer number to be invoiced. This field is mandatory if the reallocation method selected is based on the quoted value. This field is optional. Revenue Code The revenue code for the work order. If this field is completed. The difference is held against the work order until the limit is increased.Percent Specified This field cannot be completed if the reallocation method is based on the quoted value and the work order is not billable.99 to indicate that the reallocated costs cannot be greater than the limit specified. only up to the specified limit is reallocated to the Costs account. If this field is completed. This modification rule only applies to Non-Billable Work Orders. Action Enter a valid action code.Margin Percent Enter a % if the Quoted Value is in use (refer to Reallocation Method field). check the actual costs reallocated to see if the recharge value limit has reached this limit. depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: B Review Purchase Order C Maintain WO Codes/Completion Information D Maintain WO Duration Information E Maintain WO Extended Description G Maintain WO General Information I Create Issue Requisitions for WO J Review Journal Transactions for WO M Maintain WO Equipment Tracing Information O Review WO Materials Information P Maintain WO Planning Information T Maintain WO Task Details © 2009 Mincom .338 Work Orders . the reallocation amount is calculated as follows: Actual Cost/Earned Value +/. This will increase the quoted value used to create the invoice by this percentage. the reallocation amount is checked against it. This field is optional Recharge Value Limit Recharge Value Limit Enter a number in the range 0 to 9999999999. An appropriate error message displays when the recharge value limit is attempted to be decreased. If the reallocation amount is greater.3620 +/. The following actions are available. This field is optional. This field only applies when the work order reallocation is based on actual costs. Only the recharge value limit increases. Notes: When the Recharge Value Limit field is modified. the Standard Job details do not overwrite the previously entered details. That is. Defaults can be defined for the following fields via the Standard Default facility (MSM051A). the window redisplays with information defaulted from that job.Main Menu screen.Create/Maintain Incident Work Order This screen enables you to create or modify work orders for an incident by entering a minimum of data.3620 339 MSM62TA . If a Work Order Number is not entered. Or Allow the program to assign a number in Create mode. In Create mode the Work Order Prefix field is displayed. the program will try to use a default Standard Job (M62TMW). This results in control being transferred to MSO691. a blank window is displayed. In the latter case. with the Equipment Number being passed. If one exists it uses it as a template for work order creation.STD-JOB-NO1 The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order Number The work order number. If window details have been entered prior to the selection of a Standard Job. Once a Standard Job has been found and entered. the system allocates a number according to the prefix entered. If no prefix is entered. the Standard Job details merges with the entered details. A Standard Job can be specified as a template for creating the work order. either leave the prefix field blank to let the program assign the whole number. • Entry of an Equipment Reference and pressing F9. A work order prefix only applies to creations. • Standard Job . In Modify mode the work order status displays in this field. It displays the allocated number for confirmation prior to update. If a prefix has been entered the program looks for a default Standard Job in the format M62PREFIX. Valid prefixes and associated last-used sequence number are held on the System Control file (MSF000). This can be done by: • Entry of ? in the standard job number field. or enter the prefix and let the program assign the next number for this prefix. On initial entry. except when the program is not called from the MSM000B . This results in control being transferred to MSO692. © 2009 Mincom . Any details already entered on the screen is to be overwritten. Control can be transferred to the Review Standard Job Information program (MSO691) or the Review Equipment/EGI Relationships for Standard Job program (MSO692) to search for and/or review standard job information before the update is committed. The same processing as for the prefix input applies. If a Work Order Number is entered and the work order already exists the details is displayed to allow maintenance. In Modify mode the Work Order status is displayed instead of the Work Order Prefix.Work Orders . The following occurs. This field is optional Standard Job Enter a valid Standard Job Number to be used as a template to create a work order. this is used. If no specific profile is found for this item of equipment but the equipment has a group identifier defined.3620 Related Work Order Enter the related work order related to the existing work order. the program only defaults those fields not entered by the user. The Equipment Reference is also validated according to the costing flag held against the item of equipment on the Equipment Register (MSF600). one of the following applies: • For the work order prefix entered. If no profile is found. Refer to the Equipment Numbering Standards for the format of Equipment Reference input. If left blank. if a related Standard Job in the format M62PREFIX is on file. Entry is only allowed if an Equipment Number or reference has been entered. Description Enter a short description of the reason for the job. Entry is validated against the Table File CO . W Equipment Reference does not have costing allowed. When using a Standard Job as a template.Table File. E Equipment Reference does not have costing allowed. Standard Job M62TMW must be on file. any Component Code can be entered as long as it is valid. then the componentry profile of the group identifier is checked.340 Work Orders . The system also checks that this is a valid component for this item of equipment by examining its componentry profile. © 2009 Mincom . Entry in this field applies only to creations. it is used. This field is mandatory Definition tab EQUIPMENT DETAILS Equipment Number or Reference The identifier or reference of the equipment on which this task was performed. An error is displayed and the Equipment Reference is not allowed. • If no prefix is entered. Otherwise. This field is mandatory if the standard job selected does not contain an Account Code or a Reallocation Account Code. A warning is displayed but the Equipment Reference is allowed. depending on the value of the costing flag: A Equipment Reference has costing allowed. Equipment Reference entered is allowed. it defaults as follows: • If a user-defined default Standard Job exists. Component Code Enter the code indicating the specific sub-assembly that the work is to be performed. This field is mandatory Work Group Enter the identification of the work group performing the work. Entry is validated against the Table File RC . for integrated Payroll users. Entry in this field is validated against Table File MO . This field is mandatory. This field is mandatory Work Order Type Enter the Work Order Type Code that applies to this work order. This field is optional. Entry is validated against the Table File PY Table File. MAINTENANCE DETAILS Originator Enter the responsibility code of the person who initiated the work order. Entry is validated against the Table File MT . This field is optional Maintenance Type Enter the maintenance type code for the work order.Responsibility Code or the Employee master file. Entry is validated on the Work Group master file (MSF720).Modifier Code.Work Orders . Entry is validated against the Table File RC Table File or the Employee master file. Plan Priority Enter the planned priority that applies to this work order. for integrated Payroll users.Table File.3620 341 This field is optional Modifier Code Enter or select the modifier code from the drop-down list used to further define the location specified by the component code. but either the Work Group or Assign To field must be completed. Entry in this field is only allowed if the Component Code field has been completed. Assign To Enter the ID of the person that this job is to be assigned. COMPLETION DETAILS © 2009 Mincom . This field is optional. Entry is validated against the Table File MT Maintenance Type . This field is optional. but either the Work Group or Assign To field must be completed. Stop Time or description for the incident are entered. However. if a Completed Code has been entered and this field is left blank. the system defaults this field to the contents of Assign To or the Originator ID field. This date cannot be in the future. minutes and seconds with a delimiter of :. but can be useful for future reference.99. this field must be entered if the Duration Hours. Note: The data in this area is not available for update. Use the MSM62CA window (via action code 'D' on this window) to modify or add to the JDC information on this work order. if a Completed Code has been entered and this field is left blank. However. If the work order already exists. or space. eg. Job Duration Code Enter the duration code to identify the type of downtime related to this work order. This field is optional Estimated Duration Hours Enter the estimated duration time in hours. or in a standard time format of hours. Entry is validated against the Table File RC Table File or the Employee master file. Job Codes tab Job Code This section is reserved for work order JDC (Job Duration Code) information display only. This field is optional. this screen displays the newly created Job Code (to be attached to the newly created work order). Start Time. Entry is validated against the Table File JI Table File. This field is optional. This field is optional However. Job Duration tab Part Causing Failure Enter the identity of the part causing failure. If the work order is being created. © 2009 Mincom . for integrated Payroll users. Entry is validated against the Table File SC Table File. the system defaults the Completed Date/Time to today's date and the current time. in that order.3620 Completed Code Enter the completion code. This field is optional.342 Work Orders . Hours can be entered as a number in the range 0 to 99999. Completed Date/Time Enter the date and time on which the work order is completed. This field is optional Completed By Enter the ID of the person completing the work order. . HH:MM. The code is to be applies to this work order.. this screen displays up to four Job Duration Codes that are attached to the work order. Enter is not validated. Work Orders . Equipment Reference Enter an equipment ID to restrict the search to items that correspond to the equipment selected.3620 343 MSM62VA . This field can only be entered in conjunction with the Modify and Delete options. all entries for work groups that satisfy the remaining selection criteria are displayed. regardless of their date. Entry is mandatory if the Shift field is entered. Entry is mandatory if the Date or Shift fields are entered. it is optional. Otherwise. If this field is left blank. Originator Enter or right-click to search for a Responsibility Code to restrict the search to items raised by the specified person. The fields on this screen are described below: Work Group Enter the ID of the Work Group for which the logsheet entries are to be reviewed. entries for all work groups will display. Refer to the Equipment Number Standards for the format of input. If this field is left blank. all entries that satisfy the selection criteria are displayed. Entry is validated against Table File RC or the Employee master file. Entry is validated against the Work Group master File MSF720 Date Enter the date for which logsheet entries are to be reviewed. for integrated Payroll users. regardless of their status. Incident Status Select one of the following options to restrict the search and display of logsheet entries to those with a status that corresponds to the code entered: C Closed O Open If left blank. This field can only be entered in conjunction with the Modify and Delete options. Entry is validated against MSF600. Otherwise.Review Incident Logsheets Use MSM62VA to enter selection criteria to review Incident Logsheet Entries in MSM62VB Review Incident Logsheet Entries. it is optional. © 2009 Mincom . Entry is validated against Table File MT. Entry is validated against Table File JI.3620 Component Code Enter a Component Code from the drop-down list to restrict the search to items that correspond to the component selected. © 2009 Mincom . Entry is validated against Table File CO. This field can only be entered if an Equipment Reference has been entered. Job Duration Code Enter a Job Duration Code from the drop-down list to restrict the search to items corresponding to the Job Duration Code selected.344 Work Orders . Maintenance Type Enter a Maintenance Type Code from the drop-down list to restrict the search to items corresponding to the Maintenance Type selected. This entry defaults from the selection criteria entered in MSM62VA. Start Time The time that the incident occurred.3620 345 MSM62VB . This entry defaults from the selection criteria entered in MSM62VA. Entry is validated against the Work Group master File MSF720. the shift code will not be allowed. Modifier Code The Modifier Code for the component related to the incident.Review Incident Logsheet Entries Use MSM62VB to display summary information for Incident Logsheet Entries. The fields displayed on this screen are for review only and cannot be modified. Incident Logsheet Entries are displayed based on the selection criteria entered in MSM62VA. If an associated value on the SH table file designates the code as a Production Allocation Shift Code. Date The date of the incident. Entry is validated against MSF600. Entry is validated against Table File SH. Component Code The ID of the component related to the incident. Incident Description A description of the incident. This entry defaults from the selection criteria entered in MSM62VA. The fields on this screen are described below: Work Group The Work Group of the incident. Equipment Reference The Equipment Number or Reference ID of the equipment related to the incident. Shift The shift code of the shift during which the incident occurred. © 2009 Mincom .Work Orders . Originator Identification The Responsibility Code of the person raising the incident. Status The status of the incident. Action Enter a valid action code. End Time The time at which the incident ended. Corrective Action The corrective action taken in relation to the incident. Job Duration Code The Job Duration Code for the incident. Duration Hrs The number of hours taken by the incident. depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: E Review Extended Description MSM097A H Review Equipment History MSM633A R Review Work Order Details MSM621D © 2009 Mincom . A N in the Extended Text field indicates that no extended description exists for that incident. Extended Text An * in the Extended Text field indicates that extended description exists for that incident. Work Order The Work Order which applies to the incident. The following actions are available.3620 Maintenance Type The Maintenance Type Code for the incident.346 Work Orders . A standard job can be specified as a template for creating the work order. Any details already entered on the screen is to be overwritten. Where screen details have been entered prior to the selection of a standard job.Create/Maintain Shortform Work Order Allow creation/maintenance of a work order and a single task using one screen. the screen re-displays with information defaulted from the standard job. or allow Ellipse to assign a number if in Create mode.Work Orders . In the latter case. If a work order number is entered and the work order already exists then the details is to be returned to allow maintenance. This can be done by: • Entry of a ? in the standard job number field. NOT OVERWRITE. This result in control being transferred to MSO692. Work Order Prefix/Number Enter a complete Work Order Number. This field is optional Standard Job Enter a Standard Job number to use as a reference to create a new Work Order. Valid prefixes and associated Last Used Sequence Numbers are held on the System Control file (MSF000). have Ellipse assign the whole number by leaving the prefix field blank. Control can be transferred to the Review Standard Job Information (MSO691) or the Review Equipment/EGI Relationships for Standard Job program (MSO692) to search for and/or review standard job information before the update is committed. or enter the Work Order Prefix and have Ellipse assign the next number for this prefix. This field is optional but defaults is applied as follows: © 2009 Mincom . This result in control being transferred to MSO691.3620 347 MSM62WA . If no prefix is entered the program tries to use a default Standard Job M62WMW and the same processing as for the prefix input applies. Once a standard job has been found and entered. Entry is only applicable to creations. This relationship accumulates the costs incurred by this work order at the parent work order level and the work order. This field is protected if Actual Costs or Actual Labour Hours exist for the particular work order. Printer name field (PRINTER-NAME1) can be defaulted via the Standard Default Facility (MSO051). Parent Work Order Enter the number if the work order belongs to a parent work order. If a prefix has been entered the program looks for a default Standard Job in the format M62W <prefix> and if one exists it uses it as a template for the work order creation. Work order prefix only applies to creations. with the equipment number being passed. • Entry of an equipment reference and function key F9. the standard job details merges with the entered details. a warning is to be displayed but the equipment reference is allowed. If the Work Order refers to a Continuous Asset. This field is optional but only be allowed where an equipment number or reference has been entered. the equipment reference entered is allowed. If no specific profile is found for this item of equipment but the equipment has a group identifier defined. Component Code Enter the code for the sub-assembly on which the task was performed. When using a Standard Job as a template. This is to be used as both the work order and the task description.3620 • If a prefix has been entered the program looks for a default Standard Job in the format M62W <prefix> and if one exists it uses it as a template for the Work Order creation. E If the equipment reference does not have costing allowed. © 2009 Mincom . Refer to the equipment number standards for the format of input. therefore only one task is to be copied from the template standard job regardless of the number of tasks under it. If no profile is found than any component code can be entered as long as it is a valid component code. W If the equipment reference does not have costing allowed. The system also checks that this is a valid component for this item of equipment by examining it's componentry profile. This field is mandatory. • If no prefix was entered the program tries to use a default Standard Job M62WMW and the same processing as for the prefix input applies. an error is to be displayed and the equipment reference is not allowed. an extra confirmation process is to be performed. Valid codes are maintained on Table File CO. Job Description Enter a short description to describe the job. the program only defaults those fields that have not been entered by the user. The equipment reference will also be validated according to the costing flag held against the item of equipment on the Equipment Register (MSF600). The following occurs depending on the value of the costing flag: A If the equipment reference has costing allowed. the segment range is entered as part of the Equipment Reference field. then the componentry profile of the group identifier is checked. Definition tab EQUIPMENT DETAILS Equipment Number or Reference The identifier or reference of the equipment on which this task was performed.348 Work Orders . This is a single task creation window. If the equipment is under warranty. This field is optional. This field is mandatory.Modifier Code. the other being the planners priority. This date is used as the Due Date when scheduling the task for the work group.Responsibility Code. This field is mandatory. Depending on the access of the user. The codes which display are user defined and are contained in the WS table file. the employee master file. It is used to further define the location specified by the component code. This field is optional but only be allowed where a component code has been entered. This field is validated against the Table File PY . then the warranty work order type is defaulted. Entry is validated against the Table File RC . Maintenance Type Enter the maintenance type code for the work order.Work Order Priority Code. Planned Start Date Enter the date on which this task is scheduled to commence. this field may either be protected or unprotected and defaulted to the user ID. This is consequently the most important job planning data item. The priority code numbers are between 1 and 99 inclusive. This field is optional. This is one of two work order priorities.Work Orders .3620 349 Modifier Code Enter a modifier code from the drop-down list. or for integrated payroll users. User Status Select the User Status from the drop-down list. This field is mandatory © 2009 Mincom . Originator Priority The code indicating the originator's priority. This field is optional.Work Order Type. Entry is validated against the Table File MO . If Ellipse determines that the equipment entered is still under warranty. Entry is validated against the Table File MT Maintenance Type . Originator Enter the responsibility code of the person originating this project or sub-project. Work Order Type Enter the Work Order Type or select a valid entry from the Table File WO . it is the most important job planning data item. Project Number Enter the project number to be associated with this work order. then so must be the Cost Code/Account. this code represents the main statistical dissection of work order activity. then the costing information cannot be modified. Entry is validated against the Work Group Master file (MSF720). Otherwise the Cost Code/Account can not be an AFUDC controlled code. Entry is validated on the Project Control file (MSF660). entry in this field cause the work order to be scheduled when a scheduling run is processed for this work group. If the Maintenance Scheduling module is installed. otherwise it is from that held against either the equipment reference or the project number. Cost Centre or Account Enter the Cost Centre or Account to which this job is to be charged. This field is mandatory if Action 'K' or 'W' is selected. otherwise This field is optional. Entry is validated against Table File type PR. otherwise This field is optional Assigned To Enter the responsibility code of the person to whom the work order is assigned. Printer Enter the identification of the printer to be used to immediately print the Work Order after update. This code is used to create the General Ledger Number in cases where only the Work Order Number is entered in an accounting transaction. This is to be used for both the work order and the task. This is used for both the work order and the task. This defaults to the user's default printer when screen is initiated.3620 For maintenance related work orders. then an AFUDC controlled project must be entered. © 2009 Mincom . If the project number is under AFUDC control. Consequently. This field is mandatory if an assigned to responsibility code has not been entered.350 Work Orders . Otherwise an AFUDC controlled project can not be entered. Entry is optional. Planned Start Enter the date on which this task is scheduled to commence. the default value is from that held against the standard job on the window (if the standard job's value is available). This date is used as the Due Date when scheduling the task for the work group. Work Group Enter the Work Group to which this job is assigned. This field is optional. If the Capital Work Order has any associated costs. If the code entered has a segment that is under AFUDC project control. depending on the costing option set. If no value is entered. Entry is validated against the RC Table file or the Employee Master file for integrated PAYROLL users. Certain codes are mandatory. Job Codes tab Job Code Enter the codes to classify the Work Order. Hours can be entered as a number in the range of 0 to 99999. If a code type is not defined in Table File type XX.3620 351 This field is mandatory. and this is determined if the sixth special character of the code on Table File type XX is Y for mandatory. Ellipse allows up to ten codes to classify the work order for analysis purposes but only nine codes are displayed on this screen. . This is the requirement to complete the job. Costs tab Unit of Work Enter a number from 1 to 9999999. This field is optional default is Standard Job units required. Update of non displayed codes can be done via the Maintain Code/Completion Information screen (MSM62CA). Estimated Duration Hours Enter the estimated duration time in hours. for comparison to actuals. The use of these codes is completely user defined and can include such things as: • Failure Codes • Part Defect Codes • Work Classification Codes The name of each code (its use) is user defined in Table File type XX and appears on the screen.99 or as standard time format of hours.99 to indicate the number of Units of Work to be covered by this work order. Unit of Work Enter a valid Unit of Work from the UW Table file that is relevant to this Work Order. For example HH:MM. This field is optional but is mandatory if Units Required is entered. Default is Standard Job Unit of work. ESTIMATED COSTS These fields are used to record the estimated cost of the job. (i) Create Mode Enter the estimated costs within the following categories: • Resource (Hours) • Resource (Cost) • Material (Cost) • Equipment (Cost) © 2009 Mincom . minutes and seconds delimited by :. it will not appear on the window. Entry is validated against Table File types W0 to W8 inclusive.Work Orders . and space. 352 Work Orders - 3620 • Other (Cost) • Total (Cost) These values default to Standard Job values when a Standard Job is specified. When a Standard Job and Units Required are specified, these values are calculated by multiplying corresponding values on the Standard Job by a factor of (Specified Units Required/ Standard Job Units Required). If the Units Required field is changed, these fields are recalculated but not displayed unless the window field has been overtyped with spaces. The use may alter the values as displayed and/or have selected values re-calculated by (1) changing Units Required AND (2) blanking out the window field(s) of those to be re-calculated. In some cases, it may not be possible to determine the segments of cost when planning a job i.e. whether labour costs are going to be incurred or contractors (other) costs. Ellipse therefore allows any combination of fields to be entered as follows: • if one or more segments are entered, and a total, all fields are accepted as entered, except that the total will be checked and changed if necessary • if one or more segments are entered with no total, the system cross adds and inserts a total • a total can be entered with no segments. Hours may also be input in standard time format of hours, minutes and seconds with delimiters of :, . and space. e.g., . HH:MM. (ii) Modify Mode Any of these fields may be altered as required (spaces acceptable). In this mode, no reference is made to the associated Standard Job values. Action Enter a valid action code. The following actions are available, depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: 9 Maintain Reference Codes C Maintain WO Codes/Completion Information D Maintain WO Duration Information E Maintain WO Extended Description G Maintain WO General Information I Create Issue Requisitions for WO J Maintain WO Task Job Instructions K Print WO Job Card M Maintain WO Equipment Tracing Information P Maintain WO Planning Information R Maintain WO Reallocation Information © 2009 Mincom Work Orders - 3620 T Maintain WO Task Details W Print Work Order Details 353 © 2009 Mincom 354 Work Orders - 3620 MSM62XA - Create Work Orders from a Std Job Plan Parent Std Job MSM62XA enables you to create a Parent Work Order and its subordinate Work Orders from a Standard Job Plan or a Parent Standard Job. The fields on this screen are described below: Standard Job/Parent Standard Job Indicator Enter the indicator to be used to create the Parent Work Order and Work Orders. The indicators are J for Standard Job Plan and P for Parent Standard Job. Standard Job/Parent Standard Job Enter the Standard Job Plan or Parent Standard Job Number to be used as a template. This field is mandatory. Parent Work Order Prefix Enter a valid Parent Work Order prefix. Entry is validated against the System Control file (MSF000). Entry of a Prefix is optional. Parent Work Order Either enter a Parent Work Order Number that is not already used or leave this field blank for Ellipse to automatically assign the next available Parent Work Order Number. Description Enter a short description to describe the job. This field is mandatory. Equipment Reference Enter the default Equipment Reference or the override Equipment Reference if the entire job is for a single piece of equipment. Override Enter Y for Yes or N for No. Yes indicates that the specified Equipment should override the equipment reference on every resulting Work Order. No indicates that the specified Equipment Reference will only default on a Work Order where no equipment reference existed on the Standard Jobs templates being used. You can only enter Y if an entry has been made for Equipment. Work Order Type Enter the Work Order type. © 2009 Mincom Work Orders - 3620 355 Entry is validated against Table File WO. If entered this Work Order Type overrides the Work Order type details found on the Standard Jobs being used to create Work Orders. Work Order Prefix Enter the Work Order prefix to be used when automatically generating Work Order Numbers. Entry is validated against the District Control file. Maintenance Type Enter or select the maintenance type from the drop-down list. For maintenance-related work orders, this code represents the main statistical dissection of work order activity. Entry in this field is validated against Table File MT - Maintenance Type. If entered, the maintenance type overrides the Maintenance Type details found on the Standard Jobs being used to create Work Orders. Date Required Enter the date on which the entire job must be completed. Cost Centre/Account Enter the cost centre or account to which this job is to be charged. Entry is mandatory if no default or override Equipment Number is entered. The default is the cost centre associated with the default/override Equipment Number. Default Plan Start Date Enter the Planned Start Date to be entered against Work Orders generated for which no specific Planned Start Date is entered. Originator Enter the responsibility code of the person who initiated the work order. Entry is validated against the Table File RC - Responsibility Code or the Employee master file, for integrated Payroll users. Entry in this field is mandatory. Work Group Enter the work group to which this job is assigned. Entry is validated against the Work Group Master file. If the Maintenance Scheduling module is installed, completing this field causes the resulting Work Orders to be scheduled when a scheduling run is next processed for this work group, provided the generated Work Order: • Has a planned start date • Contains at least one task • Is authorised after being added to the entered work group © 2009 Mincom 356 Work Orders - 3620 Standard Job Enter a valid Standard Job for creation of a Work Order in addition to the Standard Jobs already associated with the entered Standard Job Plan or Parent Standard Job. Parent Standard Job Enter a valid Parent Standard Job for creation of Work Orders in addition to the Standard Jobs already associated with the main Parent Standard Job or Standard Job Plan. If a Parent Standard Job is entered it is expanded into its subordinate Standard Jobs. You can only complete this field if the Standard Job field is blank. You cannot complete this field when you are creating Work Orders from a Parent Standard Job. Description This field displays the description of each subordinate standard job or parent standard job. Equipment Enter the Equipment Reference for this Work Order. A default equipment will be allocated in one of the following ways, as appropriate: • The equipment related to the Standard Job, if one exists • The equipment related to the Parent Standard Job, if one exists • The equipment related to the Standard Job Plan, if one exists • The default equipment entered at the top of the window for the Parent Work Order In each case, if a non-unique Equipment Reference is found, the Equipment Number is not defaulted. If the Equipment Override flag is set on for this on the window header information, that Equipment Number is allocated. Component Enter the code indicating the specific sub-assembly on which the work is to be performed. Entry is validated against Table File CO. You can only complete this field if an Equipment Number or Reference has been entered. Otherwise, it is optional. Modifier Enter or select the modifier code from the drop-down list used to further define the location specified by the component code. Entry in this field is validated against Table File MO - Modifier Code. Entry in this field is only allowed if the Component Code field has been completed. Work Order Either enter a Work Order Number that is not already used or leave this field blank for Ellipse to automatically assign the next available Work Order Number. © 2009 Mincom Work Orders - 3620 357 Planned Start Enter the date on which this task is scheduled to commence. This date is used as the Due Date when scheduling the task for the work group. Priority A valid Priority Code. Entry is validated against Table File PI - Priority Codes. Unit Work Enter a valid unit of work. Entry is validated against Table File UW. Rate Per Period Enter the charging rate of the unit of work per period. Quantity of Work Enter the quantity of work required to complete the job in terms of the unit of work. Action Enter a valid action code. The following actions are available, depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: C Maintain Work Order codes and completion information MSM62CA. D Maintain Work Order duration information MSM62EA. E Maintain Work Order extended description MSM096A. G Maintain Work Order general information MSM62AA. M Maintain Work Order Tracing Information MSM62DA. This action is only available if Module 3650 has been installed. P Maintain Work Order planning information MSM62BA. Q Review Equipment Relationships for a Standard Job Plan/Parent Standard Job/Standard Job MSM692A. This action is only available if Module 3690 has been installed. R Maintain Work Order Reallocation Info MSM62RA. T Maintain Work Order Task Details MSM623A. Action is only available if Module 3620 has been installed. X Exclude this standard job from creation of Work Orders. © 2009 Mincom 358 Work Orders - 3620 MSM62YA - Create/Maintain Work Order For Equipment This screen enables you to create work orders for equipment from minimal information entered on the window. This window can be used to create a work order or amend an existing work order. Existing work orders for the Equipment Reference (and optionally the Component Code and the Modifier Code) are displayed in the bottom half of the window before a work order is created. These work orders are displayed in the reverse sequence of the date raised within work order status (open/authorised/closed). The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order Prefix/Number Enter a complete Work Order Number, or allow Ellipse to assign a number if in Create mode. In the latter case, have Ellipse assign the whole number by leaving the prefix field blank, or enter the Work Order Prefix and have Ellipse assign the next number for this prefix. Valid prefixes and associated Last Used Sequence Numbers are held on the System Control file (MSF000). If a work order number is entered and the work order already exists then the details is to be returned to allow maintenance. Any details already entered on the screen is to be overwritten. Work order prefix only applies to creations. Standard Job Enter a Standard Job number to use as a reference to create a new Work Order. If a user-defined default standard job exists, this is to be used. Otherwise, one of the following applies: • If a work order prefix has been entered, the program looks for a default standard job in the format M62Y<PREFIX >. If one exists the program uses it as a template for work order creation. • If no work order prefix has been entered the program tries to use a default Standard Job (M62YMW). If one exists, the program uses it as a template for work order creation. When the program uses a standard job as a template, it only defaults fields that have not been entered. Job Description Enter a short description to describe the job. This field is mandatory. This is to be used as both the work order and the task description. Printer When you display this screen the Printer field contains a default printer. For action code K, the printer name is used to print the task. User can blank out the default value or specify the required value. © 2009 Mincom Work Orders - 3620 359 The printer name is validated against Table File PR. This initially defaults to your default printer. This field is optional Equipment Details tab Equipment Number or Reference The identifier or reference of the equipment on which this task was performed. If the Work Order refers to a Continuous Asset, the segment range is entered as part of the Equipment Reference field. Refer to the equipment number standards for the format of input. If the equipment is under warranty, an extra confirmation process is to be performed. The equipment reference will also be validated according to the costing flag held against the item of equipment on the Equipment Register (MSF600). The following occurs depending on the value of the costing flag: A If the equipment reference has costing allowed, the equipment reference entered is allowed. W If the equipment reference does not have costing allowed, a warning is to be displayed but the equipment reference is allowed. E If the equipment reference does not have costing allowed, an error is to be displayed and the equipment reference is not allowed. This field is mandatory Component Code Enter the code for the sub-assembly on which the task was performed. Valid codes are maintained on Table File CO. The system also checks that this is a valid component for this item of equipment by examining its componentry profile. If no specific profile is found for this item of equipment but it has a group identifier defined, the componentry profile of the group identifier is checked. If no profile is found, any Component Code can be entered as long as it is valid. User can only complete this field if an Equipment Number or Reference has been entered. This field is optional. Modifier Code Enter a modifier code from the drop-down list. Entry is validated against the Table File MO - Modifier Code. It is used to further define the location specified by the component code. User can only completer this field if a Component Code has been entered. This field is optional Equipment Status Enter a valid equipment status or select from the Table File ES - Equipment Status. Work Order Details tab Originator Enter the Employee Id of the person who created the Work Order. Entry is validated against the Employee file. Depending on you access level, this field is either protected or unprotected and defaulted to the user id. This field is mandatory © 2009 Mincom 360 Work Orders - 3620 Originator Priority The code indicating the originator's priority. This field is validated against the Table File PY - Work Order Priority Code. This is one of two work order priorities, the other being the planner's priority (see MSM62BA Maintain Work Order - Planning Information) This field is optional Work Order Type Enter the Work Order Type or select a valid entry from the Table File WO - Work Order Type. This field is mandatory Maintenance Type Enter the maintenance type code for the work order. Entry is validated against the Table File MT Maintenance Type . This field is mandatory Date Raised Enter the date that the work order was raised. The default is today's date. User cannot enter a date in the future. Date Completed Enter the date that the work order was completed. This field defaults to today's date if the Completed By field is completed. Completed By Entry is validated against the Employee file (MSF810). This field is mandatory if the Date Completed field is completed. Otherwise, This field is optional. Work Group Enter the Work Group to which this job is assigned. Entry is validated against the Work Group Master file (MSF720). This is used for both the work order and the task. If the Maintenance Scheduling module is installed, entry in this field cause the work order to be scheduled when a scheduling run is processed for this work group. This field is mandatory Cost Centre/Account Enter the cost centre or account to which this job is to be charged. This code is used to create the General Ledger Number in cases where only the Work Order Number is entered in an accounting transaction. The default value is taken from that held against the Standard Job (if a Standard Job is entered and one is held against the standard job). Otherwise, it defaults from the value held against the Equipment Reference. This defaulted value can be changed by overtyping it. This field is mandatory © 2009 Mincom respectively.. Entry is validated against Table Files W0. If a code is not defined in Table File XX. its use) is defined by the user in Table File XX and appears on this window. depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: A Review WO Summary Information B Create Tasks C Review WO Code Completion Information D Review WO Duration Information E Review WO Extended Description F Review WO Completion Comments G Review WO General Information I Create Issue Requisition for WO J Review Journal Transactions for WO K Print WO Job Card L List APLs M Review WO Equipment Tracing N Maintain WO Equipment Tracing Information O Review WO Materials Information P Review WO Planning Information Q Maintain WO Planning Information R Review WO Reallocation Information T Review WO Summary of Tasks U Maintain WO General Information V Maintain WO Task Details W Print Work Order Details © 2009 Mincom . The name of each code (i.Work Orders .3620 361 JOB CODES Enter up to three Work Order Job Codes to classify the work order. W1 and W2. Action Enter a valid action code. it does not appear on this screen. A code is mandatory when the sixth special character of the code on Table File XX is Y (mandatory). The following actions are available.e. depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: 9 Reference Codes A Review W/O Summary Information B Create Tasks C Review WO Codes & Completion Information D Review WO Duration Information E Review WO Extended Description F Review W/O Completion Comments G Review WO General Information I Create Issue Requisitions for WO J Review Journal Transactions for WO K Print WO Job Card L List APLs M Review WO Equipment Tracing N Maintain WO Equipment Tracing Information O Review W/O Purchasing Information P Review WO Planning Information Q Maintain W/O Planning Information R Review WO Reallocation Information T Review WO Summary of Tasks U Maintain W/O General Information V Maintain WO Task Details W Print Work Order Details X Maintain WO Extended Description Y Update Labour Costs © 2009 Mincom .3620 Maintain WO Extended Description Action Enter a valid action code. The following actions are available.362 X Work Orders . depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: C Review Extended Completion Comments M Review Maintenance Scheduling Task T Review Work Order Task Details W Review Work Order Details © 2009 Mincom . Action Enter a valid action code.Work Orders . The equipment number or reference is validated according to the numbering standards for equipment.Review Complete Maintenance History This screen displays a summary of all maintenance actions on an item of equipment.3620 363 MSM633A . The following actions are available. The maintenance actions are displayed in chronological sequence. The fields on this screen are described below: Equipment Reference Enter the Equipment Number or Reference to start or restart the history review. Date Enter a date at which to start or restart the review. W/O or Project No Enter either a work order or project number. however the transaction has been rejected due to invalid data. This field is mandatory. This screen can also be used to modify transactions where data has been imported into Ellipse using an interface file.Labour Costing Transaction Entry This screen is used to enter new labour costing transactions and to maintain existing labour costing transactions that have not been processed by MSB857 .Labour Costing Transaction Entry is formatted to assist data entry for several employees entered against a single activity. WO/Project Enter either a W for a Work Order labour costing entry or P for a Project labour costing entry. The MSM854A . work order or project combination can be entered in this screen. After the Date. The fields on this screen are described below: Date Enter the date labour is to be costed to a job. WO/Project and W/O or Project No fields have been completed the MSM854A Labour Costing Transaction Entry screen must be refreshed. Hint: There are two screens provided by Mincom Ellipse to enter timesheet data into Labour Costing.Maintain Labour Costing Transactions or MSE857 . This field is mandatory. if you need to enter multiple rows for an employee. The MSM850A or MSE857 screen is formatted to assist data entry for several activities of an employee.Employee Weekly Labour Costing screen and MSM854A . Employees assigned to this work order using a work group automatically populate the Employee and Employee Name fields in the order they joined the project or work group.Labour Trans. © 2009 Mincom . The district name displays in the second field.364 Work Orders . District This field displays the district where the Work Order or Project belongs. use the MSM850A . Posting Update Control Report. However. Both provide the facility to enter time spent by individual employees against Work Orders. The MSM850A .Maintain Labour Costing Transactions or MSE857 .Labour Costing Transaction Entry. A date in the future cannot be entered. Projects or Equipment codes. The WO/ Project indicator is used to determine whether a Work Order or Project Number is entered. This field is mandatory and indicates whether the next field displayed is for a Work Order or a Project.3620 MSM854A .Employee Weekly Labour Costing screen. Any number of transactions per date. If this job was quoted as a fixed price or flat rate. The default for this field is 001. This field is validated against the Table File LC .30).Earnings Classification. If this combination does not exist the entry is rejected. This field is optional.MM (for example. but not both. You enter data in either the Hours field or the Value field. Earnings Class Enter a valid Earnings Classification. Employee Name This field displays the employee name.Labour Classifications. the Labour Cost Classification and the Earnings Classification combination is validated against the employees District Code. This field is mandatory. You enter data in either the Hours field or the Value field but not both. Value Enter the value of the job in this field. if a Work Group has been assigned to the Work Order being entered. The Labour Cost Classification and the Earnings Classification combination is validated against the Labour Costing Rates file.3620 365 Employee ID Enter the Employee Code assigned to the employee for this labour costing transaction.Work Orders . Hours Enter the hours worked for this labour costing transaction in the format HH. This field is optional. When data is entered in this field the Value field is automatically updates data as display only.Maintain Employee Costing Details screen. This field is validated against the Table File EA . © 2009 Mincom . Alternatively. eight and a half hours is entered as 08. the employees assigned to this work group default to this field. you can leave this field blank and enter the value of the job in the Value field. If the employees district is not the same as your login district. The entry in this field defaults from the employees' Payroll Costing Record as maintained on the MSM826A . if this job was quoted as a fixed price or flat rate. Labour Class Enter a valid Labour Cost Classification. District Enter the employee's district in this field. This field is mandatory. the system attempts to derive the cost centre from the Labour Classification debit account (MSM855B). This field is optional. project or equipment item.Maintenance Completion. cost code or cost centre to which the labour costing transaction is to be posted. Status This field displays the current status of the Labour Costing transaction. The table below displays valid status values: © 2009 Mincom . If this field is left blank. Access to all of the action codes is limited by security. This allows work in progress to be monitored for the corresponding work order or project. the home cost centre for the employee (MSM826A) or their position (MSM8PUA) is used. If the employee's district is different from your login district. Cde (Completion Code) Enter the status code for the completion of the work order/work task. the cost centre is derived from the specified work order. This field is not completed where the WO/Project field indicates a project. This field can only be updated using the action codes. This field is validated against Table File SC .3620 Equipment Ref. Account/Cost Centre Enter the account code. When an account is not specified.366 Work Orders . W/O Task Enter a valid work order task number to allocate labour costs to a specific task for this work order. If none of these items are specified. entry is validated against your login district instead of the employee's district. the Equipment Number is updated from the relevant work order or project. When this has not been maintained. Units Comp (Units Completed) This field displays the units of work completed since the last labour costing transaction was recorded for this employee. This field is protected if the Show Work in Progress Details flag is set to N at the district level. (Equipment Reference) Enter a valid Equipment Number. % (Percentage) Enter a valid percentage in the range 0 to 100 to indicate the percent of work completed to date for the corresponding work order/task/project. This field is optional. The following actions are available. This action code provides the option to jump directly to the MSM850A .Employee Weekly Labour Costing screen where multiple employee transactions can be entered.Work Orders .Maintain Labour Costing Transactions or MSE857 . depending on the level of user access and the modules installed: C Confirm Labour Costing Transaction D Delete Transaction I Insert multiple transactions. R Reset Labour Costing Transaction © 2009 Mincom .3620 367 C Confirmed Labour Costing Transaction P Processed Labour Costing Transaction R Rejected Labour Costing Transaction Action Enter a valid action code. Requisition Status. Requisition Status. MSQ140 . Originating District. Additional filters for the Part No search tab are Date Created From. This program can also be used to create. Warehouse.368 Work Orders .Search for Requisition program can be used to retrieve and display information on requisitions. Purchase Requisition Number.Requisition The MSQ140 . and may have to be purchased • Credit/Return requisition where the items are being returned • Loan requisitions where stock items are issued for a pre-determined period of time. Additional filters for Costing search tab are Date Created From. Equipment No.3620 MSQ140 . Date Created To up to eight expense elements (for purchase orders only). Originating District. each of which allows you to search for requisitions using different criteria.Search for Requisition There are eight tabs you can use to identify your search parameters. at which time a return requisition is automatically generated There are eight search tabs on the MSQ140 . Requested By Requested By. Additional filters for the Stock Code search tab are Date Created From and Date Created To. create. Additional filters for the Material Group Code are Date Created From. Originating District. Requisition Status. These tabs and the selection criteria specific to each Search tab are as follows: Search Issue Requisition Number. Show All Items for Requisition. Search Method. Originating District. After the requisition is selected other tabs display that can be used to review existing data.Search for Requisition screen. Requisition Status. Project No. Costing Work Order. Originating District. Part No Part Number. Stock Code Stock Code. Cost Centre. Date Created To up to eight expense elements (for purchase orders only). modify and delete the following types of requisition: • Normal issue or warehouse requisition where the goods are stocked items • Purchase requisition where the goods are not catalogued in Ellipse. Material Group Code Material Group Code. modify and delete data. Additional filters for Requested By search tab are Date Created From. Date Created To up to eight expense elements (for purchase orders only). Date Created To up to eight expense elements (for purchase orders only). © 2009 Mincom . Consolidated Req Consolidated Req No. Pur Req No This field displays the number allocated to the purchase requisition.3620 APL No 369 Equipment Group ID. Req Type This field displays the requisition type. MSQ140 . Originating District. Status This field displays the status of the requisition. Sequence Number. Requisition Status. Requisition Status. Date Created To up to eight expense elements (for purchase orders only). Additional filters for the Consolidated Req search tab are Date Created From and Date Created To. Tabs • General • Delivery/Priority • Questions • Purchase Details • Other • Items • Catalogued sub-tab • Non-Catalogued sub-tab • APL sub-tab • LinkOne sub-tab © 2009 Mincom . Warehouse. Purchase requisitions are used for non-stocked items. Equipment Reference.Work Orders . Additional filters for the APL search tab Date Created From. Req No This field displays the requisition number of the requisition. Component Code. Component Modifier Code.Requisition The fields on this screen are described below: District Code This field displays the originating District Code for the requisition. This field is mandatory if the Warehouse Management Module is enabled and the item is flagged for category management. however. This field is mandatory. Otherwise. Entry is validated against the Table File IG .3620 General tab In the General tab.370 Work Orders . all requisitions will be referred to the position of the employee nominated for authorisation. It can be defaulted to a preset value using the MSM051A . This field displays if there are multiple warehouses.Date=Today indicator in the District Control file is set to Y. © 2009 Mincom . Transaction Type Enter a transaction type. This field can also be completed automatically by Ellipse. it is blank.Maintain Screen Defaults screen or a default from the District Control file. on the basis of the Priority Code on the Delivery/Priority tab. When a work order task plan start date is added or modified and there are associated requisitions that are either not printed (Issue Requisition) or not ordered (Purchase Requisition) the table file . Inventory Category Enter an inventory category. If the entry in Authorised By is different to that in Requested By. This field is mandatory. It can be defaulted to a preset value using the MSM051A . Date Required By Enter the date on which the requesting employee or supply customer requires the requisitioned items to be supplied.MWDO checks to determine if this date is to be updated. The inventory category can be selected from the drop-down list. if a Plan Start Date is added to a work order task the required by date on the requisition is updated to the day before the work order task plan start date. This field is mandatory.Req. This field defaults to today's date if the Def.Maintain Screen Defaults screen. This field is updated by the same number of days the Plan Start Date has changed. However. Original Warehouse Enter the warehouse code of the warehouse from which the item is being requisitioned. work order or cost centres to which the goods should be charged The fields on this tab are described below: Requested By Enter or right-click and search for the supply customer or employee ID requesting the material. The default is the District Home/Default Warehouse. Authorised By This field is optional and the default is the ID of the requesting employee. you can enter the information required to create a requisition such as: • Person who requested the material • Equipment. The transaction type can be selected from the drop-down list.Inventory Category. The date may not be in the past.Maintain Screen Defaults screen. defaults for users can be set up using the MSM051A . regardless of the Required By date. project cost centre or equipment reference that is to be charged for the items. Right-click and search for a Work Order or Project if the number is not known. % (Percentage) This field defaults to 100% on the first costing allocation entry and zero for the second. The status of the quantity requisition is Dues Out. Protected Indicator Select this check box if the items on this requisition are to be protected. The costing method entered in this grid is the default costing for this requisition. Cost Centre Enter a cost centre or right-click to search for a cost centre if the number is unknown. Ind Enter P if the requisition is to be charged to a project. If costing defaults are not used and you wish to requisition stock and non-stock items on a normal requisition with the same costing details. that number always displays instead of the equipment number. rather than Reserved. The requisition items are included in the recommended order calculation. Wk Ord/Proj Enter work order or project number.Work Orders . Whilst it may not be necessary to enter data in all fields. If a work order/project or equipment reference has been entered in the general costing grid.3620 371 Entry is validated against the Table File IT . This percentage is used to distribute the cost between the costing allocations. you can use Show to return associated details. The definition of mandatory fields in this grid is determined by the Costing Option on your district control file. when you enter the general costing details they automatically default to the purchase costing grid on the Purchase Details tab. If the Plant Number is a duplicate. If you enter more than one costing allocation. © 2009 Mincom . the identification of at least one costing entity is mandatory. Equipment Ref Enter or right-click to search for an equipment reference. the total allocation percent must add up to 100%.Issue Transaction Type. If Structured Plant Nos is flagged as Y on the System Control File and a plant number exists for the equipment reference. COSTING Enter the work order. you are prompted to resolve the duplicates. Costing can be split over two costing entities. Enter W if the requisition is to be charged to a work order. For example. no costing details are defaulted into the purchase costing grid. Review the PI . Entering this date assists the store person when picking stock to ensure that the stock issued is useable up to the date entered. Entry is validated against Table File DN .Delivery Location. Delivery Location Select the code for the delivery location to which the material is to be delivered from the drop-down list. those changes are not automatically defaulted. The District field only displays if you have multiple-district access and appropriate security access. The associated values of priority codes can have significant impact on a requisition. This functionality allows requisitions raised in one district to be costed to another. Cost District The default district for costing is always the current district. and entry is validated against the PI . This information is printed on the picking slip.Priority Codes table. therefore not requiring you to click in the grid. The fields on this tab are described below: Picking Slip / Delivery Instructions Enter any delivery instructions or picking details to be communicated to the issuing storeperson. Use by Date Select a use by date from the drop-down list. Up to 60 characters can be entered per line. If the district to which the requisition is to be costed differs from the current district. If changes are made to the costing that was initially entered. Only the initial costing defaults to another costing grid. LOAN INFORMATION This group of fields applies only to loan requisitions. click More. © 2009 Mincom . This field enables a group of requisitions with the same material group code to be tracked.Table File Control Record. multiple requisitions for a project could be given the same material group code and tracked using this value. Priority Code Select a priority code from the drop-down list. select the correct district from the drop-down list.Priority Codes table associated values for more information on those effects. Material Group Code Enter the material group code. The delivery location code selected is returned to the Delivery Location field on the requisition. This field is mandatory only if the field is set as mandatory on Table File XX .3620 If screen defaults are used and costing details are defaulted into the general grid.372 Work Orders . if longer instructions are required. Once a requisition number has been assigned. Delivery/Priority tab Use the Delivery/ Priority tab to enter delivery instructions and priority details. Recall Requisition Information Codes • IRT1 . Questions tab In the Questions tab you can answer predetermined requisitioning questions that assist logistic personnel in supplying material. is used by Ellipse to automatically generate the loan return requisition.Disposal Requisition Information Codes • ILN1 . Entry is validated against one of the following Client-defined table files. in conjunction with the warehouse service time.Credit/ Return Requisition Information Codes • IDI1 . Entry is validated against one of the following client-defined table files.Credit/ Return Requisition Information Codes • IDI2 . Loan Requisition Number This field displays the loan requisition number.Stores Sales Requisition Information Codes • R1 .Disposal Requisition Information Codes • ILN2 . depending on the type of requisition: • I2 . The fields on this tab are described below: QUESTIONS Select a question code from the drop-down list.Work Orders . This value.Purchase Requisition Information Codes Question 2 Select a question code from the drop-down list. Question 1 Select a question code from the drop-down list. depending on the type of requisition: • I1 .Issue Requisition Information Codes • ICR2 .Loan Requisition Information Codes • IRC2 .Loan Requisition Information Codes • IRC1 .Issue Requisition Information Codes • ICR1 . Up to four predetermined information questions can be configured. These fields are user defined.Rotation Requisition Information Codes • ISS1 .3620 373 Loan Duration Enter the loan duration in days.Recall Requisition Information Codes © 2009 Mincom . Recall Requisition Information Codes • IRT4 . This tab is available when you: • Create a normal requisition • Create a purchase requisition • Modify and/ or review a purchase requisition © 2009 Mincom .Disposal Requisition Information Codes • ILN4 .Loan Requisition Information Codes • IRC3 .Purchase Requisition Information Codes Question 3 Select a question code from the drop-down list.Issue Requisition Information Codes • ICR3 .Rotation Requisition Information Codes • ISS2 .Stores Sales Requisition Information Codes • R4 .Loan Requisition Information Codes • IRC4 .Stores Sales Requisition Information Codes • R2 . depending on the type of requisition: • I3 .Credit/ Return Requisition Information Codes • IDI3 .3620 • IRT2 .Purchase Requisition Information Codes Purchase Details tab In the Purchase Details tab. you can enter enough information to create a purchase requisition header.Recall Requisition Information Codes • IRT3 . depending on the type of requisition: • I4 . Entry is validated against one of the following client-defined table files.Rotation Requisition Information Codes • ISS4 . Entry is validated against one of the following client-defined table files.Credit/ Return Requisition Information Codes • IDI4 .Rotation Requisition Information Codes • ISS3 .Purchase Requisition Information Codes Question 4 Select a question code from the drop-down list.Disposal Requisition Information Codes • ILN3 .Issue Requisition Information Codes • ICR4 .Stores Sales Requisition Information Codes • R3 .374 Work Orders . A limit of 60 characters applies. and is not validated. This grid provides for up to two different costing levels for purchase requisition items on the requisition. Entry is validated against the Table File QI . The costing grid on the General tab is used when creating Purchase type requisitions. A purchasing officer identifier can be located by right clicking and then selecting Search from the context menu. COSTING Costing can be entered for Purchase Requisition items. This field is optional.3620 375 The fields on this tab are described below: Suggested Supplier Enter a suggested supplier for the items on the requisition. This field displays only when creating a requisition as it is used as a default for the item. This field displays only when creating a requisition. Once the appropriate purchasing officer identifier is located. Inspection Code Enter the quality inspection code to be used as a default against each item or click the arrow and select an inspection code from the table. This field is optional. no validation is performed.Quality Inspection Code. Group Class Enter or right-click and search for the group class classification for the purchase requisition items. select it from the drop-down list. This field displays only when creating a requisition. This is a text field only. Purchase Officer Enter a purchasing officer. Delivery Instruction Enter delivery instructions as required. The indicator codes are: P If the requisition is to be charged to a project W If the requisition is to be charged to a work order Wk Ord / Proj (Work Order / Project) © 2009 Mincom . and entry is optional. The grid does not appear on the Purchase Details tab except when creating Normal type requisitions.Work Orders . Estimate Freight Enter the estimated freight charge for the goods to be requisitioned. Ind (Indicator) Enter a costing indicator. Entry is validated against the Group Class file. 376 Work Orders . that number always displays instead of the equipment number. In Review mode. This percentage is used to distribute the cost between the costing allocations. Button Purpose Availability Purchase Instructions This button opens a text screen for entry of purchasing instructions. If screen defaults are used and costing details are defaulted into the general grid. This button cannot be selected until a requisition number is assigned. If you enter more than one costing allocation. See below for more information. If changes are made to the costing that was initially entered. you are prompted to resolve the duplicates. Note: You can use the button below to add any text instructions relating to the purchase. In Create mode. those changes are not automatically defaulted. Equipment Ref (Equipment Reference) Enter or right-click to search for an equipment reference. this tab's fields are blank. If costing defaults are not used and you wish to requisition stock and non-stock items on a normal requisition with the same costing details. therefore not requiring you to click in the grid. when you enter the general costing details they automatically default to the purchase costing grid on the Purchase Details tab. If a work order/project or equipment reference has been entered in the general costing grid. If Structured Plant Nos is flagged as Y on the System Control File and a plant number exists for the equipment reference. creation and item details for the requisition. This tab is not available when creating a requisition until you save the requisition.3620 Enter work order or project number. the total allocation percent must add up to 100%. The fields on this tab are described below: © 2009 Mincom . the information that appears cannot be modified. If the Plant Number is a duplicate. Right-click and search for a Work Order or Project if the number is not known. Alloc Per (Allocation Percentage) This field defaults to 100% on the first costing allocation entry and zero for the second. however there is a limitation. the button can be selected to allow the addition of text instructions. Cost Centre Enter a cost centre or right-click to search for a cost centre. At that time. no costing details are defaulted into the purchase costing grid. you can use Show to return associated details. Only the initial costing defaults to another costing grid. Other tab In this tab you can review the authorisation. Creation Time This field displays the time that the requisition was created. Created By This field displays the user code and name of the user who created the requisition. Creation Date This field displays the date on which the requisition was created. CREATION Last Acquitted Date This field displays the most recent date on which an item was issued. modify or review items on a requisition.3620 377 AUTHORISATION Position This field displays the most recent position to have authorised the requisition. Authorised Status This field displays the current authorisation status of the requisition. Items tab In the Items tab you create. Requested by Position This field displays the position held by the person who initiated the requisition. that is. items that have been issued in full and/or marked as complete. Total Amount This field displays the total dollar value of all items on the requisition.Work Orders . Authorised Date This field displays the date on which the requisition was most recently authorised. The tabs that are available when adding items to a requisition are: • Catalogued • Non-Catalogued © 2009 Mincom . MISCELLANEOUS Number of Items This field displays the total number of items on the requisition. Completed Items This field displays the number of completed items on the requisition. You must complete this field or the Stock Code field. That action may be to produce an error message. any stock that is available can be issued to partially fill the requisition. If partial issues are allowed. to ensure that you are requesting the unit of measure in which the item is transacted. ensure the check box is de-selected. Part No Enter the part number for the requisition item. Part Issue Acceptable Select this check box if partial issues are allowed. Entry is validated against the Table File AA . Description This field displays the description of the Stock Code. The default is to allow partial issues. an automated search to find a district to which the requisition can be referred. Entry is validated against the catalogue.3620 • APL • LinkOne Catalogued sub-tab Use the Catalogued sub-tab to enter catalogued items being requisitioned. or the creation of a referred demand record which an inventory controller can manually refer to another district. Unit of Measure Select the unit of issue from the drop-down list. If the item is not included in district inventory. when there is insufficient stock to complete the requisition. Right-click to search for the stock code for the requisition item. district control indicators determine the action taken by Ellipse. Stock Code Enter the stock code. If partial issues are not allowed. The fields on this tab are described below: Quantity Required Enter the quantity required. If the part number is associated with a catalogued item. Mnemonic Enter the mnemonic from the drop-down list.Manufacturers Mnemonic. This field is mandatory. Entry is validated against the Table File UM . This field is mandatory. When a Stock Code is entered.378 Work Orders . and is also validated against the district inventory record. Ellipse advises that a stock code(s) in the catalogue has this part number. © 2009 Mincom . in terms of the unit of measure. this entry is also validated against the catalogue.Unit of Measure. This button is available when creating a requisition and adding items. This button is only available when an item has been selected on the item grid. Edit This button opens the fields on this tab for modifying an item requisition.3620 379 Note: You can use one of the following buttons to execute the required action. OK This button adds an items to the grid list. this entry is also validated against the catalogue.Unit of Measure. Cancel This button cancels the action being taken on an item. after validating that the mandatory information had been loaded. Estimated Price Enter the estimated price per item. New This button opens the fields on this tab for adding a new item to the requisition. whether or not an update has taken place. whether or not an update has taken place. When a Stock Code is entered. This is only applicable to purchase requisition items.Work Orders . This button is only available when a requisition has been saved. Button Purpose Availability Costing This button opens a costing grid for applying costing at the item level. Narrative This button opens a screen to allow the use of narrative text on orders for this requisition item. Entry is validated against the Table File UM . and should be left blank for a field release or service item. Non-Catalogued sub-tab Use the Non-Catalogued sub-tab to enter non-catalogued items being requisitioned. However. This field is mandatory for a goods item. in terms of the unit of measure. Delete This button deletes an item from the requisition. and an item is selected on the item grid. This button is only available when an item has been selected on the item grid. This button is only available when creating a requisition item. and should be left blank for a field release or service item. The fields on this tab are described below: Quantity Required The quantity required. to ensure that you are requesting the unit of measure in which the item is transacted. This button is available when an item has been selected for update. Unit of Measure The unit in which the item is issued. the availability of the buttons depends on the option you have selected. This field is mandatory for a goods item. See below for more information. © 2009 Mincom . This button is available when an item has been selected for update. However. New This button opens the fields on this tab for adding a new item to the requisition.Manufacturers Mnemonic. Valid values are: • G . service items cannot be edited. Description Enter a description of the item. Part No Enter the part number for the requisition item. Edit This button opens the fields on this tab for modifying an item requisition.Goods (default) • S .Field Release. This button is available when creating a requisition and adding items. Item Type The type of item being requisitioned.380 Work Orders . and is not validated. Mnemonic Enter the mnemonic from the drop-down list. item has been selected on the item grid. Entry is text only. Ellipse advises that a stock code(s) in the catalogue has this part number. creating a requisition item. Entry is validated against the Table File AA . You must complete this field or the Stock Code field. If the part number is is associated with a catalogued item. Once the requisition is finalised.3620 Estimated Freight Enter the estimated cost of freight for the item. Button Purpose Availability More Description This button opens a free text area for adding additional descriptive text to a requisition item.Service • F . © 2009 Mincom . the availability of the buttons depends on the option you have selected. it cannot be changed. Note: You can use one of the following buttons to execute the required action. This button is only available when you select the requisition item in the 'Items' tab (by double clicking on the item). See below for more information. This button is only available when an item has been selected on the item grid. Once an item type has been selected. Delete This button deletes an item from the This button is only available when an requisition. Costing This button opens a costing grid for This button is only available when applying costing at the item level. Component Modifier Code Select a component code modifier from the drop-down list. Component Code Select a component code modifier from the drop-down list. Select this link for more information about Application Parts Lists. Select this link if you need more information about Equipment Group Identifiers. Entry is validated against the Table File CO . Sequence Number Enter a sequence number. entering 2 in this field results in a requisition for 8 litres of oil and 2 oil filters. APL sub-tab Use the APL tab to enter all or some of the items on an Application Parts List (APL) for requisitioning. For example. in terms of the APL. Entry is validated against the Table File MO .Work Orders .Modifier Code. © 2009 Mincom . Cancel This button cancels the action being This button is available when an item taken on an item. select the check box and enter an equipment reference. has been selected for update. Modifier codes can only be selected when a component code is been selected. Entry is validated against the Equipment Register. entry is mandatory. The fields on this tab are described below: Quantity Required Enter the quantity required. if the APL consists of 4 litres of oil and 1 oil filter. This field is used to form a combination of Equipment Group ID/Component Code/Modifier or Equipment Reference/Component Code/Modifier to enable more precise searches for APLs. Entry is only permitted when a component code has been entered. to precisely identify an APL based on either Equipment Group ID/Component Code/Modifier/Sequence number or Equipment Reference/Component Code/Modifier/ Sequence number. This button is available when an item has been selected for update.Component Code. whether or not an update has taken place. after validating that the mandatory information had been loaded. Equipment Group ID Select this check box and enter an equipment group ID if you are identifying the APL by an Equipment Group Identifier.3620 381 OK This button adds an items to the grid list. Entry is validated against the EGI file. whether or not an update has taken place. Equipment Reference As an alternative to identifying an APL by Equipment Group Identifier. If a Component Modifier Code is entered. This field is mandatory. using any data that you have provided. This button has constant availability. after validating that the update has taken place. Note: You can use one of the following buttons to execute the required action. the availability of the buttons depends on the option you have selected. whether or not an update has taken place. Button Purpose Availability APL Search This button initiates the APL search application. provided the APL module is active. © 2009 Mincom . See below for more information. Part Number This field displays the part number of the item. OK This button adds an items to the grid This button is available when an item has been selected for update. Units This field displays the unit of measure of the items being requested. whether or not an list. This button is available when creating a requisition and adding items. mandatory information had been loaded.3620 APL Search Button Use the APL Search button to search for APL Numbers if full APL details are not known. However. Manufacturer This field displays the manufacturer of the item. Qty This field displays the quantity of the item being requested. This button is available when an item has been selected for update. Description This field displays a description of the item. LinkOne sub-tab Use the LinkOne tab to select items from the LinkOne Parts Book for requisitioning. New This button opens the fields on this tab for adding a new item to the requisition.382 Work Orders . Cancel This button cancels the action being taken on an item. This button is available when an item has been selected for update. When you return from LinkOne. Cancel This button cancels the action being taken on an item. Button Purpose Availability New This button opens the fields on this tab This button is available when creating a for adding a new item to the requisition and adding items. the availability of the buttons depends on the option you have selected. This button is only available when you have returned to Ellipse from LinkOne. the button will carry the caption 'Load Data' for loading any LinkOne data to your requisition item.3620 383 Note: You can use one of the following buttons to execute the required action. whether or not any update has taken place. LinkOne This button opens the LinkOne application. Load Data This button loads the requisition item with any data selected in the LinkOne application. This button is available for the activation of LinkOne. © 2009 Mincom . However. requisition. See below for more information. to allow the selection of parts graphically.Work Orders . vibration monitoring. Exact Match Displays the exact condition monitoring measurement based upon the entries made in the search fields. for example. The summary view will display the list of Condition Monitoring Sets meeting the search parameters. including setting up the equipment or component being measured.Condition Monitoring Set Measurements This screen has a number of functions relating to the Condition Monitoring module. Starts With Displays the condition monitoring measurement which start with the specified characters and match the entered search criteria. Enter search criteria into these fields to narrow the search. Choose the required search method: All Displays every condition monitoring measurement matching the selection criteria entered. Records found matching the search criteria display in the results grid. A Condition Monitoring Type refers to the type of measurement being taken. and this will always display in Date Order. as well as defining the caution and danger levels. • Measurements can be recorded either as a result of scheduled measurement activities or based on observations. © 2009 Mincom . Primary search keys display in bold. Starts From Displays the condition monitoring measurement which start from the specified characters and match the entered search criteria. including the following: • Measurement sets can be defined. oil analysis. Only one entry will appear for each Set of Measurements taken on a particular Date and Time. Measurement Sets that contain Caution Levels will display with a yellow symbol and those that contain Danger Levels will display with a red symbol. Those that contain a Rate of Change warning will also display a red symbol.3620 MSQ345 . Search for Condition Monitoring Measurements . the measurement type. position and frequency. • Actual measurements can be reviewed against the measurement set. Equipment. Date. A Condition Monitoring Set refers to the C/M Type. Component combination. There may be a number of search fields available on a number of tabs on this screen. • Work orders can be generated automatically once an alarm setting is activated.MSQ345 Search Criteria The search screen provides facilities for searching for a condition monitoring measurements based on a specific search method and criteria.384 Work Orders . Monitoring Type This field displays the monitoring code and description for which the condition monitoring measurements display. Modifier Code This field displays the modifier code and description for which the condition monitoring measurements display. © 2009 Mincom . Type This field displays the measurement type. UOM (Unit Of Measure) This field displays the unit of measure used for the measurement.Work Orders . Type Description This field displays the measurement type description. Component Code This field displays the component code and description for which the condition monitoring measurements display. Position This field displays the position code and description for which the condition monitoring measurements display. Measure Time This field displays the time the measurement was taken. Measure Date The date that the condition monitoring measurement was taken.3620 385 Condition Monitoring Set Measurements The fields on this screen are described below: Equipment Reference This field displays the Equipment or plant number for which the condition monitoring measurements display. Description This field displays the description of the equipment item or plant number for which the condition monitoring measurements display. © 2009 Mincom . Yellow indicates CAUTION LEVEL. Alarm Red indicates DANGER LEVEL.3620 Value This field displays the value of the measurement. Alarm Work Order This field displays the Work Order raised when the alarm was triggered.386 Work Orders . Txt (Text) This field indicates in there is commentary text associated with this reading. Visual Insp (Visual Inspection) This field displays the visual inspection code (3) that may assist in analysis of this environment/ conditions when the reading was taken. Alarm District This field displays the District in which the alarm was raised. There are a number of search fields available on six tabs on this screen. If this search method is selected. In addition. The document status displays to the right of the document number. Tabs • General • Versions • Links • Classifications • Specifications • Keywords © 2009 Mincom . Job Estimates. The document name displays below the document number. Records found matching the search criteria display in the results grid. Starts From Displays the documents that start from the specified characters and match the entered search criteria. such as Contracts. Starts With Displays the documents that start with the specified characters and match the entered search criteria. Exact Match Displays the exact document based upon the entries made in the search fields. document links (links from documents to other entities within Ellipse. and Work Orders) can be maintained. Choose the required search method: All Displays every document matching the selection criteria entered. Search for Document .Work Orders .MSQ580 The fields on this screen are described below: Document This field displays the document number. Enter search criteria into these fields to narrow the search.Document This screen is used to review all information about a document and the versions of a document. Documents . only the District Code and Document Number fields are available for input. Document version routing is also maintained from this screen.MSQ580 Search Criteria The search window provides facilities for searching for a document based on a specific search method and criteria.3620 387 MSQ580 . Document Types). AUTHOR Company This field displays the company where the document originated from. The type description displays to the right. Reference The reference number of the external or internal source. RELATED DOCUMENTS Supersedes The number of the document that this document take the place of. Superseded By The number of the document that replaces this document. ADDRESSEE Company This field displays the company where the document was sent. © 2009 Mincom . Document Type This field displays the code indicating the document type (from the Table File DO . Versions tab This tab displays a results grid with information on the existing versions of the document. The version can be selected by double-clicking it to view version details in the Dialog Box .388 Work Orders .Document Version. The fields on this tab are described below: User Status Enter a code indicating the user status type to select.3620 • Lists • Extended Text • Commentary General tab This tab displays general information that is common across all versions of the document. This field is optional and is validated against the Table File DOUS . Name This field displays the name of the author of the document. Name This field displays the recipient of the document.Document User Status. based on the entity Link Type: Link Type Link Reference EQ . Link Type Description This field displays the description of the entity Link Type (from the Table File DOLT . Links tab This tab displays information on the links between the document and entities in Ellipse such as Contracts. The fields on this tab are described below: Link Type Enter the code indicating the entity type to link to the document. Job Estimates.Document Link Type. The following table lists examples of data required for the Link Reference field. Date Created This field displays the date the document version information record was created in Ellipse.Forward Purchase Agreement (FPA) The first character must be the FPA type (F-FPA/R-Repair Group/QQuote). Type This field displays the document version type description (from the Table File DOVT . and Work Orders. Link Reference Enter a valid reference from the entity. This field is mandatory. This field is mandatory and is validated against the Table File DOLT .Document Version Type). The next five characters are the FPA group type.Document Link Type). © 2009 Mincom . Authorised By This field displays the name of the employee who authorised the document version.Work Orders . Status This field displays the document version status description (from the Table File DOVS .Document Version Status). Created By This field displays the name of the employee who created the document version.3620 389 The fields on this tab are described below: Version The document version. This field is validated based on the Link Type entered.Equipment Type Equipment number or plant number FP . This field is optional for all other entities.Document Classification. Up to ten classification tables titles. The table files are fully configurable by the customer. Specifications tab This tab displays information on the document design specifications.3620 RO . The fields on this tab are described below: List The code indicating the list that the document is registered to (from the Table File LD .Recommended Order Recommended order item WO .Design Specifications. © 2009 Mincom . codes. The following information can be entered.Work Order Work order number Description This field displays the description of the entity Link Reference.390 Work Orders . and descriptions display from the Table Files L0 to L9 . This field is mandatory if the Link Type is a Recommended Order (RO).Document List Code Table). Lists tab This tab displays information on the lists that the document is registered to. Up to five design specification codes and descriptions display from the Table File DG . Other Enter additional information about the entity. based on the entity Link Type: Link Type Other Equipment Number Component code FPA FPA (Forward Purchase Agreement) item Part Number Mnemonic Project Approval Variation number Purchase Order Purchase order item Recommended Order Recommended order item Classifications Tab This tab displays information on the document classifications. Keywords tab This tab displays up to 18 keywords associated with the document. © 2009 Mincom . Extended Text tab This tab displays the extended text for the document.Work Orders .Document List Code Table).3620 391 List Description The list description (from the Table File LD . Commentary tab This tab displays the commentary text for the document. Records found matching the search criteria display in the results grid.3620 MSQ620 . Exact Match Displays the exact work order based upon the entry made in the Work Order No. Choose the required search method: All Displays every work order matching the selection criteria entered. When reference codes are used for a search. You can search for work orders with matching associated equipment items under the Primary Criteria tab by entering an associated equipment item. all other search criteria are ignored. Starts From Displays the work orders that start from the specified characters and match the entered search criteria. Work Order The fields on this screen are described below: © 2009 Mincom . Depending on which option you select. You must include at least one of the primary search criteria on the Primary Criteria tab. click the Reference Code tab and type the required reference code in the field provided. Task (Search view Task option) This option is selected for work order tasks. modifying. The Work Order Task screen displays. field. different search screens display. Work order and work order task requirements can also be maintained.MSQ620 Search Criteria The search screen provides facilities for searching for a work order based on a specific search method and criteria. as well as several work management applications. Starts With Displays the work orders that start with the specified characters and match the entered search criteria. Select either the work order or task option to search for either a work order or work order task.392 Work Orders . Menu options provide direct links to the accounting system and requisitioning application. To search using a reference code. The Work Order screen displays. Search for Work Order Criteria .Work Orders The Work Order screen provides facilities for searching. To narrow the search. and reviewing details for a specific work order or work order task. enter any additional search criteria available on the tabs. creating. The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order (Search view Work Order option) Select this option to search for work orders. Note: Click New Description to add extended text to the work order description. Information can include the following: • Equipment details • Identification number for the person who initiated the work order © 2009 Mincom . including all tasks. The prefix is created as part of configuration on the District Control file.3620 393 Work Order No The work order number. until each task is updated with changes. Work Order Desc (Work Order Description) Enter a description of the work order.Work Orders . This field is mandatory. and modifying definition information for a work order. District Code The district code associated with the work order. Task No This field is used to identify a task number for the work order. Tabs • Definition • Planning • Tasks • Scheduling • Costs • Cost Allocation • Address • Completion • Job Codes • History • Reference Codes Definition tab This tab allows for recording. or Prefix Enter the prefix of the work order. Definition information relates to the entire work order. reviewing. An error displays when a work order save is attempted. W Costing is not allowed on the equipment. Entry of an equipment item defaults the item's Cost Centre/ Account field on the Cost Allocation tab. If this work order was generated as a result of a work request. you need to delete the account code before saving the new equipment. Segments Button Note: Click Segments to enter segment start and end values.394 Work Orders . Location Enter the location of the equipment from the equipment record if an equipment number is entered. The fields on this tab are described below: EQUIPMENT DETAILS Reference The identification of the equipment when the job is performed. this defaults from the first equipment reference. The adjacent field displays the two-line description of the corresponding equipment. Status The current status of the equipment. The adjacent field displays the description of the status. Work Group The work group responsible for the work order. the assigned person defaults from the originator. If this is not the correct originator ID. Originator Id The Originator ID from the user ID of the person logged in to Mincom Ellipse. A warning displays when the work order is saved. E Costing is not allowed on the equipment. The warning message does not stop the equipment from being used on the work order. The following occurs depending on the flag on the equipment: A Costing is allowed on the equipment and the work order is to be saved. A segment range must exist and be set up in MSO600. search and select the employee ID of the person who originated the work order. The adjacent field displays the description of the location. The adjacent field displays the originator's name. Assigning a work group allows the work order to be scheduled if the following conditions are in place: © 2009 Mincom . Note: If an incorrect equipment reference was entered and you need to change it. This information can be changed if the resulting work is charged to a different work area.3620 • Work group responsible for the work order • Identifier for a work request associated with the work order The originator of the work order is mandatory information. If a work group is not entered on a work order. If you do not delete the account code. The equipment reference is validated against the equipment file to determine if costing can be recorded against this item. the reference defaults from the work request equipment reference. Orig Priority (Originator Priority) The originator's priority defaults from the work request priority if the work order was generated as a result of a work request. This information defaults on the History tab after the work order is saved. This field is populated automatically if the work order was initiated from the work request application. This indicator is available if the equipment referenced on the work order has data recorded and if the equipment register MSSS status indicator is set to A. The values and their meanings are held on the Table File PY . RAISED Raised Date The date the work order was raised. Request Id The identification number of the work request associated with the work order. This is a number from 1 to 99. Entry is validated against the Table File OD . Raised Time The time the work order was raised. This information defaults on the History tab after the work order is saved. The adjacent field displays the work request description. De-select the option if this work order is not to be treated as a maintenance strategy support work order. Tolerances are defined in the PY table file and if this field is modified they are recalculated. The adjacent field displays the description of the document type.Work Orders .3620 • Maintenance scheduling is in use • A planned start date is entered 395 The work order is authorised either by automatic authorisation or manual authorisation. If no work group is entered. The adjacent field displays the work group name. This field is mandatory if an Original Document Type is entered.Work Order Priority Code. 1 is the highest priority. The adjacent field displays the originator's priority description. Orig Doc Type The original source of the job. © 2009 Mincom .Originating Document. the Assign to Field defaults the logged on user. inclusive. and No The number of the original source document. MSSS Applies Select the Maintenance Strategy and Support System (MSSS) option. you can enter any valid component code. The fields on this tab are described below: Work Order Type The work order type code. This link is established by entering an existing CATW table code in the associated values of the relevant maintenance type code. If no specific profile is located. the component profile of the group identifier is selected. The maintenance type code is linked to a category of work code to generate work notices when the work order is saved.396 Work Orders . select the code indicating the specific sub-assembly of the work performed. Work order types and maintenance types are mandatory. In addition. © 2009 Mincom . the work order type defaults from the work request classification type. Planning information includes the: • Type of work order and maintenance • Assignment details including required date and time for the work to be completed • Units of work and the quantity required This tab holds some of the most important work order information for use in the planning process. Component Code If an item of equipment is entered. to generate a work notice a valid Notice Location must be entered on the Address tab of the work order. Maintenance Type The maintenance type code for this work order. The system checks if this is a valid component for the item of equipment by examining its component profile.3620 Planning tab In the Planning tab you can record. If this work order was generated as a result of a work request. If no profile is located. review. including the date that the work is required by and the ability to set a flag for automatic generation of requisitions.Maintenance Type. The description of the work order type code displays in the adjacent field. The description of the maintenance type displays in the adjacent field. The adjacent field displays the description of the code. icon displays the EGI Profile Search screen. allowing you to conduct a search for Clicking the component and modifier codes. and modify planning information for a work order.Component Code. Entry is validated against the Table File CO . Entry is only allowed if an equipment number or reference has been entered. Entry in this field is mandatory and is validated against the Table File WO Work Order. Entry in this field is mandatory and is validated against the Table File MT . but a group identifier is defined for the equipment. Entry is validated against the Table File MO – Modifier Code. The adjacent field displays the description of the code. © 2009 Mincom . Required Start Time The required start time the work is to commence. If this work order is generated as a result of a work request. the field updates according to the tolerance value. This entry is validated against the Table File PY . Note: Click the icon to display the Dialog Box . This field is the same time as the Plan Start Time field on the Scheduling tab.Work Order Priority Code. the Required By Date defaults from the work request. Required By Date Enter the date when the work is required to be completed. This entry is validated against the Table File PY . Required By Time Enter the date when the work is required to be completed. the field updates according to the tolerance value. If the work order has no planner/originator/priority record no tolerance information is recorded.3620 397 Component Modifier Code The component modifier code used to further define the location specified by the component code. If a component code was entered.Work Order Priority Code. This field is the same date as the Plan Start Date field on the Scheduling tab. If the work order has no planner/originator/priority record no tolerance information is recorded.Work Orders . If this work order is generated as a result of a work request. If the work order has no planner/originator/priority record no tolerance information is recorded. If the work order has a priority code record and the priority code has tolerance information.Work Order Priority Code. If the work order has a priority code record and the priority code has tolerance information.EGI Profile Search to search for component and modifier codes. Assign Person This field displays the ID of the person responsible for carrying out this work order. the Required By Date defaults from the work request. Required Start Date The required start date the work is to commence. This entry is validated against the Table File PY . this field must be completed. If the work order has no planner/originator/priority record no tolerance information is recorded. the field updates according to the tolerance value. If the work order has a priority code record and the priority code has tolerance information. Work Order Priority Code.5 for five and a half hours. Units of Work The unit of work for this work order.Unit of Work. © 2009 Mincom .WS . however the Required Start Date and Required by Date fields are updated with the Plan Start Date and Plan Finish Date field dates. This creates a link between this work order and the specified work order. User Status The user-defined status code. APTW Exists This is a read only option. Tolerances are defined in the PY table file and if this field is modified they are recalculated. Related Work Order The number of a related work order. This entry is validated against the Table File UW . This is used to monitor work in progress.User Work Order Status. for example. the field updates according to the tolerance value. If no priority is entered the tolerance calculation is not performed. Entry is validated against the Table File . This field is mandatory if the No of Units Required field is completed. The earned value of the work completed to date is calculated based on the rate held on the associated value of the unit of work selected. APTW This field group displays if an Application for Permit to Work (APTW) exists for the selected work order. This is automatically selected when an APTW is linked to the work order task. 5. This entry is validated against the Table File PY . Recall Time Hours The length of time it takes for the plant to be back in production. Auto Requisition? Select this option to automatically requisition any APL items associated with this work order’s tasks. and the units of work completed. Planners Priority The priority set by the person who planned the job. This entry is validated against the Table File PY Work Order Priority Code.3620 If the work order has a priority code record and the priority code has tolerance information.398 Work Orders . The time is in hours and decimals. No of Units Required Enter a number from 1 to 9999999. Standard Job The number of the standard job to which the work order is linked.99 to indicate the number of units of work to be covered by this work order. If tasks are created directly from a standard job and you need to modify them to fit the current work order. Highest Task No This field displays the highest task number on the work order and can be modified. The fields on this tab are described below: SHUTDOWN DETAILS Number This field displays the shutdown number the work is included in. This information determines the method the work order is included in the work groups schedule. MST (Maintenance Scheduling Task) This field displays the MST number created from a work order. Tasks Complete This field displays the number of tasks completed for the work order and can be modified. The fields on this tab are described below: No.Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom . Offset Tasks Select this option if the task planned start dates are required to maintain an offset and the work order header planned start date is changed. Type This field displays the type of shutdown the work is included in. of Tasks This field displays the number of tasks on the work order and can be modified. This option is only available if Project is loaded on the local machine. An option to use Microsoft® Project is also available for managing task dates and relationships.3620 399 APTW Exists for Task Select this option to indicate if an APTW is created for any of the work order tasks or not. You need to select the Schedule Work Order option to enter data. You can record new task information and modify current task information. Equipment Ref This field displays the reference of the equipment item to be shut down. they can be changed from this tab. Tasks tab The Tasks tab allows you to review or modify job information for each work order task. The majority of information on this tab is for review only. Scheduling tab The Scheduling tab allows you to record and review scheduling information for the work order. Plan Finish Date (Planned Finish Date) The date scheduled for finishing the work specified in the work order. 10. otherwise an error or warning message displays when the date is changed.000 km. Plan Start Time The time scheduled for starting the work specified in the work order. Crew This field displays the crew planned to do the work.000 hr. Costs tab The Costs tab displays the total estimated and actual costs for the work order. When entering a plan finish date the date defaults to the Required By Date field on the Planning tab. Must Start Indicator Select this option if the job is planned to start on the plan start date. Error Select this option if you want an error message to display when changes are made to the plan start date. SCHEDULED FOR Statistic Type The type of statistic used to trigger the scheduling of the work. for example 50. Plan Finish Time The time scheduled for finishing the work specified in the work order.400 Work Orders . Warning Select this option if you want a warning message to display when changes are made to the plan start date. When entering a plan start date it defaults to the Required Start Date field on the Planning tab.3620 PLAN DATES/CREW Plan Start Date (Planned Start Date) The date scheduled for starting the work specified in the work order. Statistic Value The value of this statistic when work should start. © 2009 Mincom . The warning message will need to be confirmed. • The total actual costs are calculated from financial transactions against the work order. ACTUAL Resource Hours The actual resource hours required to fulfil the work order. Total Cost The total of estimated costs. resource cost.3620 401 Requirements including associated costs are recorded against a work order. Equipment Cost The estimated cost of equipment required to fulfil the work order. This tab is review only. The fields on this tab are described below: COST TYPE The resource hours. © 2009 Mincom . Resource Cost The estimated cost of resources required to fulfil the work order. • Manually estimated costs are entered with the update estimates menu option. Other Cost The estimated cost of other costs required to fulfil the work order. Material Cost The estimated cost of material required to fulfil the work order. Resource Hours The estimated resource hours required to fulfil the work order. ESTIMATED Note: You cannot select the Calc option next to the estimated group fields.Work Orders . equipment cost. After selecting the calculation option the Calc option is selected. materials and other) and a total estimate cost for all requirements display. actual and variances required to fulfil the work order. The total estimated cost for each type of requirement (labour. equipment. Entry is controlled in the following manner: • Calculated entries on this tab are controlled by the requirements menu option. material cost. other cost and total costs displays for estimated. If you want the system to calculate the costs you need to select from the menu Work Order»Update Estimates and select the calculation option. • Duration Hours are entered with the durations menu option. Total Cost The total of actual costs. Actual The total time actually taken to complete the job.3620 Resource Cost The actual costs for resources required to fulfil the work order.402 Work Orders . Other Costs The difference between actual and estimated costs for other costs. Other Cost The actual costs of other costs required to fulfil the work order. Estimated This field displays the time estimated to complete the job. © 2009 Mincom . Material Cost The actual costs for materials required to fulfil the work order. Total Costs The difference between actual and estimated costs for the total of all costs. Equipment Cost The difference between actual and estimated costs for equipment. VARIANCE Resource Cost The difference between actual and estimated costs for resources. Equipment Cost The actual costs for equipment required to fulfil the work order. DURATION HOURS Calculate Duration Hours Select this option if you want the system to calculate duration hours. Material Cost The difference between actual and estimated costs for materials. The fields on this tab are described below: ACCOUNT Cost Centre/Account The cost centre or account where the work order belongs. Right-click to search for the cost centre or account number. allowance for funds used during construction. the account from these entities default to the work order. Actual Revenue The actual revenue earned from the work order. Cost Allocation tab The Cost Allocation tab allows you to record and display details for the allocation of costs against the work order. Actual vs Estimates Button Note: Click Actual vs Estimates to view comparisons between actual and estimated costs or hours. if required.Unit of Work.Work Orders . Subsequent to this date. Actual Cost Reallocated The total of the costs reallocated. The rate is held as an associated value on the Table File UW . If the equipment or project is quoted on this work order. Contractor Costs Select this option if you want contractor costs included in a job estimate. Suspended Select this option if you want a Date in Service set but capitalised costs are to be suspended. This calculation is based on the rate multiplied by the number of units completed. refer to the Utilities Asset Accounting module. AFUDC (Allowance for Funds Used During Construction) This field displays the AFUDC. You can change the cost centre/account if a different account is charged for the work order costs. For more information on Utilities Accounting. Date in Service The date the work being performed is deemed to be in use and can be modified.3620 403 Earned Value The earned value for the number of units of work completed. AFUDC is no longer calculated for this work order and any associated installation or removal costs are capitalised. © 2009 Mincom . 404 Work Orders . A date in the closed to commitments field will not allow any new commitments such as requisitions. Units Invoiced This field displays the number of units of work invoiced to date. If the work order has associated costs.Record Work in Progress. Capital work orders are capitalised before they are finalised. or has been removed. Do this by clearing costs from the capital work in progress accounts and posting the costs to the fixed asset register. The parent work order description displays on the adjacent field. This field can only be maintained if the logged-on user has a profile greater than three. MSQ625. When assigned a parent. ensure you have entries in the Units of Work and No of Units Required fields on the Planning tab. costs can then be allocated to the work order.3620 Capital Work Order Indicates if the work order is subject to the capitalisation process. © 2009 Mincom . A capital work order is used to describe the creation of a fixed asset. The date entered must be a current or future date. the hierarchical relationship is seen in the parent work order application. Prior dates are not valid for entry. contracts. UNITS Units Complete The number of units of work completed to date. Project Number The project number to which the work order belongs. Any costs being allocated to the work order are stopped. This is one way to build a parent-child relationship between a work order and a parent work order. Parent Work Order Right-click to search for the number of the parent work order. For calculations to be recorded from the information provided in this dialog box. Entry in this field is mandatory if the Capital Work Order option is selected. labour costing transactions. Removing an existing closed to commitments date from this field makes the work order eligible for transactions again. it cannot be set to a capital work order status. The work order TO or FROM cannot be changed after it is closed to commitments. The project description displays in the adjacent field. Closed to Commitments Date The date the work order is closed to commitments. When this date has expired. store sales or purchase orders to be created against the work order. Values for the Units Complete and the Percent Complete fields are recorded in the Dialog Box . Locations are reviewed. Notice Location Enter a notice location if constraints apply for the location. if required. Location To The location where the work finishes. see Finalise a Work Order.3620 405 Percent Complete This field displays the percentage of work completed to date. and created in the notice location application. For more information. If constraints apply at the location specified for the work order. Street Number This field displays the street number of the location. The formatted address for the Location To field in MSQ011 defaults in the formatted address group fields. Subsequent accounting transactions quoting this work order number will be flagged as errors. select Work Order » Finalise. If this work order was generated as a result of a work request. and created in the location manager application.Work Orders . To finalise costing for this work order. Billing Details Button Note: Click Billing Details to redirect costs accumulated against a work order to different account codes within the General Ledger. © 2009 Mincom . Address tab This tab allows you to select the location for the work order activities. modified. The fields on this tab are described below: LOCATION DETAILS Location From The location where the work originates. the Location To defaults from the work request location. Refer to the Units Complete field for details on how to record an entry in this field. Right-click to search for notice locations associated with the location for the work order. Notice locations are reviewed. FORMATTED ADDRESS The standard address details. using several methods and at different intervals of frequency. Finalise Work Order Costing Indicates that costing has been finalised for the work order. modified. a notice location is required. City The city of the location. Street Position The position of the street. North Area.Street Location. State The state of the location. GIS Ref No (Geographical Information System Reference Number) The Geographical Information System (GIS) reference number of the location.Equipment Location. Entry is validated against the Table File SLOC . Status This field displays the status code of the equipment's current status. This updates the equipment register record when the work order is saved. County The county of the location. For example. Post/Zip Code The postcode or ZIP code of the location. © 2009 Mincom . This updates the equipment register record when the work order is saved. Entry is validated against the Table File . Street Name The street name of the location.State Table.406 Work Orders . This entry is validated against the Table File EL . A drop-down list is available. The fields on this tab are described below: EQUIPMENT DETAILS Location This field displays the new location.3620 Street Type This field displays the street type of the location. Suburb The suburb of the location.SY . Completion tab The Completion tab enables you to review completion details for the work order. Service Off Date/Time Enter the date and time when all work related to this work order was out of service. Entry in this field is controlled by the Complete menu option. Enter an associated equipment item number if required. Equip. Completed Date This field displays the date when all work related to this work order was completed. Item This field displays the associated equipment item number if entered in the equipment Reference field on the Definition tab after the work order has been saved. Completed By This field displays the ID of the employee who performed the work or closed the work order. Service on Date/Time Enter the date and time when all work related to this work order was back in service. Actual Finish Date/Time Enter the actual finish date and time the work was completed. Actual Start Date/Time Enter the actual start date and time the work commenced. The associated equipment item (equipment) number automatically defaults to this field of it has been entered as an equipment reference on the work order.Work Orders .3620 407 This entry is validated against the Table File ES . Entry in this field is controlled by the Complete menu option. The equipment number entered in the equipment reference field must be a parent to the associated equipment item. Part Causing Failure Enter the identity of the part causing failure. © 2009 Mincom . Completed Time This field displays the time when all work related to this work order was completed. Entry in this field is controlled by the Complete menu option. cancelled or deferred. Completion Code This field displays the completion code depending on whether the work order was closed. Entry in this field is controlled by the Complete menu option.Equipment Status. Assoc. The following two groups of codes are available: • W0 – W2 Codes If the MSSS status indicator option is selected on the Definition tab. and W2 . Creation Time The time the work order was first created.Function Code respectively. Last Mod Time (Last Modified Time) © 2009 Mincom .408 Work Orders . History tab The History tab displays read-only fields containing details that provide a history of the development of the work order.Failure Mode Code. Each field displays a description of the code. The fields on this tab are described below: HISTORY Creation Date The date the work order was first created. Click the buttons to select W0 .Failure Code. Entry in this field is controlled by the Complete menu option. Raised Date The date the work order was first raised. Raised Time The time the work order was first raised.W9 . the selection buttons for these codes are available. Job Codes tab The Job Codes tab allows you to record. These codes are held on the Table Files W0 .Work Order Job Codes. • W3 – W9 Codes Select a code from the drop-down list. modify or review job code details for the work order. Up to 10 job codes are used to classify a work order.3620 Out of Service Date The date when the equipment relating to this work order was taken out of service. The descriptions of these codes are defined by the customer during implementation. Last Mod Date (Last Modified Date) The date the work order was last modified. W1 . Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom . Description This field displays the description of the reference code value. Reference codes are used to define additional information about a work order and are powerful search criteria. Authorised Date This field displays the date the work order was authorised. the date and time fields will match the creation date and time. A list of valid codes for work orders displays. If automatic authorisation is in use. The fields on this tab are described below: Ref No (Reference Number) This field displays the reference number of the work order. Closed Time This field displays the time the work order was closed. AUTHORISATION The following fields are populated if the work order has been authorised.3620 409 The time the work order was last modified. Authorised Position This field displays the position of the person who authorised the work order. Closed Date This field displays the date the work order was closed. Authorised By This field displays the person who authorised the work order. Reference Codes tab The Reference Codes tab allows you to review reference code information for a work order. Authorised Time This field displays the time the work order was authorised. Reference Code The reference codes for work orders as agreed during implementation. Reference Code Value The value of the reference code for the work order. add. or modify standard text. Use this dialog box to review.3620 Text Click on the icon to display the Dialog Box .Standard Text.410 Work Orders . if the text icon is present. as required. © 2009 Mincom . This field is mandatory. District Code The district code associated with the work order.Work Orders . Task (Search view Task option) This option is selected for work order tasks. The Work Order screen displays. Note: Click New Description to add extended text to the work order description. Tabs • Job Information • Planning • Scheduling • Costs © 2009 Mincom . The prefix is created as part of the configuration on the district control file. Task No This field displays the task number of the work order. Work Order Desc (Work Order Description) Enter a description of the work order. WO (Work Order) Select this option if you want to display work orders. or Prefix This field displays the prefix of the work order. The Work Order Task screen displays. The fields on this screen are described below: Work Order No This field displays the work order number.Work Order Task The Work Order Task screen enables you to record detailed information for each work order task that defines the overall work order.3620 411 MSQ620 . This tab controls the relationship between tasks and defines the expected workload required to complete the © 2009 Mincom . Highest Task The number of tasks allocated to the work order. The description displays on the standard work order task job card and should be clear enough to briefly describe the work to be done. The fields on this tab are described below: Task Description The description of the work order task. this is called a foreign task.3620 • Completion • APL • Task Assignment Job Information tab The Job Information tab enables you to review or modify information for each work order task. Job Description Enter a description for the task. Planning tab The Planning tab enables you to review or modify planning details for a work order task. Location From Enter a location or right-click to search for the location where the task originates. the task is committed and scheduled for the foreign task work group. Safety Instruction Enter a safety instruction code describing the safety procedure to be performed in completing the job. APTW Exists for Task Select this option if an application for a permit to work is created for this task. Work Group Enter a work group or right-click to search for the work group responsible for the task. If a work group selected is different from the work group on the work order header. During the scheduling process for the work order header. The safety instruction is validated against the Table File SI . Each task is assigned its own safety instruction/completion instruction code combination.Safety Instructions and can be selected from the drop-down list. Note: Click Job Instructions to enter free text information about the job. This tab provides basic safety information and more detailed records of job instructions in standard text format.412 Work Orders . Location To Enter a location or right-click to search for the location where the task finishes. This tab also records who the job task has been assigned to if an individual or a crew has been designated as the responsible party. Scheduled Units/Days Enter the rate of processing in units of work per day. © 2009 Mincom . Entry is validated against the Table File . Crew Type Enter or select a crew type from the drop-down list. Entry is validated against the Table File WS. You can update this field by clicking .CWT. The units of work completed and the % complete display for information. the % complete is recalculated.3620 413 job.Unit of Work. This field is optional and can be left blank. Linked Select this option if the planned start date of this task is linked to the previous task. The description of the user status displays in the adjacent field.Work Orders . or the number of work items required to complete the task. You can update this field by clicking . Entry is validated against the Table File UW . Crew This field displays a work group or a specific crew to whom the task is assigned within the work group for further workload planning. If the number of units required is modified. Units Required Enter either the units of work required to complete tasks requiring fabrication or processing. The fields on this tab are described below: Assign to Individual This field displays a work group or individual to whom the task is assigned for further workload planning. Unit of Work Enter the unit of work for each task. User Status Enter the user status attached to the work order task to restrict the review to work orders with that status. 414 Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom . The fields on this tab are described below: PLAN DATES Plan Start Date The date when this task is scheduled to start. Plan Start Time The time when the task is scheduled to start. Creation Date This field displays the date the task was created. Creation Time This field displays the time the task was created. This field can be updated by clicking the Schedule button.3620 Priority Enter or a select a priority code from the drop-down list to indicate the priority of the task. This field can be updated by clicking the Schedule button.PY. This field can be updated by clicking the Schedule button. If no district code is entered the Date Required By is not maintained with this date. Offset Days This field displays the number of days when the planned date of this task should lag behind the work order header planned start date.Manage Work District Options to determine if the Date Required By on the requisition is also updated. The date required by defaults to the day prior to the plan start date. This date is used as the operation date in scheduling the work for the work group. Plan Finish Time The time when the task is expected to be completed. Plan Finish Date The date when the task is expected to be completed. Scheduling tab The Scheduling tab displays information used during the scheduling process. This tab displays the tasks start and finish date details. Entry is validated against the Table File . This field can be updated by clicking the Schedule button. When creating a requisition from a work order task the plan start date when entered or modified is validated against table file MWDO . This field can be updated by clicking the Schedule button in the task screen. Work Orders - 3620 415 DURATIONS Estimated Duration Hours This field displays the estimated duration of the task in hours. This field is review only and can be updated using the Schedule button in the task screen. Effort (Manual Effort) The total effort allocated to a work order task to increase/decrease the estimated duration hours. When the manual effort value is modified the Estimated Duration Hours field is recalculated based on the new manual effort value. The new estimated duration hours is calculated from the original estimated duration divided by the original manual effort, then multiplied by the results of the new manual effort value. The Planned Finish Date and Planned Finish Time fields are also recalculated. EARLIEST DATES Work orders can be subject to critical path scheduling to determine the earliest start date and earliest finish date of the job and the number of days for which the job can remain unactioned, without impacting related tasks. Earliest Start Date The earliest date when the task can start, based on critical path scheduling. Earliest Start Time The earliest time when the task can start, based on critical path scheduling. Earliest Finish Date The earliest date when the task can finish, based on critical path scheduling. Earliest Finish Time The earliest time when the task can finish, based on critical path scheduling. Float Days The number of days for which the job can remain un-actioned, without impacting related tasks. This field relates to the Earliest Start Date and Earliest Finish Date fields. Costs tab The Cost tab displays the estimated material, equipment, resource and other costs for the task. Requirements and their associated costs are recorded in the requirements screen. The fields on this tab are described below: ESTIMATED © 2009 Mincom 416 Work Orders - 3620 Resource Hours This field displays the estimated number of resources in hours required to complete the job. Resource Cost This field displays the estimated resource costs required to complete the job. Material Cost This field displays the estimated material costs required to complete the job. Equipment Cost This field displays the estimated equipment costs required to complete the job. Other Cost This field displays other cost estimates required to complete the job. Total Cost This field displays the total estimated costs based on adding the estimated costs or entering a fixed estimate required to complete the job. Contractor Costs Select this option if you want contractor costs to be recorded against the work order task. Contractor costs are available if a compatible unit and job estimate is used to create the work order and its tasks. MACHINE HOURS Estimated Enter the estimated number of hours taken to complete the job if this task was assigned to a machine centre. Actual This field displays the actual number of hours accrued during this job if this task is assigned to a machine centre. Completion tab The Completion tab enables you to record completion requirements and review completion details for a work order task. The fields on this tab are described below: Completed By This field displays the person who completed the task. You can update this field after clicking Complete Task. Completed Date This field displays the date the task was completed. © 2009 Mincom Work Orders - 3620 417 You can update this field after clicking Complete Task. Completed Time This field displays the time the task was completed. You can update this field after clicking Complete Task. Completed Code This field displays the code describing the circumstances when this task was completed or cancelled. You can update this field after clicking Complete Task. Completion codes are held on the Table File SC - Maintenance Completion Status. Units Complete This field displays the units of work already completed for this task. Percent Complete This field displays the percentage of this task already completed. Actual Start Date/Time Enter the actual finish date and time the work was completed. Actual Finish/Time Enter the actual finish date and time the work was completed. COMPLETION Instruction Select the completion instruction from the drop-down list. The completion instruction indicates the procedure to be performed at the end of a job. These instructions are the reverse of the safety instructions. Completion instruction codes are held on the Table File CI - Completion Instructions. Text Code Select the completion text code from the drop-down list. The completion text code is used to define the text that prints on the right-hand side of the maintenance schedule. This provides a prompt for maintenance personnel to complete the information about the job, that is relevant. New Completion Comments Button Note: Click New Completion Comments to enter new completion comments against a job. APL tab The APL tab enables you to review or modify Application Parts Listing (APL) information for the task. APLs can be recorded if a standard bill of materials is available that suits the needs of this task. The fields on this tab are described below: © 2009 Mincom 418 Work Orders - 3620 APL Equipment Reference Select this option and enter the APL equipment reference if the APL is to be held against an individual piece of equipment. Equipment Group ID Select this option and enter the equipment group ID if the APL is to be held against an EGI. Material Requirements Exist If this option is selected, then material requirements have been set on this task. This prevents the creation of an APL requirement. If an APL is required instead of individual material requirements, the material requirements are deleted from the task before the APL is set up. Component Code Enter a component code or right-click to search for a component code if the APL is held against a specific equipment sub-assembly. Entry is validated against the Table File CO - Component Code. The value --- can be used instead of spaces. Modifier Code Enter a modifier code or right-click to search for a modifier code to designate a particular component code. Entry is validated against the Table File MO - Modifier Code. The value --- can be used instead of spaces. Sequence Number Enter the sequence number to designate individual APLs. APL Lookup Button Note: Click APL Lookup to open MSQ130 and search for an APL. Task Assignment tab The task assignment tab allows you to review open task assignment details for the task. © 2009 Mincom Work Orders - 3620 419 MSQ625 - Parent Work Order The Parent Work Order application allows for the grouping of Work Orders in cases where it is convenient to manage the Work Orders as a single entity without the overhead of a formal management project. Search for Parent Work Order The search window provides facilities for searching for a Parent Work Order based on a specific search method and criteria. Records found matching the search criteria display in the results grid. Choose the required search method: All Displays every Parent Work Order matching the selection criteria entered. Exact Match Displays the exact Parent Work Order based upon the entries made in the search fields. Starts From Displays the Parent Work Orders which start from the specified characters and match the entered search criteria. Starts With Displays the Parent Work Orders which start with the specified characters and match the entered search criteria. Parent Work Order - MSQ625 The fields on this screen are described below: Parent Work Order In create mode, enter a Parent Work Order number or allow the system to generate a number. If using a Prefix, entry is not allowed. In maintain mode, you can review the system-generated or user-defined Parent Work Order number, including prefix, if applicable. or Prefix The prefix of the Parent Work Order. Prefixes must be created as part of configuration on the District Control file. District Code The District to which the Parent Work Order belongs. Parent WO Description The description of the Parent Work Order. Tabs • General © 2009 Mincom 420 Work Orders - 3620 • Costs • Resources • Extended Description General tab The General tab provides for recording and displaying general details for a Parent Work Order. The fields on this tab are described below: Originator Id Enter or right-click, search and select the Employee ID code and name of the person who originated this Parent Work Order. When creating a new Parent Work Order, an entry in this field is mandatory. Authorised By The Employee ID code and name of the person who authorised this Parent Work Order. Request ID Enter or right-click, search and select the Work Request ID linked to the Parent Work Order. If this Parent Work Order creation was initiated by the Work Request application, the Work Request ID will default. Equipment Reference Enter or right-click, search and select the reference and description of the equipment for which this Parent Work Order was raised. An entry in this field is optional. Parent Standard Job / Plan When a Parent Work Order is created by copying a Parent Standard Job/Plan, the identification number for the copied Parent Standard Job/Plan appears in this field. This field is review-only. No. of Subordinate WOs The number of subordinate Work Orders for this parent. On a Work Order you can specify the identification number of a Parent Work Order. The Work Order then becomes a subordinate of the Parent Work Order. The system totals the number of subordinates for the Parent Work Order and displays the number in this field. DATES Plan Start The date on which work on this Parent Work Order is scheduled to start. Plan Finish The date on which this Parent Work Order is scheduled to be completed. © 2009 Mincom Work Orders - 3620 421 Raised The date on which this Parent Work Order was raised. This field defaults to display the date on which the Parent Work Order was first saved. Required By The date by which this Parent Work Order must be completed. Authorised The date on which this Parent Work Order was authorised. Costs tab Costs from each Work Order subordinate are combined and displayed on this tab. Costs shown include actual and estimated costs, the variances between these costs, and total costs. The fields on this tab are described below: ESTIMATED COSTS Estimated costs are rolled up from the total estimated costs specified for each subordinate Work Order for this parent. Labour The estimated costs for labour recorded on the subordinate Work Orders. Materials The estimated costs for materials recorded on the subordinate Work Orders. Equipment The estimated costs for equipment recorded on the subordinate Work Orders. Other The estimated other costs recorded on the subordinate Work Orders. Total The total estimated costs. ACTUAL COSTS Labour The actual costs for labour recorded on the subordinate Work Orders. Materials The actual costs for materials recorded on the subordinate Work Orders. © 2009 Mincom 422 Work Orders - 3620 Equipment The actual costs for equipment recorded on the subordinate Work Orders. Other The actual other costs accrued recorded on the subordinate Work Orders. Total The total actual costs recorded on the subordinate Work Orders. VARIANCE COSTS Labour The difference between actual and estimated costs for labour. Materials The difference between actual and estimated costs for materials. Equipment The difference between actual and estimated costs for equipment. Other The difference between actual and estimated other costs. Total The total difference between actual and estimated costs. RESOURCE HOURS Estimated The gross resource hours estimated for the subordinate Work Orders. Actual The total actual resource hours charged to subordinate Work Orders. Resources tab The Resources tab displays all the resource types specified on each subordinate Work Order. The fields on this tab are described below: Class The resource class code. Description A description of the resource class. © 2009 Mincom Work Orders - 3620 423 Res Type (Resource Type) The resource type code. Description A description of the resource type. Crew Sz (Crew Size) The number of people in the work crew allocated to this task. Est Hrs (Estimated Hours) The estimated hours of completing this Work Order. Act Hrs (Actual Hours) The actual hours of completing this Work Order. Extended Description tab Use the Extended Description tab to create and modify an extended text description for a Parent Work Order. The fields on this tab are described below: Extended Description (Primary Field) The top field on this tab stores header text information. Enter or modify this information as required. Extended Description (Secondary Field) The bottom field on this tab stores the body text of the extended description. Enter or modify this information as required. © 2009 Mincom Work Notices Displays only the Work Notices matching the selection criteria entered. refer to the Notifications module overview. Choose the required search method: All Displays every Notice matching the selection criteria entered. • Aborted . details contained within the linked notice location (such as interested parties and protected periods) are included in the notice. There are a number of search fields available.Notice never sent and no longer required.Notice This MSQ629 application is used to record the information required for communicating with an authority who needs to be notified when work is to be performed at a location.424 Work Orders . A notice location can be linked to a work order. If the work order initiates the creation of a notice.Planned subsequent communication(s) with recipient(s). Records found matching the search criteria display in the results grid. Notice Status Notice status refers to the current status of the notice. For further information about the Work Notice application. Work/Daily Whereabouts Notice The fields on this screen are described below: Notice for Work Order The work order number and the description of the work order. Enter search criteria into these fields to narrow the search. Search for Notice (MSQ629) Search Criteria The search window provides facilities for searching for a Notice based on a specific search method and criteria. Possible values are: • Original . • Follow-up . Daily Whereabouts Displays only the Daily Whereabouts Notices matching the selection criteria entered.3620 MSQ629 . A notice is initiated from a work order and the Work Notice application provides a means for: • Maintaining and processing notices • Recording the history of notifications to an authority Details of locations that require a notice are stored as notice location records. They are created and maintained in the Notice Location application (MSQ62B).The first communication with the recipient(s). © 2009 Mincom . Notice Period. • Aborted . • Queued . • Amended . This field entry is system-generated and cannot be modified. Send Status Send status refers to the send status of the notice. If a planned start date is not available on the work order. If there is a planned start date.A Cancelled status indicates that previous communications are to be ignored. the due date is assigned and the notice is given a send status of QUEUED. A calculated due date must not earlier than today’s date. The due date is calculated by subtracting the value in the Notice Send Period associated value of the Table File NPER . Notices are queued at a set time before their due date. • Completed .3620 425 • Cancelled . © 2009 Mincom . Tabs • Notice • Reinstatement • Protected Period • History Notice tab This tab provides for recording and viewing details of the notice. Notice details are recorded using two sources: • Generated from the work order • Manually entered. from the Work Planned Start Date of the notice. a warning appears.This status is assigned to a notice that was initiated from a work order that does not as yet have a planned start date recorded on it.Notice has been sent to the specified recipient(s). A copy of the previous communication endorsed as cancelled is issued.Notice available for sending. The fields on this tab are described below: DUE The due date is determined from the associated work order’s planned start date. • Sent .Work Orders . a due date is not recorded and the notice is assigned a send status of PENDING. If it is earlier than today’s date.Never sent and no longer required.A Completed status indicates that there will be no more communication. Date The due date of notice. Possible values are: • Pending .An Amended status indicates that changes have been made to the previous communication. 426 Work Orders .Category of Work and are defined against the maintenance types. Notice Period The notice period code which is assigned by the system from the link between the Work Order maintenance type associated values and the CATW Table File. if required. Location The location code which is assigned by the system from the location code entered on the associated work order. Reinstatement tab Details for a reinstatement notice are recorded on the reinstatement tab. Category of Work The category of work code which is assigned by the system from the Work Order maintenance type associated value. Comments Line 2 Additional comments required for the notice. This is a free text area. The details recorded on this tab are included in reinstatement notice reports for the notice and associated work order. This field entry is system-generated and cannot be modified. It defaults to A . This period is derived from the work order’s category of work and the sensitivity of the notice location. Estimated Inspection Unit The estimated inspection unit. NOTICE DETAILS Originator Cross Reference The required ID for the originator.Work About to Start. This is a free text area. The associated values for the table codes of this table type contain the type of notice and the notice period for both the traffic sensitive and non-traffic sensitive work. Comments Line 1 Comments required for the notice. Location Description The description of the location which defaults from the location code.3620 Time The due time of notice. if required. Category of work codes are defined in the Table File CATW . Works Status The work status. © 2009 Mincom . © 2009 Mincom . Either type or select an entry. This information is system-generated. Snd Stat (Send Statement) This field is used to record options for sending or resending a reinstatement notice. • To Interested Parties . Creation Date The date when the reinstatement notice was created. The following options are available: • To authority .3620 427 Hint: A shortcut menu is available by right-clicking in the Reinstatement grid.Select this option to send or resend to the interested parties specified for the associated notice. Either type or select an entry.Work Orders . This information is system-generated. The fields on this tab are described below: Reinstat Not ID (Reinstatement Notice ID) The identifying number for the reinstatement notice. Creation Time The time when the reinstatement notice was created. An entry for this field is not mandatory.Select this option to send or resend to the authority specified for the associated notice. Surf Class (Surface Classification) A classification for the type of surface found at the excavation position. An entry is not mandatory. footpath or carriageway. Act Inspct Unit (Actual Inspection Units) The value as specified by the authority. Excav Posn (Excavation Position) The position of the required excavation for example. If the start date does not fall within a protected period.428 Work Orders . Information for protected periods for a location is recorded on the notice location. The fields on this tab are described below: From Date The date the protected period starts. Send This button allows you to send the reinstatement This button is only available if notice to the relevant authorities or interested a reinstatement notice exists.3620 • To All . If the start date falls within a protected period you are informed that approval is required. a notice location contains the to and from dates and a description for each protected period associated with the notice location. Note: You can use one of the following buttons to execute the required action: Button Purpose Availability New This button allows you to create a new reinstatement notice. approval is not required. This button is only available if a reinstatement notice exists. a notice can be initiated. Delete This button allows you to delete a reinstatement notice. When a notice is initiated from a work order or reviewed in the Work Notice/ Daily Whereabouts detail screen. Protected Period tab A notice is initiated by the selection of specific notice locations and maintenance types when work orders are created. Description A description of the protected period associated with the notice location. the period is referred to as a protected period. When you are creating a work order in the work order application and you select a notice location. Modify This button allows you to modify an existing reinstatement notice. To Date The date the protected period ends. the protected period information contained in the notice location appears on the Protected Periods tab. If a notice is initiated. This button exists at all times. the system checks the planned start date for work. This button is only available if a reinstatement notice exists. NOTICE LOCATION DETAILS © 2009 Mincom . When a constraint usually prevents work being conducted for a specific period.Select this option to send or resend to both the authority and the interested parties specified for the associated notice. A notice location contains details of authorities that need to be contacted when work is conducted in a specific location where constraints apply. parties. That is. Description A description of the notice location. Date The date approval was received. WORK APPROVED Approval for work in the location for a protected period must be gained from the authority specified in the notice location. WORK PLANNED START Date The date field for the start of work is populated from the information recorded on the work order associated with the notice. Time The time approval was received. Time The time field for the start of work is populated from the information recorded on the work order associated with the notice. Time The time field for the finish of work is populated from the information recorded on the work order associated with the notice. Sensitivity The sensitivity code for the notice location. The constraint that applies to the location is determined from the sensitivity. © 2009 Mincom .Work Orders . the system informs you that work approval is required and the fields in the Work Approved group are activated. WORK PLANNED FINISH Date The date field for the finish of work is populated from the information recorded on the work order associated with the notice. If the planned start date for work falls within a protected period.3620 429 Notice Location The ID of the notice location specified in the work order associated with the notice. By The person who granted the approval. Time The time the notice was created. Field values are automatically updated as the notice is modified. Time The time the most recent send action was performed. Time The time the notice was last modified. LAST MODIFIED By The ID and description of the person who last modified the notice. © 2009 Mincom .3620 History tab The history for the notice includes a date and time for: • Creation • Last modification • Last sent All fields on this tab are system-generated and cannot be modified.430 Work Orders . The fields on this tab are described below: CREATED By The ID and description of the person who created the notice. LAST SENT Date The date the most recent send action was performed. Date The date the notice was created. Date The date the notice was last modified. Records found matching the search criteria display in the results grid. © 2009 Mincom . Exact Match Displays the exact task assignment based upon the entries made in the search fields. Choose the required search method: All Displays every task assignment matching the selection criteria entered.3620 431 MSQ62C . The following functions are available: • assign multiple crew and/or individuals • search for task assignments including finished task assignments • detail planned start and finish information • detail actual start and finish information • quick start and finish options • reschedule task assignments • set task assignment status • delete task assignments The fields on this screen are described below: Search for Task Assignments The search screen provides the facility to search for a task assignment based on a specific search method and criteria. When a work order task is assigned to a crew or individual a record is created on the task assignment file (MSF52C).Search for Task Assignments The MSQ62C Task Assignment screen is used to either: • search for task assignments • create multiple task assignments Work order tasks are assigned to an indefinite number of crews and or individuals (employees). Starts From Displays the task assignment which starts from the specified characters and match the entered search criteria. Starts With Displays the task assignment which starts with the specified characters and match the entered search criteria.Work Orders . MSQ62C can be run as a standalone application or from the work order or work order task applications. reschedule and delete task assignments. District Code The district code the crew or employee is assigned to.432 Work Orders . WO Task No (Work Order Task Number) The work order task number. modify. Include Closed Assignments Select this option to include closed task assignments in the search results. You can not enter both an allocated crew or allocated employee. Work Order Enter the work order number to search by work order.3620 Task Assignments MSQ62C provides a search facility where the results display in a grid and various options are selected from the menu bar to maintain. Allocated Type Enter the allocated type of either crew or individual (employee). This field displays the work order number if entered on the MSQ620 .Work Order Task screen. Allocated Entity Enter the Employee ID or Crew assigned to the task. © 2009 Mincom . Status The user-defined task status. Assigned Start Date The start date assigned to the crew or employee. Work Order Enter the work order number to search by work order. This field displays the work order number if entered on the MSQ620 . Assigned Finish Date The finish date assigned to the crew or employee of the task. The work order and task number defaults if entered on MSQ620 . WO Task No (Work Order Task Number) Enter the work order task number. Assigned Start Time The starting time the crew or employee is assigned to the task. This field is mandatory. © 2009 Mincom . Allocated Employee Enter the employee ID assigned to the task. This field is optional. This field is optional.Create Task Assignments This screen is used to create multiple task assignments for a single work order task.3620 433 MSQ62C .Work Orders . This field is optional. Assigned Finish Time The finishing time assigned to the crew or employee of the task.Work Order Task screen. Entry is validated against the Table File US .User Defined WO Task Status. This field is optional. You can not enter both an allocated crew or allocated employee. Allocated Crew Enter the crew assigned to the work order task.Search for Work Order Task search screen. A work order number and task number must be entered before you can create a new task assignment. an equipment reference number for the equipment specified in the work order displays.3620 MSQ650 . The fields on this screen are described below: Equipment Reference Enter an equipment reference number for the installation position of the fitted equipment you want to trace. • Amending the sequence of tracing actions where more than one action is performed on a tracing. Mod Code (Modifier Code) Enter the modifier code in this field (if one is required). defitment. actioning an equipment. © 2009 Mincom . the same day.434 Work Orders . The entry in this field is validated against the Equipment Register to determine that it exists and it is traceable. fitment. The type of entry displayed depends on the installation position selected in the hierarchy. An installation position includes the equipment reference number. Comp Code (Component Code) Enter the component code for the equipment. rebuild and repair. For example. if required. Where more than one of a fitted equipment is part of an equipment number. a fitment work order or a stores issue.Equipment Tracing In Mincom Ellipse. the engine fitted in a CAT111 (the installation equipment) has a component code of 1000. equipment tracing provides for tracing nominated items of equipment through their lifecycle of purchase. The Equipment Tracing application is used to maintain the tracing actions recorded and updated as part of the transaction. The Equipment Tracing application provides for: • Adding an equipment tracing record for an action already recorded but has no tracing information against it. If you open the Equipment Tracing detail screen from the Work Order detail screen. • Deleting a previously recorded tracing record fitment. Pref Equip/EGI (Preferred Equipment/Equipment Group Identifier) This field displays the classification of the equipment by group or equipment number. component code and modifier code. for example. Entry is required in this field if the equipment specified for the tracing action is a component of the installation equipment. but were updated on file in an incorrect chronological sequence. Equipment Descriptions This field displays the description of the equipment as recorded in the Equipment Reference field. the modifier code indicates the location of each of the fitted equipment. for example. Expected Between Rebuilds The statistic value expected between rebuilds for the selected equipment. the entry is referring to a work order (WO) with the identifying number MAH02. Life Since Rebuild/New The statistic value for the fitted equipment accumulated since new or last rebuild. For example. Reference Number The number of the document specifying the tracing action. This is derived by adding the statistics value achieved since the previous fitment or rebuild in situ to the cumulative value of the last record of this statistic type. Fitment Date The date the current fitment was completed. a work order. If a meter reset record is located before finding a rebuild record. Position Statistic The statistic value achieved in this installation position since the previous fitment or rebuild in situ. The value for this entry reflects the selection in the Statistic Type field. Cumulative Statistic The cumulative statistic value since new for the fitted equipment.Work Orders . The value for this entry reflects the selection in the Statistic Type field. Descriptions This field displays the description of the fitted equipment.3620 435 Fit Equipment Reference Enter the equipment number that uniquely identifies the equipment fitted. if reference number MAH02 displays with a reference type WO. © 2009 Mincom . The statistic value in this field is the corresponding value recorded against the EGI profile. the total cumulative value is returned. Expected Overhaul/Replacement Date The date the fitted equipment is due for replacement or overhaul. Fitted equipment refers to the item of equipment that is fitted in the specified installation position and required the tracing action. The source of the number displayed is indicated by the reference type code. Remaining Life The statistic value of the fitted equipment's remaining life. Standard Estimate Use this check box to create the estimate as a Standard Estimate.3620 MSQ655 . Records found matching the search criteria display in the results grid. equipment and material requirements. Starts With Displays the Job Estimates which start with the specified characters and match the entered search criteria.Job Estimating The Job Estimating application is used to estimate the labour. Version No The version number of the Job Estimate. Search for Job Estimates Search Criteria The search window provides facilities for searching for a Job Estimate based on a specific search method and criteria. The job could be anything from a capital works construction project to a maintenance job. Enter search criteria into these fields to narrow the search. Primary search keys display in bold. and associated costs required to complete a job. Tabs • Estimate Details • Estimate History © 2009 Mincom . Starts From Displays the Job Estimates which start from the specified characters and match the entered search criteria.436 Work Orders . There may be a number of search fields available on a number of tabs on this screen. Description A description of the Job Estimate. Job Estimating The fields on this screen are described below: Estimate Number The unique identifying number for the Job Estimate. Choose the required search method: All Displays every Job Estimate matching the selection criteria entered. Exact Match Displays the exact Job Estimate based upon the entries made in the search fields. A Standard Estimate can be used as a template for creating new Job Estimates but cannot be selected for work and packaging. or reviewed in the detail screen.3620 • Estimate Planning • Estimate Costs • Estimate Items • Details • Costs • Planning • Location • CPR Installation • Unitisation • Quote Details • Estimate Location • Reference Codes 437 Estimate Details tab The Estimate Details tab provides for capturing and displaying general information specific to the Job Estimate being created. You will be asked to confirm an Adjustments Factors message.Work Order Types. Job Type The entry in this field is normally generated from the Work Request. If no entry defaults from the Work Request or you want to change the job type. An entry in this field is mandatory. if your company is involved in preparing estimates for work on equipment. This entry is defaulted from the login district at the time of creation. Owner District This field displays the district in which the Job Estimate was created. select a job type from the drop-down list. installation and repair can be included in the selection list for the Job Type field.Work Orders . Originator ID This field displays the employee ID of the person who originated the Job Estimate. The fields on this tab are described below: User Status This field displays the user status of the Job Estimate. The job type specifies the type of job being estimated. © 2009 Mincom . The User Status of a Job Estimate can be changed at any time by selecting JobEstimating » Change User status. For example. Entry is validated on the Table File JES – User Status. Entry is validated on the Table File WO . Alternatively. Equipment Reference If the Job Estimate is for a piece of equipment. Estimate History tab A large amount of the information on the Estimate History tab is system-generated and displays in read-only fields. For example. there may be a requirement to remove certain assets as part of the job. An operation type is a user-defined code. Operation Details Operation type is one of the factors that determine requirements and associated costs for a Job Estimate. Entry is validated on the Table File OTYP – Operation Type. Select an operation type from the drop-down list. Entry in this field is optional. So all of the estimate may relate to asset creation in a particular year.3620 Business Type A code defining the type of business or business sector the job estimate relates to. the value of the removed assets can be determined by assessing the depreciation of the assets value from the original value. Enter a Work Request number or right-click to search and select. Enter an equipment number or right-click to search and select. For example. for requirements to be recorded for both 'cold' (not energised) and 'hot' (energised) activities. or user ID. Request No If a Work Request initiated the creation of a Job Estimate.Business Type. By identifying the Vintage Year of those assets. the equipment number for the equipment is recorded in this field. The fields on this tab are described below: © 2009 Mincom . cold and hot would be defined as operation types. Ownership If ownership of the Job Estimate is shared. all of the poles installed in 1990 may be identified under a common Asset Account for that year. Vintage Year Vintage year can be used for Mass Assets to record a bulk of assets installed in a particular year and to track annual depreciation based on the year installed. this field specifies the percentage ownership for your organisation. Entry is validated against the Table File BUS . Enter an owner position or right-click to search and select.438 Work Orders . of the person responsible for the construction and maintenance of the estimate. The information displayed includes details of the changes to the status of the Job Estimate. Owner Position The position number. the identifying number/code for the work request is specified in this field. On This field displays the date on which the status was changed to SUPERSEDED.Work Orders . This entry is system-generated. This entry is system-generated.3620 439 STATUS HISTORY Authorized By This field displays the person who changed the INPROGRESS status to AUTHORISED. This entry is system-generated. This entry is system-generated. Rejected By This field displays the person who changed the status to REJECTED. At This field displays the time at which the status was changed to REJECTED. Superseded By This field displays the person who changed the status to SUPERSEDED. This entry is system generated. This entry is system-generated. This entry is system-generated. At This field displays the time when the job estimate was authorised. Packaged Date This field displays the date the Job Estimate was packaged. On This field displays the date on which the status was changed to REJECTED. © 2009 Mincom . At This field displays the time at which the status was changed to SUPERSEDED. On This field displays the date on which the job estimate was authorised. This entry is system-generated. Reqd Finish Date (Required Finish Date) Record the required finish date for the job. Expiry Time Record the expiry time for the job. This entry is system-generated.3620 Packaged Time This field displays the time when the Job Estimate was packaged. Selected Time This field displays the time when the Job Estimate was selected. Reqd Start Date (Required Start Date) Record the required start date for the job. Reqd Start Time (Required Start Time) Record the required start time for the job. Reqd Finish Time (Required Finish Time) Record the required finish time for the job.440 Work Orders . Creation Time This field displays the time at which the Job Estimate was first created. © 2009 Mincom . Expiry Date Record the expiry date for the job. ESTIMATE TIMES/DATES Creation Date The date on which the Job Estimate was first created. Selected Date This field displays the date the Job Estimate was selected. Entry is validated against the Table File CO . this field must be completed. This must be less than the Plan Finish Time. A segment range must exist and be set up in MSO600. Note: Click the EGI Profile Search icon to display the Dialog Box . The adjacent field displays the description of the code. Comp Mod Code (Component Modifier Code) The component modifier code used to further define the location specified by the component code. The fields on this tab are described below: Equipment Ref The identification of the equipment on which work is to be performed. Comp Code (Component Code) The code indicating the specific sub-assembly of the equipment. Account Code The cost centre or account number where the work is to be charged. Plan Start Date (Planned Start Date) The date scheduled for starting the work. Entry is validated against the Table File MO – Modifier Code. This information will be copied across to Ellipse entities such as work orders that are created from this estimate. If a component code was entered.Work Orders . Work Group The work group to be assigned to complete this work. Segments Button Note: Click Segments to enter segment start and end values.Component Code. This field is mandatory if a Plan Start Time is entered.EGI Profile Search to search for component and modifier codes. © 2009 Mincom .3620 441 Late Mat Date (Late Materials Date) This field displays the latest availability date for the material requirements. Estimate Planning tab The Estimate Planning tab is used to record information to assist with planning and scheduling programmed work based on standard estimates. This entry is system-generated. Est Dur Hours (Estimate Duration Hours) The estimated duration in hours to complete this work.Job Estimate Costs. . or midnight. If the Plan Start Date is today this field will default to the current time. this field will default to either the Work Group start time. or midnight.442 Work Orders . If the Plan Finish Date is today this field will default to the current time. assume a 24 hour working day to calculate the Plan Finish Date. This field is mandatory if a Plan Finish Time is entered. This must be equal to or later than the Plan Start Date. Plan Finish Time (Planned Finish Time) The time scheduled for finishing the work. Costs that have been manually recorded as displayed with a The fields on this tab are described below: COSTS Material Costs This field displays the total cost of material requirements. • If no Work Group is specified. this field will default to either the Work Group start time. This is used in conjunction with the Plan Start Date and Work Group to calculate the Plan Finish Date if one is not entered.3620 Plan Start Time (Planned Start Time) The time scheduled for starting the work. according to the following rules: • If a Work Group is specified. Plan Finish Date (Planned Finish Date) The date scheduled for finishing the work. Otherwise. use the default working hour for the work group to calculate the Plan Finish Date from the Plan Start Date and Duration. © 2009 Mincom . Estimate Costs tab The Estimate Costs tab displays the cost details for the Job Estimate which have been recorded in the Dialog Box . Otherwise. Costs that have been calculated are displayed with a . Resource Costs Adjustment This field displays the adjustments associated with resource requirements. Resource Costs after Adjustment This field displays the total cost of resource requirements including adjustments associated with resource requirements. Contract Costs This field displays the total of contractor costs. Total Cost This field displays the total of requirements. Equipment Costs after Adjustment This field displays the total cost of equipment requirements including adjustments associated with equipment requirements.Work Orders . Equipment Costs This field displays the total cost of equipment requirements. Total Costs Adjustment This field displays the total adjustments for all requirements. COSTS AFTER ADJUSTMENT Material Costs After Adjustment This field displays the total cost of material requirements including adjustments associated with material requirements. ADJUSTMENT Material Costs Adjustment This field displays the adjustments associated with material requirements.3620 443 Resource Costs This field displays the total cost of resource requirements. © 2009 Mincom . other and contractor costs. Equipment Costs Adjustment This field displays the adjustments associated with equipment requirements. Other Costs This field displays the total of other costs. Estimate Items tab The Estimate Items tab provides for constructing. The total cost. © 2009 Mincom . Description The description recorded in this first Description field is the label displayed for the item in the hierarchy.444 Work Orders . other and contractor costs including all adjustments.3620 Other Costs after Adjustment This field displays the total cost after accounting for risks for costs other than requirement costs and contract costs. after accounting for adjustments. The tools required for developing a hierarchy are available on the toolbar immediately above the panel. The default value is 1. Qty Reqd (Quantity Required) The quantity of the item required for the estimate. This tab is divided into two sections: • Hierarchy Panel .This panel contains the following tabs: • Details • Costs • Planning • Location • CPR Installation • Unitisation Details tab (Estimate Items tab) The Details tab provides for recording and displaying details for an item that is selected in the hierarchy. • Detail Panel .The hierarchy for the job estimate is developed in the hierarchy panel. The second Description field is available for additional descriptive information. is calculated for the hours specified in this field. The fields on this tab are described below: Item No The Job Estimate item number. Calc Res Hours (Calculated Resource Hours) This field displays the total resource hours required. modifying and reviewing the hierarchy for a Job Estimate. Total Costs after Adjustment This field displays the total of requirements. Op Type (Operation Type) The operation type is defaulted from the Estimate Details tab. requiring competitive prices to be sought. Auto Consolidate (Auto Consolidation for Bulk Packaging) Indicates that the item with all its sub-items should be consolidated automatically during the packaging process. Bus Type (Business Type) The business type is defaulted from the Estimate Details tab. © 2009 Mincom . If necessary. Job Type The job type is defaulted from the Estimate Details tab. If necessary. Description The description recorded in the first Description field is the label displayed for the item in the hierarchy. This second Description field is available for additional descriptive information. Normally. This field is validated against the Table File PY . the lowest priced option is selected at the time of estimation. use the arrow button displayed in this field to select a different entry. This may be by Government Regulation. use the arrow button displayed in this field to select a different entry.Work Order Priority Code. Contractor This field is available if the item is a Compatible Unit (CU). Multiple prices can be sought and compared. This entry is the same as the Qty Reqd field entry until quantities have been included in a job package. use the arrow button displayed in this field to select a different entry. Default value is 1. Contestable Item Select this check box if the item is contestable. Ownership % If more than one party is responsible for the resulting assets.Work Orders . Orig Priority The code indicating the originator's priority. If necessary.3620 445 Avail Qty (Available Quantity) The available quantity is automatically generated from the Qty Reqd field. the figure in this field specifies the percentage ownership by your organisation. For more information. Total Cost This field displays the total requirements. at an item level in the hierarchy. Resource Hrs (Resource Hours) This field displays the resource hours for the item.3620 Costs tab (Estimate Items tab) The Costs tab provides for recording. refer to the following activities: Record Material Requirements for a Job Estimate Item Record Equipment Requirements for a Job Estimate Item Record Resource Requirements for a Job Estimate Item Costs which have been calculated are displayed with a . contractor and other costs for the item. Other Costs This field displays the other costs for the item.446 Work Orders . reviewing and maintaining requirement and contract costs. The fields on this tab are described below: Material Costs This field displays the material requirements costs for the item. The Estimate Costs tab displays the cost details for the Job Estimate requirements which have been recorded in the Requirements dialog box. Contract Costs This field displays the roll-up contractor costs for everything in the hierarchy below the selected item (including the selected item). © 2009 Mincom . Costs which have been manually recorded as displayed with a . Resource Costs This field displays the resource requirements costs for the item. Equipment Costs This field displays the equipment requirements costs for the item. Contract Costs (for this item only) This field displays the contractor costs for the selected item only. This information will be copied across to Ellipse entities such as work orders that are created from this estimate. Work Group The work group to be assigned to complete this work. © 2009 Mincom .EGI Profile Search to search for component and modifier codes. A segment range must exist and be set up in MSO600. If a component code was entered. This must be less than the Plan Finish Time. The fields on this tab are described below: Equipment Ref (Equipment Reference) The identification of the equipment on which work is to be performed. Note: Click the EGI Profile Search icon to display the Dialog Box . Plan Start Date (Planned Start Date) The date scheduled for starting the work. This field is mandatory if a Plan Start Time is entered. Segments Button Note: Click Segments to enter segment start and end values. The adjacent field displays the description of the code. Account Code The cost centre or account number where the work is to be charged. Entry is validated against the Table File CO . this field must be completed. Comp Code (Component Code) The code indicating the specific sub-assembly of the equipment. Entry is validated against the Table File MO – Modifier Code. Comp Mod Code (Component Modifier Code) The component modifier code used to further define the location specified by the component code.3620 447 Planning tab (Estimate Items tab) The Planning tab records information to assist with planning and scheduling programmed work at an item level in the hierarchy.Work Orders . Plan Start Time (Planned Start Time) The time scheduled for starting the work.Component Code. this field will default to either the Work Group start time. The new estimated duration hours is calculated from the original estimated duration divided by the original manual effort. then multiplied by the results of the new manual effort value.3620 If the Plan Start Date is today this field will default to the current time. Est Dur Hours (Estimate Duration Hours) The estimated duration in hours to complete this work. The location details will display in the associated fields.448 Work Orders . Location tab (Estimate Items tab) In the Location tab you can select a location for the item selected in the hierarchy. If the Plan Finish Date is today this field will default to the current time. Man Effort (Manual Effort) The total effort allocated to this item to increase/decrease the estimated duration hours. use the default working hour for the work group to calculate the Plan Finish Date from the Plan Start Date and Duration. according to the following rules: • If a Work Group is specified. The fields on this tab are described below: Location Enter a location or right-click to search and select. • If no Work Group is specified. Otherwise. or midnight. © 2009 Mincom . this field will default to either the Work Group start time. or midnight. assume a 24 hour working day to calculate the Plan Finish Date. This must be equal to or later than the Plan Start Date. Plan Finish Date (Planned Finish Date) The date scheduled for finishing the work. The Planned Finish Date and Planned Finish Time fields are also recalculated. Otherwise. This is used in conjunction with the Plan Start Date and Work Group to calculate the Plan Finish Date if one is not entered. When the manual effort value is modified the Estimated Duration Hours field is recalculated based on the new manual effort value. Plan Finish Time (Planned Finish Time) The time scheduled for finishing the work. This field is mandatory if a Plan Finish Time is entered. This field defaults to 1. For more information. Installation Identifier This entry is recorded for removal work. CPR Installation tab (Estimate Items tab) The CPR Installation tab is used to record information required for the unitisation process. The fields on this tab are described below: Property Unit Property Unit is the term used to refer to the level at which a company chooses to capitalise its assets. Enter the number of the plant account.3620 449 STREET NO The details of the location selected including street number. Enter the property unit code required for the selected item in the hierarchy. The fields on this tab are described below: © 2009 Mincom . Enter the year in which the material is to be retired. Enter the installation identifier. Unitisation tab (Estimate Items tab) The Unitisation tab allows input of information required for the unitisation process. ADDRESS The free-from address details of the located selected will display in these fields. The CPR location category codes are associated with the Table File LG. CPR Location Select a CPR location from the drop-down list. Asset Number The selected item will be capitalised against a plant account. It is only available if the Utilities Asset Accounting module (3930) is installed. city and post code will display in these fields.Work Orders . Vintage Year This entry is recorded for removal work. refer to the Utilities Asset Accounting module. the installation identifier is used to identify the asset. When a specific asset is to be retired. street name. CPR Location Category Select a CPR location category from the drop-down list. The fields on this tab are described below: © 2009 Mincom . Accepted Date This field displays the date the customer accepted the quotation. This information is generated when the status of the estimate is changed to QUOTE and details of the status change are recorded during the Record Quote Details for a Job Estimate activity. Tax Class Select a tax class for reporting purposes from the drop-down list. The fields on this tab are described below: Quoted By This field displays the employee code of the person providing the quote. The value is system-generated.450 Work Orders . Quoted Value The amount specified for the quote. transmission or distribution. Quote Status This field indicates the status of the quote. Estimate Location tab The Estimate Location tab is used to select and display the location details for the Job Estimate. Account Code Enter the account code to which costs for the selected item are to be charged. Quoted Date The date the quote was recorded. Quote Details tab The Quote Details tab displays details of a quote issued for the Job Estimate. Quoted Time The time the quote was recorded. Quantity Check Select this check box if you want the unitisation process to report discrepancies between estimated and actual quantities.3620 Business Category Enter the business category for the work that is to be conducted. for example. Issue Date This field displays the date the quote was issued. 3620 451 Location Enter or right-click to search and select a location code. Reference codes are used to define additional information about a Job Estimate and are powerful search criteria.Work Orders . Free Form Address This field displays the free form address information about the location. City The city of the location. GIS Reference This field displays the GIS (Graphical Information System) reference of the location. State This field displays the state the location is in. A reference code can be used: © 2009 Mincom . County The county of the location. Post/Zip Code The postcode or ZIP code of the location. Suburb The suburb of the location. Reference Codes tab Use the Reference Code tab to record reference code details for a Job Estimate. The reference codes tab enables you to view reference code information for a Job Estimate. ADDRESS Street Number The street number of the location. Street Name The street name of the location. Street Type This field displays the street type of the location. Street Position This field displays the street position of the location. A list of valid codes for Job Estimates displays. © 2009 Mincom . click on it to display the Dialog Box .452 Work Orders .3620 • To provide a link to another entity • As a search criterion when searching for Job Estimates The fields on this tab are described below: Reference Code The Reference Codes for Job Estimates are agreed during implementation. Text If the text icon is present.Standard Text. add or modify standard text as required. Reference Code Value Enter the value of the reference code for the Job Estimate. Use this dialog box to review. Description This field displays the description of the reference code value. see Add an Item to a Hierarchy. In the hierarchy panel you can create. A node can be a Project. The information in this section refers directly to the 'node' selected in the hierarchy and contains details of this item.Job Package The MSQ695 . A number can be entered directly or the up and down arrows can be used to select the number of nodes to be added.Work Orders . Existing Job Packages are accessed using the Dialog Box . Work Order.Open Existing. You can also package job estimates from the Include Job Estimates screen. refer to the Open a Job Package activity. sub-Project. The fields on this screen are described below: Node Count This number determines the number of Nodes to be added when creating a Job Package Hierarchy. For more information. which enables Job Packages related to either a Project. Parent Work Order. Tabs • Project Details • Project Codes • Parent WO Details • Work Order Details • Job Codes • WO Task Details Project Details tab The Project fields appear when you: • Add a Project to the hierarchy • Select a Project item in the hierarchy The icon against an item. Hint: MSQ695 does not contain a search screen. delete and review Job Packages and nodes on specific Job Package hierarchies. • To the right of the hierarchy panel is a detail section. The information displays in two sections: • The left section has a panel in which you can view and modify a hierarchy for a Job Package. it is highlighted. Node refers to a specific item in a Job Package hierarchy. indicates that it is a Project. The fields on this tab are described below: © 2009 Mincom . modify. For further information on using Node Counts . Work Order or Parent Work Order to be opened. or Work Order task.3620 453 MSQ695 .Job Package screen displays the current hierarchy and details for a Job Package. When the item is selected. Project Description This field displays the Project description. then search for and select an account code. Originator Id This field displays the ID of the person who created the Project. it will display when a new Project is added to the hierarchy. If the selected Project is a new item. then search for and select an equipment number. Raised Date This field displays the date on which the Project record was created. Prefix If a default value was entered for Project prefix. When you save the details entered on the Project tab the system allocates the next available Project Number with that prefix. This field is mandatory if you are adding a new Project.454 Work Orders . a Project number is automatically assigned when the Job Package is saved. © 2009 Mincom . You cannot enter both a Project Number and a Project Prefix. A description of the equipment appears in the adjacent field. If it has not yet been created and saved. You cannot enter both a Project Number and a Project Prefix. • If no default values have been set. If no default Project Prefix was set. If the Project involves rebuilding or constructing a major piece of equipment.3620 Project No This field displays the number of the Project selected in the hierarchy. that ID will display. Equipment Reference This field displays the equipment number that costs with this Project are charged against. • If the Default Values have been set with an alternative Originator ID. • If the Default values on the Project creation have been set to 'Use Logged in User' then the logged in user ID will display. the costs are charged against the equipment. A description of the account code appears in the adjacent field. If no default value has been set for the Equipment Number. The name of the person associated with the ID number displays in the adjacent field. Account Code This field displays the account code or cost centre to which this Project is allocated. enter a Project description. if the Project was previously saved. enter a Project prefix code from the Table File PX Project (AFE) Code Type. If no default value has been set for the Account Code. search for and select an employee number. if it has already been created. If a Project prefix number is entered. enter the Project number. This entry is automatically generated from details recorded against the Project. If no date is set as the default Raised Date. The fields on this tab are described below: Code Enter the job code or select it from the table file. Job Type The type of job defaults from the Project if an existing Project has been included. then select a date. Therefore.Project screen. The fields on this tab are described below: Parent WO (Parent Work Order) © 2009 Mincom . this tab only displays when a Project node is selected in the hierarchy.Work Orders . If an alternate date is set as the default date.J5 . the Job Type Enabled check box will be selected. Parent Project The identification number of the parent Project for the Project selected in the hierarchy.J5 Project Codes and are client-defined. On the Project Codes tab you can select specific job codes. the codes available will depend on which table files have been setup. Description The description of the job code displays from the Table File J1 . Units Required Contains the number of units needed to complete the Project as defined on the MSQ660 .Project Codes. Project Codes tab As Project codes are stored against Projects. Ellipse provides for 10 classification tables for job codes. Associated BPU Select this check box if an Install Bill of Property (IBPU) or a Remove Bill of Property (RBPU) is to be generated at the currently highlighted point in the hierarchy. If the Job Type can be altered. Parent WO Details tab The Parent WO Details tab displays when you add a Parent Work Order item to a Job Package. The icon against an item in the hierarchy indicates that the item is a Parent Work Order. When the item is selected. then that date will display. it is highlighted. then today's date will display.3620 455 If the default value is set to record today's date as the Raised Date. Job codes are validated on the Table File J1 . and a default was set on Dialog Box . it is highlighted. If no default displays.Job Package Default Values. the defaulted value will display in this field. and a default was set on Dialog Box . search for and select an employee number. Parent WO Description (Parent Work Order Description) This field displays a description of the Parent Work Order being added.Job Package Default Values. The fields on this tab are described below: Work Order If this is a new Work Order.Job Package Default Values. enter a Parent Work Order number or let the system generate one. Originator ID If this is a new Parent Work Order. If no default displays. enter a Work Order number or let the system generate one. Prefix If this is a new Work Order.Job Package Default Values. the defaulted value will display in this field. When the item The is selected. Modifications can be made as required. and a default was set on Dialog Box . Originator Description This field displays the name of the person who created the Parent Work Order. the defaulted value will display in this field. the defaulted value will display in this field. Work Order Description If this is a new Work Order. © 2009 Mincom . enter a Parent Work Order number or let the system generate one. and a default was set on Dialog Box . and a default was set on Dialog Box . and a default was set on Dialog Box . Prefix If this is a new Parent Work Order. If no default displays. enter a Work Order prefix.Job Package Default Values. If no default displays.3620 If this is a new Parent Work Order.456 Work Orders . the defaulted value will display in this field. If no default displays. Work Order Details tab The Work Order fields display when you: • Add a Work Order item to a Job Package • Select a Work Order item in the hierarchy icon against an item in the hierarchy indicates that the item is a Work Order. the defaulted value will display in this field.Job Package Default Values. This field displays the ID of the work group to which this Work Order is assigned. Search for and select an account code. the defaulted value will display in this field. If this is a new Work Order.3620 457 If no default displays. Originator Description This field displays the name of the person who created the Parent Work Order added or selected. If no default displays. This field is mandatory if you are adding a new Work Order. The adjacent field shows a description of the equipment. The adjacent field contains the name of the person who created the Work Order. The adjacent field shows a description of the Work Order type. Equipment Reference This field displays the equipment number that costs are charged against. if required. and a default was set on Dialog Box . Work Order Type If this is a new Work Order. Account Code This field displays the account code or cost centre to which the Work Order is allocated. enter a Work Order description. and a default was set on Dialog Box .Job Package Default Values. Work Group This field defaults from the Work Order added or selected. search for and select an equipment number. The adjacent field contains a description of the account code or cost centre to which this Work Order is allocated. select a Work Order type from the Table File WO . and a default was set on Dialog Box .Job Package Default Values. If no default displays. if required. the defaulted value will display in this field. and a default was set on Dialog Box . search for and select an employee number. If the Work Order involves rebuilding or constructing a major piece of equipment. search for and select a work group. the costs are charged against the equipment. If this is a new Work Order. the defaulted value will display in this field.Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom . Originator ID If this is a new Work Order. If no default displays.Job Package Default Values.Job Package Default Values. If no default displays. The adjacent field shows a description of the work group.Work Order Types. if required. Project No This field displays the identification number for the Project referenced by the Work Order. the defaulted value will display in this field. and a default was set on Dialog Box . On the Job Codes tab you can classify Work Orders based on the client-defined Table Files W0-W9 Work Order Job Codes. Therefore. Units Required This field displays the quantity of work that needs to be done before this Work Order is completed.J5 Project Codes and are client-defined. The fields on this tab are described below: Classification This field displays the descriptions of the classifications that exist.Job Package Default Values. Associated BPU Select this check box if an IBPU or a RBPU is to be generated at the currently highlighted point in the hierarchy.Job Package Default Values. the codes available will depend on which table files have been setup. select a location. select a maintenance type. Maintenance Type If this is a new Work Order. Job codes are validated on the Table File J1 . WO Task Details tab The Work Order Task fields appear when you: • Add a Work Order task item to a Job Package • Select a Work Order item in the hierarchy © 2009 Mincom . the defaulted value will display in this field.458 Work Orders . this tab only appears when a Work Order node is selected in the hierarchy. If no default displays. the defaulted value will display in this field. Location If this is a new Work Order.3620 Parent WO This field displays the identification number of the Parent Work Order added or selected. Description This field displays the description of the job code. The adjacent field shows a description of the maintenance type. If no default displays. and a default was set on Dialog Box . Job Codes tab As job codes are stored against Work Orders. Code Enter the job code or select it from the table file. If no default displays. the defaulted value will display in this field. Work Group If this is a new Work Order task. If no default displays. WO Task No.Work Orders . and a default was set on Dialog Box . If this is a new Work Order task. WO Task Description If this is a new Work Order task. enter a Work Order task number or allow the system to generate one. it is highlighted.3620 459 The icon against an item in the hierarchy indicates that the item is a Work Order task.Job Package Default Values. The adjacent field shows a description of the Work Order task number. the defaulted value will display in this field. enter a Work Order task description. Modifications can be made as required. Work Order This field displays the Work Order number to which the Work Order Task belongs. and a default was set on Dialog Box . When the item is selected. Units Required This field displays the quantity of work that needs to be done before the Work Order is completed. The adjacent field shows a description of the Work Group. and a default was set on Dialog Box .Job Package Default Values.Job Package Default Values. the defaulted value will display in this field. © 2009 Mincom . Sequence The sequence in which the transactions are displayed once retrieved.Search for Accounting Entry is the tool used to access the Journal Holding File to view accounting transactions generated within Ellipse. transaction details are displayed in the Accounting Entry detail screen. The search tabs can be used in conjunction with each other to refine search criteria and retrieve specific data.Search for an Accounting Entry. Use the popup table to select the view or leave blank for it to default to Transaction Creation Sequence. The search screen provides the functionality to locate and open an accounting entry. Hint: Another screen that is available for Transaction Retrieval and Review is MSO901 . When an accounting entry opens. It does not have to be the district that you are currently logged into.3620 MSQ901 .Transaction Selection for Review. Entry can be for any valid district you have access to. Pre Search tabs • Identifier • Transaction • Costing • Timing • Subledger • Object • Invoice • Voucher • Miscellaneous Identifier tab This tab provides the ability to define selection criteria to find the required accounting entry using the transaction number and transaction group. This contains the same selection criteria and displays the same output as MSQ901 . Search for Accounting Entry The fields on this screen are described below: District Code The District Code to retrieve transactions. the display format of the search criteria and output differs.460 Work Orders . The fields on this tab are described below: © 2009 Mincom . However.Accounting Entry The Journal Holding file is a file where all accounting transactions generated by the many modules in Ellipse are located. The MSQ901 . category and status.3620 461 TRANSACTION NUMBER From The transaction number this search is to commence from. Transaction tab This tab provides the facility to define selection criteria to find the required accounting entry using the transaction type. To The transaction category this search is to end at.Work Orders . The fields on this tab are described below: TRANSACTION TYPE From The transaction type this search is to commence from. STATUS From Enter one of the following to start the search from: © 2009 Mincom . To The transaction number for this search is to end at. CATEGORY From The transaction category this search is to commence from. To The transaction type this search is to end at. GROUP From The transaction group number this search is to commence from. To The transaction group number this search is to end at. To The expense element this search is to end at. JOURNAL From The journal number this search is to commence from. journal. Costing tab This tab provides the facility to define selection criteria to find the required accounting entry using the account. If a To value is not entered. the From value is the starting point of the search. The fields on this tab are described below: ACCOUNT From The costing account number this search is to commence from.3620 E Only review transactions not posted due to an error in the transaction N Only review non-posted and non-approved transactions P Only review posted transactions W Only review posted transactions with errors U Only review unapproved transactions To Enter the transaction status this search is to end at. COST CENTRE From The cost centre this search is to commence from. © 2009 Mincom . To The journal number this search is to end at.462 Work Orders . expense element and cost centre. EXPENSE ELEMENT From The expense element this search is to commence from. To The costing account number this search is to end at. If Transaction Date is selected. Timing tab This tab provides the facility to define selection criteria to find the required accounting entry using the transaction date. Transaction Type. creation date and accounting period. CREATION DATE From The creation date this search is to commence from.3620 463 To The cost centre this search is to end at. ACCOUNTING PERIOD From The accounting period this search is to commence from. then at least one additional field must be selected in combination. The access method will be determined from the additional field selected. © 2009 Mincom . The fields on this tab are described below: TRANSACTION DATE From The transaction date this search is to commence from. The fields on this tab are described below: SYSTEM ACCOUNT From The system account this search is to commence from.Work Orders . Subledger tab This tab provides the facility to define selection criteria to find the required accounting entry using the system account. To The system account this search is to end at. account type and sub-ledger account. To The creation date this search is to end at. for example. Category or Posted. To The accounting period this search is to end at. To The transaction date this search is to end at. work order. To The subledger account type this search is to commence from. The fields on this tab are described below: STOCK CODE From The stock code this search is to commence from. WORK ORDER From The work order this search is to commence from. To The work order this search is to end at. SUBLEDGER ACCOUNT From The sub-ledger account this search is to commence from. EQUIPMENT From The equipment number this search is to commence from.3620 TYPE From The subledger account type this search is to commence from. equipment and project. Object tab This tab provides the facility to define selection criteria to find the required accounting entry using the stock code. To The sub-ledger account this search is to end at. PROJECT © 2009 Mincom . To The stock code this search is to end at. To The equipment number this search is to end at.464 Work Orders . The fields on this tab are described below: ACCOUNTS PAYABLE SUPPLIER From The supplier number this search is to commence from. This field is made up of: • Asset Type . Where you provide an accounts payable invoice.A or E (Asset or Equipment) • Asset or Equipment Reference • Sub Asset Number Invoice tab This tab provides the facility to define selection criteria to find the required accounting entry using the accounts payable supplier/invoice or accounts receivable invoice. Asset Sub Asset Ref The sub asset reference code to search on.3620 465 From The project number this search is to commence from. To The supplier number this search is to end at. however. To The project number this search is to end at. You can.Work Orders . provide a supplier identifier without the accounts payable invoice values. © 2009 Mincom . you must also provide a supplier identifier. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE INVOICE From The accounts receivable invoice number this search is to commence from. To The accounts receivable invoice number this search is to end at. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE INVOICE From The accounts payable invoice number this search is to commence from. To The accounts payable invoice number this search is to end at. category code or value. XREF DISTRICT From The cross reference code this search is to commence from. district cross-reference.3620 Voucher tab This tab displays if voucher numbering is turned on. The voucher number consists of a district code. full accounting period and voucher sequence number. VALUE From The accounting entry value this search is to commence from. Miscellaneous tab This tab provides the facility to define selection criteria to find the required accounting entry using miscellaneous information such as requestor. transactions for that voucher number only display. © 2009 Mincom . The fields on this tab are described below: Voucher No From Enter the first (From) and last voucher number (To) in the range to be issued. To The employee id this search is to end at. To The accounting entry value this search is to end at. The fields on this tab are described below: REQUESTED BY From The employee ID this search is to commence from. CATEGORY CODE From The category code this search is to commence from. If only the Voucher No From field is entered. To The cross reference code this search is to end at.466 Work Orders . To The category code this search is to end at. Transaction Date This field displays the date the transaction was created. The fields on this tab are described below: Created On This field displays the date the transaction was created. Foreign Amount This field displays the value of the transaction in foreign currency and the currency type code. Transaction Type This field displays the transaction code and description.3620 467 Tabs • General • Details • Additional General tab This tab provides the ability to review information common to all accounting entries. Account This field displays the account number code. Secondary Amount This field displays the value of the transaction in secondary currency and the currency type code. Created At This field displays the time the transaction was created. © 2009 Mincom . Process Date This field displays the date the transaction was processed.Work Orders . Period This field displays the year/month the transaction was created. Transaction Amount This field displays the value of the transaction in local currency and the currency type code. Account Description This field displays the description of the account selected. Created By This field displays the user ID the transaction was created. a transaction created in the Fixed Asset module displays different information to a transaction created in the Materials module. The information displayed in this tab varies depending on the module used to create the original transaction. The fields on this tab are described below: Status Report This field displays the report status code and description. Status Posted This field displays the posting status code and description. Transaction Group This field displays the transaction group name. Additional tab This tab provides the facility to view additional information common to all accounting entries.3620 Details tab Information specific to the accounting entry selected is displayed on this tab. Xref District (Cross-Reference District) This field displays the cross-reference district code. For example. Voucher No Voucher number displays if voucher numbering is turned on. Consequently the combination of fields displayed is constantly changing.468 Work Orders . © 2009 Mincom .